Currently set to Index
Currently set to Follow
Learning by Thinking
<span class="vcard">Peter Horttanainen</span>
Peter Horttanainen
Featured

At the base of the spinal cord every human being has a powerful, yet dormant source of energy … If this awakening is to become a universal event, then the entire social structure has to be reorganized. Kundalini Yoga is a powerful, transformative, spiritual technology; fast, focused, and effective. It is your birthright and our life- purpose should be to access it. Tavistock Institute. Part 127

At the base of the spinal cord every human being has a powerful, yet dormant source of energy … If this awakening is to become a universal event, then the entire social structure has to be reorganized. Kundalini Yoga is a powerful, transformative, spiritual technology; fast, focused, and effective. It is your birthright and our life- purpose should be to access it. Tavistock Institute. Part 127

At the base of the spinal cord every human being has a powerful, yet dormant source of energy … If this awakening is to become a universal event, then the entire social structure has to be reorganized.

When the Kundalini energy reaches the crown chakra at the top of the head , “ the individual self merges in the universal Self.

It is so realized because the Spirit has then pierced through the veil of Maya which as mind and matter obscures this knowledge from itself. The means by which this is achieved is the Yoga process which liberates from Maya.

The idea of Shakti is prominent in Tantra where the Kundalini energy is directed toward attaining higher consciousness and liberation from ignorance

The divine mind, like the center of the heavens, is remote; Knowledge of it is difficult; the masses do not know it … Though a man may observe what the will of the god is, the masses do not know it [Lambert, 1996, p. 87].

Awakening of Kundalini:

When our mind enters Bajra (which starts from Swadisthan) Kundalini power awakens. Kundalini is a divine power which is in a sleeping state at the base of the spine. By doing second Kriya, Kundalini awakens. It is a great divine power. When you enter Swadhistan, Kundalini starts to awaken. When you enter Manipura, Kundalini is active. This kundalini, we have to bring up to sahasrasar. When our mind enters Chitra, this is where the kundalini gets activated and pure and sattvic (divine) intellect appears and the connection with this materialistic world ceases. You will come to know everything as well as whatever specific things you want to know.

In the beginning of Kriya practice, everything is dark in the inside world. We cannot assess anything at that time. We have to have full faith in the Guru and should practice as per the Guru’s guidance for a long time without any expectations. Then one can get success. Out of millions of people, only a few people try to practice Kriya yoga and of them, one or two get success. They are the real seekers. Real seekers never give up practising Kriya, whether they achieve or not. They have patience, trust in the Guru and they try to practice perfectly as per the Gurus’ advice. In the beginning, all three of these are required: faith in the Guru, practicing regularly and practicing correctly. Then one day we will start to get results – this is one hundred percent guaranteed.

We do not know how many times we have taken birth and died. By the grace of God, when we start realising the pain of birth and death, we want to get Moksha or salvation. We search for a real Gum who is the representative of God and He/she is the only one who can show us the path to God, turn our mind from the materialistic world to the Divine world, and show us the way to salvation.

Kundalini is our latent spiritual potential, depicted as a serpent coiled at the base of the spine. This latent force is awakened by Kundalini Yoga as a psychic nerve energy. Its purpose is to raise consciousness, ascending via the chakras to the crown, connecting to the Infinite and realizing Samadhi (enlightenment). Attempting or achieving this process is “raising Kundalini”. Bringing that awareness back down and applying it in the everyday world for the greater good is the less-talked-about completion of the Kundalini journey.

Kundalini: the Essence of Yoga

“Yoga” means “union” or “to yoke” in Sanskrit, describing the means for the Self to reunite with the whole. Every religion is a yoga in that each points to God, and every holistic practice is in essence a yoga in that it promotes the harmony of the whole. The postures commonly described as “yoga” make up but one of many yogic paths. “Kundalini” literally means “the coil in the hair of the beloved”, but symbolizes the uncoiling of the inner awareness of our spiritual nature. Kundalini Yoga is the means by which we can safely prepare to activate and channel Kundalini energy, to raise our consciousness through the chakras, and through which we can transform our height-ened spiritual awareness into constructive action. Kundalini Yoga is a powerful, transformative, spiritual technology; fast, focused, and effective. It is your birthright and our life- purpose should be to access it.

Yogic Energetic Physiology The purpose of raising Kundalini energy is to achieve Samadhi, to experience the full energy of consciousness or the energy of full consciousness. The Kundalini process fuses the energies of Shakti, the female principle, with Shiva, the male principle. Through practice of Kundalini Yoga the pranic force is directed downwards, as the apanic force is directed upwards, using the Mul Bandh and Uddiyana Bandh (see Bandhs, pp-134-5). This generates powerful psychic heat called Tapa. These forces are mixed at the Navel Point in an alchemical fusion of Shakti and Shiva energies. This energy is directed to penetrate the Base (First) Chakra, around which dormant Kundalini energy lies coiled. This initiates the awakening of Kundalini, which rises through the central Sushumna. If the channels of Ida and Pingala are clear, and the intent of the aspirant is pure, Kundalini can rise, activating each chakra, and realizing Samadhi. The ability to maintain or access this union gives spiritual liberation and is the fully awakened Kundalini. Kundalini energy is like a rocket; it may eventually transcend gravity, but its tendency is to be aroused, to rise up, and then fall back into its sleeping state.

Divine qualities inhere in it in a latent and finite form and a jiva can develop them through practice of a spiritual discipline by purifying the mind. One cannot develop them to an infinite level because individual mind is finite and remains so even with spiritual growth. Know it for certain that no spiritual progress is possible unless one cultivates divine qualities consciously through practice and, at the same time, shedding their undesirable counterparts.

Knowledge is the perception or recognition of a subject or an object by knowing its characteristics. For example, to know that a tiger has stripes, four legs and is carnivorous is its knowledge.

The divine consciousness uses its inherent knowledge to create the world appearance and its myriad objects. Knowledge is gained in the light that exists naturally in the consciousness. The veil of samaskaras partially blocks the divine light from enlightening the individual mind and, hence, the knowledge of objects that a jiva attains is incomplete and defective.

Objective knowledge is acquired by the consciousness, which is used for a variety of purposes; electricity, television, cars etc. have come into being through it only. Knowledge is not attained in darkness, as, for example, in deep sleep; hence, only wakeful consciousness is capable of gaining it.

The darkness of ignorance (i.e. lack of knowledge of one’s real nature) pervades the mind of an average jiva and the only way to overcome it is through the light of divine knowledge imparted by a competent guru or, in a general sense, by the knowledge contained in various scriptures, provided it is put into effect through practice. An earnest aspirant must understand the nature of knowledge in order to employ it in controlling the mind.

One cannot make substantive spiritual progress without it. Knowledge is of two types; absolute and relative. Absolute knowledge is the thing in itself and it is just another word for the Reality. It is neither gained (by anyone) nor is it lost and it requires no proof of its existence. It is known only by transcending or destroying the mind and is, therefore, indescribable in words. Relative knowledge is the knowledge that the mind acquires of its subjective and objective nature.

The anahata-cakra (e.g., heart-soul) has been recognized since the Vedas as a specific locus of the sacred, wherein was found …

the secret seat of the Divine and the location where the immortal sound om … can be heard…. Its seed syllable … is yam, which pertains to the wind element…. The heart-center is likened to the legendary wish-fulfilling tree…. Regular contemplation of this esoteric structure yields a variety of paranormal (siddhr) abilities, including immeasurable knowledge, clairaudi-ence, and clairvoyance [Feuerstein, 1997, p. 22].

The heart has also been, since the Vedas and probably before, the sym-bol for the core of being, the intersection of the microcosm and macrocosm, heaven and earth, the place of rest (e.g., home, destiny) of all beings as well as the location where the Self (purusha), the creator (Prajapan), and the ground of Being (Brahman) resided and from which all Being (e.g., soul united with spirit) emerged. The vision of one’s awakened nature, free of obscuration, occurs in the heart “…when the delusion which induces dreams is destroyed and the awakened (yogi) pervades (all things) at all times by penetrating the Divine Gesture (of enlightenment)” (Dyczkowski, 1992, p. 42).

By close attention, that is, by exercising the mind in such a way as to bring it to rest and turn it away from all external things, whether those of the everyday world or those of the world beyond it, the entire objective order dissolves away in the Heart which is the ground of consciousness that sus-tains all the senses and channels (of the vital breath). The ‘Heart’ is a term used to denote the emptiness of deep sleep as it (marks) the end (avadhs) of the upper Pure and lower Impure Paths (of emanation) because the activity (of the mind) is brought to a halt there and so the mind also dissolves away, just as fire goes out when devoid of heat. (The emptiness of the Heart is) a state of transcendental yogic consciousness beyond mind (nirmanaska). It is a ‘darkness’ devoid of all corporeal and other forms of egoity. Thus, (all) work which needs to be done to sustain the course of daily life and (is incumbent on those who preserve a sense of ego) such as the study of the Vedas, and here indicated implicitly by the words brahmin and ksatriya, comes to an end. In this, the emptiness of the Fourth State, (the yogi) per-ceives his true unobscured nature (svasvabhava) and the ignorance rooted in the senseless (anartha) world of birth and death (samsara) ceases. However, the man of unawakened intellect who happens to enter this state merely experiences sleep (Dyczkowski, 1992, p. 43].

The heart was the source of the creative word and thought, and in the Kashmiri Saiva texts,

The Heart is Bhairava’s true state as the absolute (anuttara) which pours out of itself as the supreme power (parasakti) of consciousness. Its throb is the pulsing union (ramghatta) of Siva and Sakti through which the universe is eternally emitted and reabsorbed as it expands and contracts. At the micro-cosmic level, its outpouring is the effulgent flow (rphurana) of awareness, in the form of the diverse objects of thought (cetya) and thinking subjects (cemyitr) while it itself abides, unaffected by time and space, in the plane beyond mind (unmana). As the source of all energies it is the pure exertion (udyoga) of the untreated egoity of our true conscious nature which is the union of will, knowledge and action and hence is said to be triangular vibration which is the incessant expansion and contraction of the three ener-gies at rest in the abode of great bliss.’ The great wisdom of the Spanda teachings should be treasured in secret in the cave of the Heart for he who reflects upon the inner nature of the Heart merges in the expansion of the vibration (samrambha) of his own consciousness and is liberated. Thus he who knows the Heart in truth gains the true initiation which bestows per-fect freedom and bliss IDyczkowski, 1992. pp. 44-5].

According to ancient Tao-ism the heart and the belly worked together. The heart is the regulator. It may hold fortune or misfortune, good or evil.

In the end, “…the saint is for the belly, not for the eyes’ … because it is in the belly he will attain ‘long life and distant vision…” (Lagerwey, 1987, p. 283).

Again, by Yogic practices, Mind can be used as a tool to control the mind just as the diamond is used to cut the diamond. One can attain the state in which the Mind succeeds in stilling the clamour of the sense organs and, in turn, the mind itself becomes pure, steady, and stilt This is the inner condition that all the spiritual aspirants seek; and, some are even successful to the extent of perceiving God

The Upanishads have declared the great truth ‘Tat tvam ast’, (Thou art that) i.e., ‘Man is divine’, or divinity is inherent in Man. If divinity is the innermost core of man, the path to it lies through the withdrawal of the senses and the mind from the world of sensate experience and diverting their energies inward in a supreme effort of concentration. By such inward penetration, man achieves realization, of his true nature, the non-dual, immortal, changeless and pure ‘Atman’ behind his apparent self of changeful individuality. This is the well known Adhyatma Yoga.

Controlling the mind and the senses, and directing their energies to higher purpose comes under austerity or tapas. There should be no place for argument in any of these practices. In Yoga, the efforts are directed to rise above the sensuate level and intellect level and to reach intuition level.

Pranayama is the means for establishing control over the nerves and muscles involved in breathing, and through that control, over all the finer movements of the Prana in the body. The ultimate purpose of Pranayama' is to arouse Kundalini, the one and the only way to attain Divine wisdom, superconscious perception- realisation of the spirit. This may come through the love of God, through the mercy of a spiritual leader or saint, or merely through analytical will of the thinker. When by the power of long meditation the vast mass of energy stored up travels along the Sushumna, - and strikes the centres, the reaction is tremendous, immensely superior to the reaction of dream or imagination, or even more intense than the reaction of even sense perception. It is supersensuous perception. When this energy reaches the head, theSahasrara Chakra’, a thousand-petalled Lotus, the whole brain reacts, and the result is full blaze of illumination, the perception of the Self. This is the result of rousing the Kundalini by Pranayama.

The concentrated apana stimulates fire – energy there, and fire – energy, together with apana, arouses Kundalini.

According to yoga theories, once prana is drawn into the body and properly restrained, it can be directed into subtle energy channels called nadis. These nadis course through the body like nerves or acupuncture meridians. These subtle channels are be-lieved to carry our spiritual energy. When you can control the prana in the nadis, it can be directed to arouse kundalini, the form of cosmic energy that lies sleep-ing at the base of the spine. As kundalini moves up the spine, it activates the spiritual energy centers known as chakras. This whole process is believed to awaken your dormant higher con-sciousness, a state of deep understanding and wisdom.

For the average seeker, even today, kundalini is a supernatural force which can work wonders when aroused. Quite a number of people have awakened this supernatural force.

No doubt these are supernatural powers to the ignorant persons, as these powers are uncommon in this world and in ordinary walks of life. All the supernatural powers live in a subtle or unmanifested form in the different centres of the body of a person as long as the Kundalini Shakti lives in the lowest-centre, Mulaclham But when the Kundalini Shakti ascends from centre to centre, then these dormant powers come into action and one gets different hidden powers at different Chakras.

The vertebral column has the spinal cord running through it and it starts from moolaadhaara and ends up in the brain in the lumbar vertebrae as fine nerve fibres. Two nerve currents flow on two sides of the spinal cord, called ‘Ida’ (the afferent nerve) and ‘Pingala’ (the efferent nerve) carrying sensations to the brain and in turn convey the reactions of the brain to the body.

Between these two nerve currents is ‘Stishumnas (canal centralis). This canal is closed at the bottom and ordinarily does not perform any function unless it is aroused to do. Yogis who practice Kundalini open this canal and let the nerve current pass through this hollow canal without the help of nerves. This is the medium that established contact with Super-Consciousness with the environment during evolution but finally got entrapped.

The release of the bondage of the body and to establish the contact with the ‘Universal Consciousness’ is the purpose of practice of Kundalini Yoga. When the Sushumna canal is opened up and mental currents are passed through its empty space, the bondage of the body is released and the yogi establishes the contact with the Super-Consciousness.

You can overcome all the challenges of Maya, which you face, through just contemplating on the knowledge which God has given.’

Maya is the mind and matter vestures of the human personality that obscures the realisation of the identity of the human and the Divine . The veil of Maya is pierced through the process of Kundalini Yoga when the three gordian knots reach the crown chakra

Now, what we want is to check, to restrain, and to control this downward flow of the energy of the Kundalini Shakti and instead, to make the Shakti rise up to higher planes or centres. This is what is meant by awakening the Kundalini Shakti.

This act of restraint and this act of taking the Kunda-lini Shakti upward is an adamantine task. It is not easy. It is not the work of one or two days or months. But it may take years of hard and ardent work ; or it may even be a life-long struggle. This effort to take the Kundalini Shakti to the higher planes, is just like forcing a mountain stream back to its source from the plains. With all that, one has to do it. There is no other way. There is no other alternative.

One must be prepared for all odds. One should never get nervous. One must make a strong and sincere effort continuously till one is blessed with success. The spiritual path is very long, weary and tedious. There are many pitfalls and dangers on the way. One may expect a fall at any time. But with all these silly failures and pitfalls, one should never lose hope.

One should never get dejected. No. Not the least. With every failure one should summon up fresh courage and resume the work undertaken with an iron will. Then, and then only, one will be blessed with success. That is why the weak have no place in religion.

Featured

What is the Soul? The veil of maya on the consciousness consists of three layers. When we attain this vision, we destroy the veil of Maya or illusion. Practice aims to draw back the veils that shroud this space. Maya can be realized only after the heart-knot is released” Tavistock Institute . Part 126

What is the Soul? The veil of maya on the consciousness consists of three layers. When we attain this vision, we destroy the veil of Maya or illusion. Practice aims to draw back the veils that shroud this space. Maya can be realized only after the heart-knot is released” Tavistock Institute . Part 126

What is the Soul?

The soul is the entity in the body, which fire cannot burn, weapons can not cut, water can not make wet & air can not make dry. Saying one is eternal means one was there from the beginning of creation; he is here now and will be here in the future too. He is immutable, unmoved and unchanged.

Though we are a part of the Universal Soul, we are acting like good actors in this worldly stage, playing the role of people in suffering and distress under the veil of Maya or ignorance. The difference between the Individual soul (Jivatma) and the Universal Soul (Paramatma) lies in the fact that Paramatma is free from all sins and bindings generated out of this ignorance and bondage.

Bodily Pleasure and Salvation.

The intellect of the person who is not attached with the Universal Soul, is not definite. It means his intellect is directionless and averse to the path of Yoga. His/her mind is full of desires and cannot perceive the Divine Light. The mind of this person is always restless, always full of thoughts of desire and lust. Such a restless mind cannot bring bliss. The Aantarjagat (internal world) becomes covered with a dark cloud because of the veil, and the Divine Light cannot manifest. To overcome this, self-control is very much required. Otherwise it is very difficult to control the outward senses. Without this, there will be no progress on the spiritual path.

Expectations cause many problems. There is no end to expectations. Once fulfilled, another expectation begins. The process is never ending. One does not take shelter in one’s good thoughts because of attraction towards bodily pleasures. One cannot easily forget the bodily pleasure and if he/she sees anything which can give bodily pleasure, one’s lust gets ignited.

The Sadhak knows in his heart that bodily pleasures result in death. In spite of that he continues to try to get hold of these bodily pleasures. At this point, self-determination is a must. Also, it is required to practice Kriya following strict discipline. If one practices Kriya following strict discipline and with self-determination, he/she will be free from this cycle of birth and death forever.

Satya, Rajo, and Tamo Gunas (Three types of effects on the mind)

Our mind is always ruled by one of the three Gunas i.e. Satya, Rajo and Tamo. For this reason, one or another type of desire is always occupying our mind.

The veil of maya on the consciousness consists of three layers, which conform to its three gunas (attributes; satva, rajas and tamas). The consciousness is conditioned by maya’s three qualities into three different forms as satvic, rajasic and tamasic.

The Sanskrit word Upanishad translates roughly as “instruction received at the feet of the master.” The writings known collectively as “The Upanishads” are important spiritual treatises (the oldest were written between 800 and 400 B.C.E.) that underlie the Hindu faith. These teachings are based upon the belief that reality can only be experienced as the unity of Atman (the eternal spark within each being) and Brahman (the universal transcendent). When we attain this vision, we destroy the veil of Maya or illusion. The study which leads to this liberation is called Yoga.

When we attain this vision, we destroy the veil of Maya or illusion. Practice aims to draw back the veils that shroud this space.

Because Sansara is the bustle of the world ; it is full not their eyes are covered with the veil of Maya. The veil of maya makes us feel our own.

The Concept of ‘Maya’, Illusion We are all bubbles in the foam and waves of the cosmic ocean of the universe and, as such, our whole existence is a ‘make-believe’ world or magic. What all we perceive is just an image on the screen, on the retina. Remove the screen the objects disappear.

This Mind is ‘Maya’, the illusion that brings about further creation of perishable and futile objects that further covers our pure consciousness. This Mind cannot overcome ‘Maya’, the illusion since the mind itself is maya, the illusion. It cannot eliminate itself. Hence, one should have a clear sense of the world he lives in and strive for understanding the `Sat’ or the truth. This is the path of redemption from cycle of births and deaths.

Maya is Anadi-Santam (beginning-less but has the end) only for the Jnani who has the knowledge of the Sel. Maya can be realized only after the heart-knot is released. Unless one is fit from mamata and attachment maya cannot be realised. It is very difficult to realize the Maya and once Maya is realized there exists no world or sansar for the released one, the `Jnyani’.

The goal of life is to; stilling the mind. It is quietening the mind and stopping its vibration. When the vibrations that cause china vrittis cease, automatically, the mind comes to rest. This is the right state of mind to transcend time and space by contemplation. But this is not an easy task. The mind is ever active and, the mind and the senses always search for new thrill and excitement and the intensity and velocity of vibrations increase

Attaining Self is the means of breaking this cycle of life and be liberated into freedom. Only the Self is capable of controlling the mind since the Self is the master of the Mind. Contemplating on Mind in dhyan and meditation is the right way to control the mind.

“Maya can be realized only after the heart-knot is released”.

Open the heart knot with meditation and mantras There is a subtle knot of the ego holding us back from fully opening to our divinity. It is in our subtle bodies at the heart—a knot of separation from the divine. The knot is called Vishnu granthi. Vishnu is the Hindu God of Maintenance. This symbolically reflects our tendency to want to hold onto status quo, not allowing old modes of thinking and being to dissolve to create new ones. It binds the ego to doer-ship and attachment to the physical realm, attachment to compassion and to alleviation of suffering. There is nothing wrong with that; however, as we evolve, we understand that challenges and suffering are for our expansion. We learn to allow a person’s soul journey to occur by stepping back and not engaging so actively in being their saviour: preventing, relieving or fixing. We become a ‘compassion master’ with support and love. Our egos like to ‘do’ and ‘control’, whereas unravelling the knot is surrendering to God—to the divine inside us and allowing each person to have their full experience.

Its energy regenerates every cell, filling it with light, dissolves all negativities, misunderstandings, clears the heart; unravels the heart knot and breaks the bondage of ego identification.

The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it. As long the mind is in power and the heart knot is closed the ego will design a world that´s fits the ego and it will enslave everyone into its Matrix. The ego use the five senses to feed the mind with ego-control-information that strenghten separation, creates division in the mind, and feeding it with ignorance, feeding it with fear based “news”. Everything on Earth is basically a design to keep mankind in a state of low vibrational frequencies within a Matrix, and prevent everyone to pierce the knot of the heart.

The goal is to; untie the heart-knot and clear it of obstructions.

There is no direct, permanent, or public access to the divine. Each destiny has a unique curvature and must find its own spiritual belonging and direction. Individuality is the only gateway to spiritual potential and blessing. The heavens will always speak to man on earth. For it is the established order of creation, that life and light should descend from the higher to the lower, from the interior to the external, from the inner to the outer circles of existence.

This saying by a famous Indian mystic clearly demonstrates the gap between the “ rational ” mind and the loving heart.

Healing the mind takes place in two ways : In the first , we bring attention to the content of our thoughts and learn to redirect them

“The deepest you is the nothing inside, the side which you don’t know. Don’t be afraid of nothing.” —Alan Watts

The unseen is the uneatable ones and the secluded one is the lord, the almighty, the healer for all wounds. The invisible sees and knows everything your life consists of, because the appearance is such a beautiful bliss. Nothing can separate you from it, only the secluded one can limit your days of reality.

The goal is to; untie the heart-knot and clear it of obstructions.

Primitive and ancient seers most likely would not agree with Meier (1989) that “Western man seems to be roughly on the level of the Anahata.” In fact the Pueblo Amerindian’s criticism of the White Man, referred to by Meier, seems to make precisely this point — that the White Man is not on the level of the anahata, but more or less over and against it in a pathological detach-ment from the natural seat of the soul in the body. The Western White Man is fixated in immaturity— i.e., acting as an ignorant fool whose “…heart fretteth against the Lord” (Mal 1:9). That is, Western psychology is caught up in a swoon produced by the romantic dream that, as a result of virtuous seeking and/or intellectual understanding.

In the Tibetan Vajrayan path of Tantric Buddhism the “Fulfillment Stage” required knowledge of how to immerse oneself in existentiality.

It has been said that all understanding in the Fulfillment Stage must stem from immersion in one’s existentiality, which must take place mainly in the heart focal point. This is because the essential feature of the Fulfillment Stage, the realization of both the apparitional existence and the radiant light … depends on unraveling the “knots” in the heart [Guenther, 1971, p. 142].

The “knots” of the heart were unraveled by loosening them, not by attempt-ing to tie them in different ways, as so many modern individuals, engaged in the unguided pursuit of short-cuts to enlightenment through “religious disciplines” purveyed in eclectic cults, seem determined to do. In the ancient Indian religious traditions the heart is clearly an essential way-station on the path toward enlightenment, its importance varying among traditions but its pivotal role remaining intact.

The “knots” of the heart were unraveled by loosening them, not by attempting to tie them in different ways. as so many modern individuals. engaged in the unguided pursuit of short-cuts to enlightenment through “religious disciplines” purveyed in eclectic cults. seem determined to do. In the ancient Indian religious traditions the heart is clearly an essential way-station on the path toward enlightenment, its importance varying among traditions but its pivotal role remaining intact.

Muller-Ortega (1989) summarizes the early Indian discourse of the heart as follows:

Depending upon the context, views about the contents of the Heart vary. In the Vedic contexts, the soma is found in the Heart, along with visions, sounds. light, and liquids. which all either are contained in or flow from the Heart. In the Upanisadic texts. the Heart becomes the abode of atman, the Self. Because of the powerful equation between the atman and the Mailman, the Heart becomes a kind of interior universe, a repository of wholeness and completeness. This interior universe is referred to in the texts as the City of Brahman. In the Yoga-sutra. the Heart is in a sense demoted. Because of the total transcendence of the peruse demanded by the Samkhya-Yoga scheme, the Heart becomes the abode of the buddhi, the closest prakrtic counterpart to the atman. The curious fact about this entire process of change is that while new inflections of meaning continue to occur around the symbol. the older meanings do not fade totally from the scene. Instead they remain pres-ent in a subtly reinflected form Ipp. 74-5).

The reason the heart-soul did not and could not entirely disappear from these religious traditions was that it remained the experiential location of spiritual transformation, however that may have been defined and described.

Another reason why this experiential location remained central may be found in the Kundalini tradition which is based on differentiating the various locations of concentrated spiritual energy in the body. In the Indian psycho-biology of the Kundaiini the name of the heart cakra. the anahara-cakra, means the “unassailable” and this cakra is associated with the emergence of the Self or alma” (Meier, 1989): ‘Here, too, is the embodied anna (jivarma), like the tapering flame of a lamp” (Avalon, 1972, p. lxi). The anahata represents the element air, which in turn is represented by the lungs wherein the heart is embedded and the heart where the prana (breath) inspires the heart-soul.

After full enlighttment, there is no more birth and death. Total salvation is achieved.

Such is the nature of afflicted mind. This is due to ignorance that shrouds the Reality. Love dissipates when Man loses his sense of God. Extreme ego, identification with oneself in his body and mind and the earthly possessions makes him blind. It is this blindness that is the cause of all problems of life. Pure, unconditional love is associated with spirituality. Science and rationality know no love; and, love is a divine quality.

Featured

The word kundalini actually comes from the word kunda, meaning “a deeper place, pit or cavity”. Luxury and comfort weaken the will and keep man under constant hypnosis. Formerly there were only a few seekers, but now millions and millions of people in the world are striving for a higher experience. Everybody should know something about kundalini as it represents the coming consciousness of mankind. Who can awaken kundalini? Tavistock Intsitute. Part 125

The word kundalini actually comes from the word kunda, meaning “a deeper place, pit or cavity”. Luxury and comfort weaken the will and keep man under constant hypnosis. Formerly there were only a few seekers, but now millions and millions of people in the world are striving for a higher experience. Everybody should know something about kundalini as it represents the coming consciousness of mankind. Who can awaken kundalini? Tavistock Intsitute. Part 125

Kundalini is a universal event. Kundalini is at once the most personal and the most universal experience we can have.

The seat of kundalini is a small gland at the base of the spinal cord. With the evolution of the natural forces in man, this gland has now come to a point where man can explode it. Quite a number of people have awakened this supernatural force and they have been called rishis, prophets, yogis, siddhas and various other names according to the time, tradition and culture. In India the entire cultural setup was once organized to facilitate this explosion, but today things are a little different because materialism is a very powerful force, and for the moment, it has even stupefied the Indian minds.

For the awakening of kundalini, not only are the practices of yoga required. If this awakening is to become a universal event, then the entire social structure has to be reorganized and millions of people all over the world have to be told the purpose of their existence.

The whole life from the time of conception to the moment when you leave the body, each and every thing has to be reoriented. You will see in this book how even the instinctive and emotional interaction between man and woman must be revised and refined, so that it can lead us not away from, but towards, this ultimate awakening.

This reorientation has to be undertaken with the purpose of expanding the mind and opening new doors of experience. Today we are living in a world where everyone is more or less satisfied. Man has all the comforts and everything he needs and does not need. There will come a time, however, when man will be prepared to throw off these comforts. Luxury and comfort weaken the will and keep man under constant hypnosis.

He cannot pull himself away from them. It is impossible unless he has become aware of something more than what society could give him. Formerly there were only a few seekers, but now millions and millions of people in the world are striving for a higher experience.

And this higher experience is known as knowledge. When, through yoga and tantra, the awakening of kundalini takes place, a process of metamorphosis occurs in the realm of nature and in the realm of spirit. The elements of the physical body change and the elements of the mental body also. It may be difficult for people of today to understand the whole concept, but soon humanity will comprehend it all. Matter will become unnecessary and insignificant. Behind the matter and behind the mind there is energy and there is an experience of that energy.

Proceed slowly, sensibly and systematically
Yet, you should not try to realize and experience these things abruptly. You will find here detailed instructions on the gradual preparation of your mind and body for the arousal of kundalini, and advice on elementary precautions to be observed in order to avoid unnecessary risks and obstacles. Do not try to influence your mind directly, because the mind is nothing but an extension of the body complex. Start systematically with the body, the prana, the nadis and chakras. Then see how you evolve.

The discovery of the great energy began with matter. Did nuclear energy descend from heaven? No, it evolved from crude matter. Where does the experience generate from? From heaven? From the sanctum sanctorum? No, from this body and this nervous system. That is how you should be practical and sensible.

To the awakening of kundalini. It begins with an expanded understanding of the true role and potential of the body and nervous system, moving through an exhaustive examination of the different methods of awakening suitable for different personalities and conditions. You will find clear and direct instructions on the actual yogic and tantric techniques to be practised towards this goal, together with a map of possible experiences you may encounter as the practices mature, so that you can sustain this great awakening and integrate it into a more conscious and creative way of life.

We have included here a systematic schedule of practice, within the context of a philosophy that is both pragmatic and transcendental, to prepare you in every way for this great adventure in consciousness.

What is Kundalini?

Everybody should know something about kundalini as it represents the coming consciousness of mankind. Kundalini is the name of a sleeping dormant potential force in the human organism and it is situated at the root of the spinal column. In the masculine body it is in the perineum, between the urinary and excretory organs. In the female body its location is at the root of the uterus, in the cervix.

This center is known as mooladhara chakra and it is actually a physical structure. It is a small gland which you can even take out and press. However, kundalini is a dormant energy, and even if you press it, it will not explode like a bomb. To awaken kundalini you must prepare yourself through yogic techniques.

You must practise asanas, pranayama, kriya yoga and meditation. Then, when you are able to force your prana into the seat of kundalini, the energy wakes up and makes its way through sushumna nadi, the central nervous canal, to the brain.

As kundalini ascends, it passes through each of the chakras which are interconnected with the different silent areas of the brain. With the awakening of kundalini there is an explosion in the brain as the dormant or sleeping areas start blossoming like flowers. Therefore, kundalini can be equated with the awakening of the silent areas of the brain.

Although kundalini is said to reside in mooladhara chakra, we are all at different stages of evolution, and in some of us kundalini may have already reached swadhisthana, manipura or anahata chakra. If this is so, whatever sadhana you do now might start an awakening in anahata or some other chakra. However, awakening of kundalini in mooladhara chakra is one thing, and awakening in sahasrara, the highest center of the brain, is another. Once the multipetalled lotus of sahasrara blossoms, a new consciousness dawns.

Our present consciousness is not independent, as the mind depends on the information supplied by the senses. If you have no eyes, you can never see; if you are deaf, you will never hear. However, when the superconsciousness emerges, experience becomes completely independent and knowledge also becomes completely independent.

What the various names for kundalini mean

In Sanskrit, kundal means a coil, and so kundalini has been described as “that which is coiled”. This is the traditional belief, but it has been incorrectly understood. The word kundalini actually comes from the word kunda, meaning “a deeper place, pit or cavity”. The fire used in the ceremony of initiation is kindled in a pit called kunda. Similarly, the place where a dead body is burned is kunda. If you dig a ditch or a hole it is called kunda. Kunda refers to the concave cavity in which the brain, resembling a coiled and sleeping serpent, nestles. (If you have the opportunity of examining a dissection of the human brain you will see that it is in the form of a coil or snake curled up upon itself.) This is the true meaning of kundalini.

The word kundalini refers to the shakti or power when it is in its dormant potential state, but when it is manifesting, you can call it Devi, Kali, Durga, Saraswati, Lakshmi or any other name according to the manifestation it is exhibiting before you.

In the Christian tradition, the terms “the Path of the Initiates” and “the Stairway to Heaven” used in the Bible, refer to kundalini’s ascent through sushumna nadi. The ascent of kundalini and ultimately, the descent of spiritual grace, are symbolized by the cross This is why Christians make the sign of the cross at ajna, anahata and vishuddhi chakras, for ajna is the center where the ascending consciousness is transcended and anahata is where the descending grace is made manifest to the world.

Whatever happens in spiritual life, it is related to the awakening of kundalini. And the goal of every form of spiritual life, whether you call it samadhi, nirvana, moksha, communion, union, kaivalya, liberation or whatever, is in fact awakening of kundalini.

When kundalini has just awakened and you are not able to handle it, it is called Kali. When you can handle it and are able to use it for beneficial purposes and you become powerful on account of it, it is called Durga.

Durga wears a mala of human heads to symbolize her wisdom and power. These heads are generally 52 in number, representing the 52 letters of the Sanskrit alphabet, which are the outer manifestations of Shabda Brahma or Brahma in the form of sound. Durga is the remover of all evil consequences of life and the giver of power and peace that is released from mooladhara.

According to yoga philosophy, Kali, the first manifestation of the unconscious kundalini is a terrible power; it completely subdues the individual soul.

Kundalini is illustrated as a sleeping serpent coiled three and a half times. Of course there is no serpent residing in mooladhara, sahasrara or any other chakra, but the serpent has always been a symbol for efficient consciousness.

In Scandinavian, European, Latin American and Middle Eastern countries and many different civilizations of the world, the concept of the serpent power is represented in monuments and ancient artifacts. This means kundalini was known to people from all parts of the world in the past. However, we can conceive kundalini in any manner we like because actually, prana has no form or dimension, it is infinite.

In the traditional descriptions of kundalini awakening, it is said that kundalini resides in mooladhara in the form of a coiled snake and when the snake awakens it uncoils and shoots up through sushumna (the psychic passage in the center of the spinal cord), opening the other chakras as it goes (see Sir John Woodroffe’s The Serpent Power).

The meaning of the 3 1/2 coils of the serpent is as follows: The 3 coils represent the 3 matras of Om, which relate to past, present and future; to the 3 gunas: tamas, rajas and sattva; to the 3 states of consciousness: waking, sleeping and dreaming; and to the 3 types of experience: subjective experience, sensual experience and absence of experience. The 1/2 coil represents the state of transcendence, where there is neither waking, sleeping nor dreaming. So, the 3 1/2 coils signify the total experience of the universe and the experience of transcendence.

Who can awaken kundalini?

There are many people who have awakened their kundalini. Not only saints and sadhus, but poets, painters, warriors, writers, anyone can awaken their kundalini. With the awakening of kundalini, not only visions of God take place, there is dawning of creative intelligence and an awakening of supramental faculties. By activating kundalini you may become anything in life.

The energy of kundalini is one energy, but it expresses itself differently through the individual psychic centers or chakras – first in gross instinctive ways and then in progressively more subtle ways. Refining of the expression of this energy at higher and more subtle levels of vibration represents the ascent of human consciousness to its highest possibilities.

Kundalini is the creative energy; it is the energy of self-expression.

A process of metamorphosis

With the awakening of kundalini, a transformation takes place in life. It has little to do with one’s moral, religious or ethical life. It has more to do with the quality of our experiences and perceptions. When kundalini wakes up your mind changes and your priorities and attachments also change.

When kundalini awakens, the physical body actually undergoes many changes. Generally they are positive, but if your guru is not cautious, they can be negative also. When the shakti wakes up, the cells in the body are completely charged and a process of rejuvenation also starts. The voice changes, the smell of the body changes and the hormonal secretions also change. In fact, the transformation of cells in the body and brain takes place at a much higher rate than normal. These are just a few observations. However, scientific researchers are still taking their first steps into this field.

Why awaken kundalini?

If you want to take up the practice of kundalini yoga, the most important thing is that you have a reason or an aim. If you want to awaken kundalini for psychic powers, then please go ahead with your own destiny. But if you want to awaken kundalini in order to enjoy communion between Shiva and Shakti, the actual communion between the two great forces within you, and if you want to enter samadhi and experience the absolute in the cosmos, and if you want to understand the truth behind the appearance, and if the purpose of your pilgrimage is very great, then there is nothing that can come to you as an obstacle.

By means of kundalini awakening, you are compensating with the laws of nature and speeding up the pace of your physical, mental and spiritual evolution. Once the great shakti awakens, man is no longer a gross physical body operating with a lower mind and low voltage prana. Instead, every cell of his body is charged with the high voltage prana of kundalini. And when total awakening occurs, man becomes an embodiment of divinity.

Kundalini Physiology

Kundalini or the serpent power does not belong to the physical body, though it is connected to it. Nor can it be discovered in the mental body or even the astral body. Its abode is actually in the causal body, where the concepts of time, space and object are completely lost.

How and where is the concept of kundalini related to the supreme consciousness? The serpent power is considered to arise from the unconscious state in mooladhara. This unconscious awareness of man then has to pass through different phases and becomes one with the cosmic awareness in the highest realm of existence. The supreme awareness or Shiva is considered to be seated in sahasrara, the superconscious or transcendental body at the crown of the head. In the Vedas, as well as the Tantras, this supreme seat is called hiranyagarbha, the womb of consciousness. It corresponds to the pituitary body, the master gland situated within the brain.

Immediately below this center of supreme consciousness, there is another psychic center – the third eye or ajna chakra, which corresponds to the pineal gland. This is the seat of intuitive knowledge. This center lies on top of the spinal column, at the level of bhrumadhya, the eyebrow center. Ajna chakra is important because it is simultaneously connected with the seat of supreme consciousness in sahasrara and with mooladhara, the seat of the unconscious, at the base of the spine, via sushumna, the psychic passage within the spinal column. Therefore, it is the connecting link between the lowest unconscious seat of power and the highest center of illumination within the individual.

Kundalini yoga is not abstract. It considers this very physical body as the basis. For a kundalini yogi, the supreme consciousness represents the highest possible manifestation of physical matter in this body. The matter of this physical body is being transformed into subtle forces – such as feeling, thinking, reasoning, remembering, postulating and doubting, in the gradual process of evolution. This psychic, suprasensory or transcendental power in man is the ultimate point of human evolution.

The importance of awakening sushumna

Sushumna nadi is regarded as a hollow tube in which there are three more concentric tubes, each being progressively more subtle than the previous one. The tubes or nadis are as follows: sushumna – signifying tamas, vajrini – signifying rajas, chitrini – signifying sattva and brahma – signifying consciousness. The higher consciousness created by kundalini passes through brahma nadi.

When kundalini shakti awakens it passes through sushumna nadi. The moment awakening takes place in mooladhara chakra, the energy makes headway through sushumna up to ajna chakra.

Mooladhara chakra is just like a powerful generator. In order to start this generator, you need some sort of pranic energy. This pranic energy is generated through pranayama. When you practise pranayama you generate energy and this energy is forced down by a positive pressure which starts the generator in mooladhara. Then this generated energy is pushed upward by a negative pressure and forced up to ajna chakra. Therefore, awakening of sushumna is just as important as awakening of kundalini. Supposing you have started your generator but you have not plugged the cable, the generator will keep running but distribution will not take place. You have to connect the plug into the generator so the generated energy can pass through the cable to the different areas of your house.

When only ida and pingala are active and not sushumna, it% like having the positive and negative lines in your electrical cable, but no earth. When the mind receives the three currents of energy all the lights start working, but if you remove the earth wire, the lights will go down. Energy flows through ida and pingala all the time, but its effulgence is very low. When there is current flowing in ida, pingala and sushumna, then enlightenment takes place. This is how you have to understand the

The whole science of kundalini yoga concerns the awakening of sushumna, for once sushumna comes to life, a means of communication between the higher and lower dimensions of consciousness is established and the awakening of kundalini occurs. Shakti travels up sushumna to become one with Shiva in sahasrara.

When the roots of a plant are watered properly, the plant grows and its flowers bloom forth beautifully. Similarly, when kundalini awakening occurs in sushumna, awakening occurs in all the stages of life. But if awakening only occurs in ida or pingala or in one of the other centers, it is by no means complete. Only when kundalini shakti awakens and travels up the sushumna passage to sahasrara is the entire store of higher energy in man unleashed.

The mystical tree

In the 15th Chapter of the Bhagavad Gita there is a description of the “imperishable tree” which has its roots at the top and its trunk and branches below, growing downwards. He who knows this tree knows the truth. This tree is existing in the structure and function of the human body and nervous system. One must know and climb this paradoxical tree to arrive at the truth. It can be understood in this way: the thoughts, the emotions, the distractions and so on, are only the leaves of this tree whose roots are the brain itself and whose trunk is the spinal column. It is said that one has to climb this tree from the top to the bottom if he wishes to cut the roots.

This tree seems to be completely topsy-turvy, yet it contains the essence of all occult truth and secret knowledge. It cannot be understood intellectually, but only through progressive spiritual awakening, for spiritual understanding always dawns in a way which is paradoxical and irrational to the faculty of intellect. This same tree is called the ‘Tree of Life’ in the ‘Tree of Knowledge’ in the Bible. Its understanding forms the basis of religious traditions, but unfortunately it has been completely misunderstood by and large, for a very long time.

So it is that everybody who is trying to move from mooladhara to sahasrara is climbing to the root every time, and the root is at the top, the brain, the sahasrara. Mooladhara is not the root center at all. So if you are moving from swadhisthana to sahasrara or from manipura to sahasrara, then you are climbing to the root, which is at the top in sahasrara.

Kundalini and the Brain

The awakening of kundalini and its union with Shiva is immediately and intimately connected with the whole brain. The brain has ten compartments, and of these, nine are dormant and one is active. Whatever you know, whatever you think or do is coming from one-tenth of the brain. The other nine-tenths, which are in the frontal portion of the brain, are known as the inactive or sleeping brain.

Why are these compartments inactive? Because there is no energy. The active portion of the brain functions on the energies of ida and pingala, but the other nine-tenths have only pingala. Pingala is life and ida is consciousness. If a man is living but is unable to think, we say he has prana shakti but not manas shakti. Similarly, the silent parts of the brain have prana, not consciousness.

So a very difficult question arises: how to awaken the sleeping compartments of the brain? We know how to awaken fear, anxiety and passion, but most of us do not know how to awaken these dormant areas of the brain. In order to arouse the silent areas, we must charge the frontal brain with sufficient prana and we must awaken sushumna nadi. For both these purposes we must practise pranayama regularly and consistently over a long period of time.

Lighting up the brain
In kumdalini yoga it was discovered that the different parts of the brain are connected with the chakras. Certain areas are connected with mooladhara chakra, others with swadhisthana, manipura, anahata, vishuddhi and ajna. When you want to turn on an electric lamp, you don’t have to touch the lamp itself, you operate it by means of the switch on the wall. Likewise, when you want to awaken the brain, you can’t deal with it directly, you have to flick the switches which are located in the chakras.
Modern science divides the dormant area of the brain into ten parts, whereas in kundalini yoga we divide it into six. The qualities or manifestations of the brain are also sixfold, e.g. the psychic powers. These manifest in different individuals according to the degree of awakening in the corresponding areas of the brain. Everybody is not clairvoyant or telepathic; some people are talented musicians. Anybody can sing, but there is a center in the brain where transcendental music expresses itself.

Total and partial awakening

A genius is one who has been able to awaken one or more of the dormant areas of the brain. People who have flashes of genius are those who have had a momentary awakening in certain circuits of the brain. it is not total awakening. When the total brain wakes up, you become a junior god, an incarnation or embodiment of divinity. There are various types of geniuses – child prodigies, inspired poets, musicians, inventors, prophets, etc. In these people a partial awakening has occurred.

Sahasrara is the actual seat of kundalini

Although the classical descriptions place heavy emphasis on the awakening of kundalini in mooladhara chakra, there is a widespread misconception that kundalini must be awakened there and made to travel through and awaken all the chakras in turn. In fact, the seat of kundalini is actually sahasrara. Mooladhara is only a manipulating center or switch, like the other chakras, but it happens to be easier for most people to operate this switch.

Each of the chakras is independent; they are not connected with each other. This means, if kundalini shakti awakens in mooladhara, it goes directly to sahasrara, to a particular center in the brain. Similarly, from swadhisthana the shakti passes directly to sahasrara, from manipura it goes straight to sahasrara and so on. Kundalini can be awakened in an individual chakra or it can awaken throughout the whole network of chakras collectively. From each chakra, the awakening shock moves up to the top of sahasrara. However, the awakening is not sustained and those centers in the brain return to dormancy. This is what is meant by the return of kundalini to mooladhara.

If kundalini awakens in an individual chakra, the experiences which are characteristic of that chakra will be brought into consciousness. This may also occur when one does the practices for an individual chakra. For example, swadhisthana practices will raise joy; manipura practices will increase the self-assertion; anahata stimulation will expand the love; vishuddhi practices will awaken discrimination and wisdom, and ajna practices will increase the flow of intuition, knowledge and perhaps extrasensory abilities and so on.

If the nervous system is highly aroused, we may have other faculties opening because of the general arousal of the brain. This probably results from stimulation of an area in the lower end of the brain called the reticular formation. The function of this area is to rouse the whole brain or to relax it, as in sleep.

The reticular formation and related areas have an inherent rhythm which is responsible for our sleeping/waking cycles, but it is also largely activated by sensations from outside – by light, sound, touch, etc., and from inside via the autonomic nervous system. It is the latter which seems to account for the more general arousal caused by the kundalini practices and other powerful yoga practices such as kumbhaka or breath retention. awakening, one thing is apparent. When the cerebrospinal fluid moves through the vertebral column, it alters the phases of consciousness and this is a very important process as far as evolution is concerned.

It is the chitta or consciousness which undergoes evolution in man. Chitta does not have a location point in the body, it is psychological in nature, but it is controlled by the information supplied by the indriyas or senses. While chitta is being constantly supplied with information, its evolution is blocked, but if you prevent the passage of information from the indriyas, chitta will evolve very quickly. That is to say, if you isolate chitta from the information being relayed through the eyes, nose, ears, skin and tongue, chitta is then compelled to experience independence.

When the cerebrospinal fluid is affected during pranayama, the senses become dull and their messages are relayed to chitta very slowly. Sometimes, when the cerebrospinal fluid is highly stimulated, all sensory impulses are suspended and experiences take place within the chitta. Sometimes these experiences are fantastic, you might see light, feel the whole earth trembling or experience your body as if it were as light as a piece of cotton. These and others are the experiences of chitta as a consequence of the cerebrospinal fluid’s reactions.

Unlocking the storehouse of cosmic consciousness

Although there are varying views about kundalini, one thing is certain – kundalini has the ability to activate the human consciousness in such a way that the person can develop his most beneficial qualities, can enter a much more intimate relationship with nature about him, and can become aware of his oneness with the whole cosmos.

All the great miracles of the remote and recent past, and the ones yet to come, have sprung from what is known as the storehouse of cosmic consciousness, the golden egg, the golden womb, the hidden hiranyagarbha within the structure of the human brain. This particular center in us is not sleeping or inactive, but it is unconscious, only because we are not conscious of it. What came as revelation to the The aim of kundalini yoga is not really to awaken the power of man, but rather to bring the power down to earth or to bring the power of the unconscious or higher consciousness, to normal consciousness. We have no need to awaken the consciousness, for it is ever awake. We have only to gain complete control over our higher conscious forces. By means of kundaiini yoga we just try to bring the centers from mooladhara to ajna into operation so that the higher knowledge will be gradually revealed to us.

Today, man has mastered the material dimension, the energy of prakriti and discovered the mysteries of nature. Now, through the process of kundalini, man should become master of the spiritual dimension.

Preparing for the Awakening

Without a guru you can practise any form of yoga, but not kundalini. This is an extremely powerful system. Kundalini yoga does not start suddenly or with fits. You don’t have to make any substantial changes in your way of life, but you must begin to practise. Do not start with advanced practices; for some time you should train and prepare the physical body, then go to the mind and gradually explore the deeper levels. Before commencing the practices which bring about the actual awakening of kundalini, you must prepare yourself step by step on the physical, mental and emotional planes. If you are patient and prepare correctly, awakening of kundalini will definitely take place.

Adequate preparation is necessary to ensure that one has the strength to bear the impact of full awakening of the mighty potential force within. Most of us do not even have control over our physical manifestations and behaviors. Supposing you Therefore, before kundalini awakens, it is important that you are able to manage the mind.

If you can maintain a balanced mind in the face of mental and emotional conflicts and you can endure anger, worry, love and passion, disappointment, jealousy, hatred, memories of the past, sufferings and sorrows, you are ready for the awakening. If you can still feel joy when the scales are heavily loaded against you, you are an aspirant for kundalini yoga. Before you bring into use a generator of five megawatts, you must have a factory ready to utilize the energy. In the same way, before you awaken kundalini shakti, you must be able to merge yourself with the higher spirit and you must know how to utilize the creative energy of kundalini.

The Descent of Kundalini

Everybody talks about the ascent of kundalini, but few ever discuss the descent. When the descent of kundalini occurs, it means the lower mental plane of the human being is no longer influenced by the ordinary mind, the supermind takes over instead. This higher form of consciousness rules the body, mind and senses and directs your life, thoughts and emotions. Kundalini is henceforth the ruler of your life. That is the concept of descent.

When Shiva and Shaktl descend to the gross plane, that Is mooladhara chakra, they separate and live as two entities. There Is duality In mooladhara chakra. There Is duality In the mind and senses and In the world of names and forms, but there Is no duality In samadhi. There Is no seer or experiencer in the state of samadhi. There Is nobody to say what samadhi is like because it is a non-dual experience.
Why Shiva and Shaktl both descend
It Is very difficult to understand why Shiva and Shaktl both descend to the gross plane after having attained the highest union. What Is the use of destroying the world and then creating It again? What is the point of transcending the consciousness If you have to come back to it again? Why bother to awaken kundalini and unite with Shiva In sahasrara if you have to come down to mooladhara again? This Is something very mysterious and we can well ask, Why awaken kundalinl at all?’

Why build a mansion If you know you will have to bum it down when it is completed? We actually create a lot of things that are ultimately going to be destroyed. So why do It at all? It seems so crazy! We do so much sadhana to transcend the chakras and ascend from earth to heaven. Then, when we reach paradise and become one with that great reality, we suddenly decide to come back down. And not all alone, we bring the great one with us. It would be easier to understand If Shaktl came back alone and Shiva remained In heaven. Maybe when Shakti Is about to leave, Shiva says, ‘Wait, I’m coming with you.’

A new existence on the gross plane

When kundallnl descends, you come down to the gross plane with a totally transformed consciousness. You live a normal life, associating with everybody and discharging your worldly obligations like other people do. Maybe you even play the game of desires, passions, cravings and such things. Maybe you play the game of victory and defeat, attachments and infatuations, but you just play a game. You know it; you do everything as an actor. You are not involved In It life and soul.

It is at this time the genius or the transformed consciousness manifests through you. You don’t have to think or plan how to perform miracles. You have to remember that you have come down as a transformed quality of consciousness. You must remember that you are now connected with those areas of the brain which were previously silent. And you must also remember that you are linked with those reservoirs of knowledge, power and wisdom which belong to the realm of the higher COSMOS.

Until the descent Is complete, such a man lives a very simple life, unnoticed and unattended. Once the descent is complete he begins to play the game and people recognize him as a divine Incarnation. They see he is something special compared to everybody else and they call him a guru. Such a person Is actually a junior god.

When Shiva and Shakti descend to the gross level of awareness there is again duality. That is why the self-realized man is able to understand pain and all the mundane affairs of life. He understands the whole drama of duality, multiplicity and diversity. Sometimes we ordinary mortals are at a fix to understand how this man

Featured

The Higher Power Within Us. By tuning into the intuition and allowing it to become the guiding force in our lives, we allow our inner “conductor” to take its rightful place as the leader of the orchestra. Rather than losing our individual freedom, we receive the support we need to effectively express our individuality. Moreover, we will enjoy the experience of being part of a larger creative process. Tavistock Institute. Part 124

The Higher Power Within Us. By tuning into the intuition and allowing it to become the guiding force in our lives, we allow our inner “conductor” to take its rightful place as the leader of the orchestra. Rather than losing our individual freedom, we receive the support we need to effectively express our individuality. Moreover, we will enjoy the experience of being part of a larger creative process. Tavistock Institute. Part 124

We are living in a very exciting and powerful time. On the deepest level of consciousness. a radical transformation is taking place.

As the evolution of human consciousness gains greater and greater momentum, we are being challenged. on a planetary level. to let go of our present way of life and create a new one. In a sense. our “old world” is dying. and a new world is coming into being. For many of us. the old world was based on an external focus — having lost our fundamental spiritual connection, we have believed that the material world is the only reality.

Thus. feeling essentially lost, empty. and alone. we have continually attempted to find happiness and fulfillment through external “things- —money. material possessions. relationships. work, fame. food. drugs. and so on.

The new world is being built as we open to the higher power of the universe within us and consciously allow that creative energy to move through us. As each of us connects with our inner spir-itual awareness, we learn that the creative power of the universe is inside of us. We also learn that we can create our own experience of reality and take responsibility for doing so.

The change begins within each individual. but as more and more individuals are trans-formed, the mass consciousness is increasingly affected. My observation that a profound transformation of conscious-ness is taking place in our world at this time is based on the changes

Paradoxical as it may seem, these changes are the greatest blessing that any of us could possibly imagine. The truth is that the way of life that we have been following for centuries no longer works. While appropriate for its time, it cannot take us where we need and desire to go. The focus on materialism and the external world was necessary in a time when our primary challenge was physical survival. Our patriarchal values and the traditional roles of men and women may have been necessary in order to ensure the protection of our families for a certain period of time in our evolutionary process.

At this time, many human beings (and other species as well) on the earth are still struggling for physical survival. Yet there are an increasing number of us who no longer have to be preoccupied primarily with sheer survival. We have the opportunity, and thus the responsibility, to begin looking for deeper fulfillment on spiritual, mental, and emotional levels. We are searching for greater meaning and purpose in our lives, and for ways to live more responsibly and harmoniously on our planet.

Thus, our first task in building the new world is to admit that our “life education” has not necessarily taught us a satisfying way to live. We must learn a way of life that is very different from the way we approached things before. This may not be easy for us, and it will take time, commitment, and courage.

The Higher Power Within Us

The foundation for life in the new world is built on the understanding that there is a higher intelligence, a fundamental creative power or energy in the universe that is the source and substance of all existence. The words and concepts that have been used to describe this power are innumerable.

Once we acknowledge the higher power of the universe, the obvious question arises: “How can we contact this power and gain access to it?” After all, if there is within us a superior wisdom or a deeper knowledge than we normally experience, by tapping into it, we should be able to receive valuable guidance in how to live well in this confusing world.

This is where we find ourselves in opposition to life as most of us have been taught to live it in the old world. In modern western civilization, we have learned to respect and even worship the rational, logical aspect of our being, and to dismiss, depreciate, or deny our intuition. We do acknowledge the ability of animals to seemingly understand things that are way beyond their rational capacity; we call this instinct. But it’s a mystery that defies logical explanation, so we shrug our shoulders and dismiss it as something vastly inferior to the magnificent human ability to reason.

Our culture’s entire value system is firmly based on the belief that the rational principle is superior and, in fact, constitutes the highest truth. The western scientific tradition has become our religion. We are taught from a young age to try to be reasonable, logical, and consistent, to avoid emotional, irrational behavior, and to suppress our feelings. At best, feelings and emotions are considered foolish, weak, and bothersome. At worst, we fear they may threaten the very fabric of civilized society.

Our established religious institutions often support this fear of the intuitive, nonrational self. Once based on a deep awareness of the universal spiritual principle in every being, many religions only pay lip service to that idea now. Instead, they seek to control the behavior of their devotees, using elaborate rule structures purported to save people from their deep, irrational, and basically “sinful” natures. And according to many psychological disciplines, the dark and dangerous instinctual nature of man must be controlled. From this perspective, it is only the rational part of us that is capable of harnessing this mysterious force and channeling it into healthy, constructive modes.

The truth is that all aspects of our being are integral, important, and valuable parts of us. The more we distrust and suppress these energies, the more likely they are to eventually burst out in distorted ways. In other words, our problems are not necessarily caused by our emotional, nonrational nature running wild and uncontrolled; instead, both personal and social problems are more likely to be the result of fear and the suppression of our emotions, instinctual nature, and intuition. In this book, we are focusing on how we can reclaim the power of our intuitive sense.

Once we accept the reality of a higher power that is channeled to us through our intuition, it becomes clear that many of our personal problems and the ills of the world are actually caused by not following our intuition.

Our rational mind is like a computer — it processes the input it receives and calculates logical conclusions based on this information. The rational mind is finite; it can only compute the input it has received directly. In other words, our rational minds can only operate on the basis of the direct experience each of us has had in this lifetime.

The intuitive mind, on the other hand, seems to have access to an infinite supply of information. It appears to be able to tap into a deep storehouse of knowledge and wisdom — the universal mind. It is also able to sort out this information and supply us with exactly what we need, when we need it. Though the message may come through a bit at a time, if we learn to follow this supply of information piece by piece, the necessary course of action will be revealed. As we learn to rely on this guidance, life takes on a flowing, effortless quality. Our life, feelings, and actions interweave harmoniously with those of others around us.

It is as if each of us played a unique instrument in a huge sym- phony orchestra, conducted by a universal intelligence. If we play our part without regard for the conductor’s direction or the rest of the orchestra, we will have total chaos. If we try to take our cues from those around us, rather than the conductor, it will be impossible to achieve harmony — there are too many people, all playing different things. Our intellect is not able to process so much input and decide on the best note to play at each moment. However, if we watch the conductor and follow his direction we can experience the joy of playing our unique part, which can be heard and appreciated by everyone, and at the same time experience ourselves as part of a greater harmonious whole.

By tuning into the intuition and allowing it to become the guiding force in our lives, we allow our inner “conductor” to take its rightful place as the leader of the orchestra. Rather than losing our individual freedom, we receive the support we need to effectively express our individuality. Moreover, we will enjoy the experience of being part of a larger creative process.

To whatever degree you listen to and follow your intuition, you become a “creative channel” for the higher power of the universe. When you willingly follow where your creative energy leads, the higher power can come through you to manifest its creative work. When this happens, you will find yourself flowing with the energy, doing what you really want to do, and feeling the power of the universe moving through you to create or transform everything around you.

We are all born with an infinite number of different qualities or energies within us. One of our most important tasks in life is to discover and develop as many of these energies as possible, so that we can be well-rounded, and experience the full range of our potential.

We can think of these energies as different archetypes, subpersonalities, or selves within us. In a way, it’s as if there are many different characters living inside of us, each with its own task and purpose.

Since the physical world is a plane of duality, for each of these energies within us, there is an opposite energy. In order to experience wholeness and balance, we need to develop and integrate both sides of every polarity.

Featured

Nothing Is Everything. What Is Meditation? We need to awaken to the functioning presence of spiritual realities in our lives. Tavistock Institute. Part 123

Nothing Is Everything. What Is Meditation? We need to awaken to the functioning presence of spiritual realities in our lives. Tavistock Institute. Part 123

The words of a realized man cannot go to waste, they are like seeds, they will wait to the proper time to sprout, but once implanted they will bear their fruit.

“My words if implanted in you will destroy all other words and concepts.” Nisargadatta Maharaj

INTEGRATING INTO EMPTINESSThis process was channeled to invite greater inner spaciousness to help integratethe healings, clearings, and activations that are received. The word emptinesswas channeled to amplify the formless qualities of the soul to help furtherunravel the ego and embody the light of heart-centered consciousness.To integrate into emptiness, please read the followingstatements, either silently or aloud:

All is emptiness; emptiness is all.
One is emptiness; emptiness is one.

None is emptiness; emptiness is none.
Space is emptiness; emptiness is space.
Sound is emptiness; emptiness is sound.
Name is emptiness; emptiness is name.
Form is emptiness; emptiness is form.
Time is emptiness; emptiness is time.
Nothing is emptiness; emptiness is nothing.
Everything is emptiness; emptiness is everything.
Thinking is emptiness; emptiness
is thinking.Feeling is emptiness; emptiness is feeling.
Moving is emptiness; emptiness is moving.
Still is emptiness; emptiness is still.
Perceiving is emptiness; emptiness is perceiving.
Noticing is emptiness; emptiness is noticing.
Aware is emptiness; emptiness is aware.
Breathing is emptiness; emptiness is breathing.
Living is emptiness; emptiness is living.
Learning is emptiness; emptiness is learning.
Discerning is emptiness; emptiness is discerning.
Growing is emptiness; emptiness is growing.
Opening is emptiness; emptiness is opening.
Awakening is emptiness; emptiness is awakening.
Realizing is emptiness; emptiness is realizing.
Liberating is emptiness; emptiness is liberating.
Being is emptiness; emptiness is being.
Knowing is emptiness; emptiness is knowing.
Everything is emptiness; emptiness is everything.
Nothing is emptiness; emptiness is nothing.
Time is emptiness; emptiness is time.
Form is emptiness; emptiness is form.
Name is emptiness; emptiness is name.
Sound is emptiness; emptiness is sound.
Space is emptiness; emptiness is space.
None is emptiness; emptiness is none.
One is emptiness; emptiness is one.
All is emptiness; emptiness is all.

“Stay in the consciousness as a portal to the Absolute”.

Maybe the best way to conclude is to recall a time when
He began pacing and shouting at me:
“There is no birth
There is no death
There is no person
It’s all a concept
It’s all an illusion!!!!!
As He directed this powerful energetic focus at me, “light”
passed from His hand and through “me”.

Somehow the word ‘Nothing’ doesn’t interest the seeker
whereas the word ‘Everything’ overwhelms him/her. Why
is it so? Why is there so much fear for this ‘Nothing’? The
thought of one’s absence, even though momentary, seems
to create fear of non-existence although each and everyone
enjoys this absence of ‘separate self’ every night during deep
sleep. The fear of Nothing is fear of death which is in turn the
fear of Unknown. The inability to recognize the hidden secret
beneath this Nothing, somehow forces the seeker to shut the
doors of Ultimate Understanding sans seeker. In short the word
Nothing repels and the word Everything attracts him/her, as
these apparent contradictions are perceived at their face value.
These contradictions do not exist outwardly but rather exist as
the inner division in seeker’s mind.

Seeking or Understanding?

Seeking is based on some reason, Understanding is without any!

Seeking is with an effort and purpose,
Understanding is spontaneous and effortless!
Understanding is absent in Seeking,
While the ‘seeker’ is absent in the Understanding!
Seeking consists of seeker, seeking and the sought,
While this trinity is utterly absent in the Understanding!
Search consists of search, searcher and the searched,
Understanding denies the very ‘searcher’!
Seeking consists of stages, intervals and may be some practices,
While the Understanding is eternal and despite of them!
Seeking has an aim,
While nature of Understanding is itself aim-less!
Seeking is supported by listening, reading or pondering,
While Understanding is Self-sustaining (Independent)!
Fear of forgetting gathered knowledge prevails in Seeking,
While even the thought of having understood is
absent in Understanding!
Background of Seeking is duality,
While Understanding is groundless Non-Duality!
Seeking is an ever changing state,
Whereas Understanding, a ‘stateless’ state!
In Seeking, lock exists and search for the key happens,
While in Understanding, clear conviction prevails that
lock and key were never separate!

What Is Meditation?

Maharaj: Our sense of being is without a body. It is called
Brahman. Without your knowledge, the chant of “I am
Brahman” goes on within you.
One who realizes one’s true identity as Brahman, is worshipped
by spiritual aspirants.
That Brahman or God is your true form. This identity has
no death. You have fear of death because of your body identity.
If you develop your faith as you are told now, you will never
experience death. Then you will find no need to ask anybody
regarding spiritual matters. Instead, people will visit you in
quest of Truth.
Visitor: What is meditation?
M: Not to lose sight of your true identity is meditation. Your
body identity should find no room in your faith. When you
realize your consciousness as God of all Gods, you will find
yourself as infinite and boundless.
V: Is not God greater than me?
M: Your consciousness is the proof that the God is. Without
you, who is there to recognise His greatness? Do not forget
this fact.

You suffer because your existence is restricted to a body.

What is the difference between the mumukshu, one who
desires to be liberated and a Sadhaka, a spiritual seeker?

kNothing Is Everything k
M: A mumukshu has a body; but the seeker is bodiless. Because
of your body identity, death and rebirth apply to you.
V: What is the difference between a Seeker and a Sage or
Siddha?
M: A Siddha has achieved the ultimate. There is not the slightest
of doubt that he is not the body with name and form. He is no
more an individual; neither a man nor a woman.
V: One who has spiritual powers, is he a Siddha?
M: No. One who is established in the Self, is a Siddha.
V: Does a Sage remember his ignorance prior to His becoming
a Sage.
M: Just as the Sun does not know darkness, a Sage does not
know ignorance.

THE ‘ME’ AND THE ‘MINE’

We must understand the creator of time—the past, present, and future—for time is birth anddeath. The consciousness of time creates continuity, everlastingness, but it is not the eternal, it isnot timelessness.The creator of time is the self, the consciousness of the ‘me’ and the ‘mine’: my property, myson, my power, my success, my experience, my immortality.

The concern of the self over its ownstate creates time. The self is the cause of ignorance and sorrow, and its cause and effect is desire,the craving for power, wealth, fame. This self is unified by the will of desire, with its pastmemories, present resolutions, and future determinations.

The future then becomes a form of lust,the present a passage to the future, and the past the driving motive. The self is a wheel within awheel of pleasure and pain, enjoyment and grief, love and hate, ruthlessness and gentleness.

These opposites are created for its own advantage, for its own gain, out of its own uncertainty. Itis the cause of my birth, my death. Thought is held by the will of desire, by the will of self, butsorrow and pain begin their work of awakening thought; and if this awakening is not maintained,thought slips into comforting beliefs, into personal fantasies and hopes.

But if the slowly awakening thought begins to gently and patiently study the cause of sorrowand so begins to comprehend it, it will find that there is another will: the will of understanding.This will of understanding is not personal; it is of no country, of no people, of no religion. It is thiswill that opens the door to the eternal, to the timeless.

The study of the self is the beginning of right thinking—the self that is held in the will of desire.This self creates continuity by craving for immortality, but with it comes the everlastingness ofsorrow, pain, and the conflict of the ‘me’ and the ‘mine’.

There is no end to this save in the will ofunderstanding, which alone dissolves the cause of sorrow.Become aware of the course of desire; out of that awareness, there is born right thinking. Virtueis freeing thought from the ‘me’ and the ‘mine’ for compassion for the uncertainty that self-desirecreates.

BELIEF IN THE MASTERS

The gurus who exist beyond our immediate,physical perception. They were our elder brothers, more evolved than us and so worthy of beingfollowed. They had a plan for humanity and showed us the means, the technique for its fulfilment.

To deal with ignorance is most difficult, for it is often clothed with goodwill. One must acceptthe goodwill with eagerness, but ignorance eventually destroys goodwill. To dispel delusion is farmore important than any belief, than to accept any plan, any technique. It is insidious andextremely subtle, and without first understanding its causes and ways, all thought-feelingbecomes a plaything of illusion. How can you discern what is true if there is ignorance? How canyou discern the truth of a falsehood, or the falsehood in a truth, when the mind is distorted byillusion?

To see the truth as truth, and the falsehood as false, demands freedom from ignorance, from stupidity. It is the greatest gift. Prejudice, credulity, relying on mere opinion, ill will, fear, greed, sensate values, and cravingbreed ignorance and illusion. And thought must be concerned with transcending the causes ofignorance.

This being of primary importance, we can give only secondary consideration to thequestion of Masters.How extremely difficult it is to find a teacher, a guru, in this physical world! Have you soughtone? If you have sought one, wide-eyed, intelligently, then you will know what an arduous task itis. Your choice depends on your conditioning and its reactions, on your moods, hopes, andopinions, and a choice based on prejudice can lead only to confusion. Knowing how difficult it isto find a teacher, who is merely a signpost to the real, can you trust and accept a teacher whomyou do not see with your physical eyes, whom you recognize on the hearsay of another?

When you have the greatest difficulty in finding a teacher here on this plane, how can you be so sure ofone who has been created or discovered by another? Is this not superstition? Is not the acceptanceof authority, of the one or of the many with their opinions, the beginning of ignorance, stupidity?

To follow another, in ignorance, does not lead to the comprehension of the real, and ignorance is not to be broken down in the acceptance of another, however great. Ignorance is self-caused,and only you yourself can destroy it.

This hope that another can lead you to reality, to happiness,is the result of thoughtlessness. You do not become thoughtful through the acceptance ofauthority of another. Another may point out the way, but you yourself have to discern, youyourself must walk.

There is none to save you but yourself.What does he mean when he asserts that they are more evolved? Is the realization of truth amatter of time and growth, or is it to be experienced when thought-feeling is freed from time andgrowth? Does this freedom lie along the path of time? Is it not another form of ignorance to thinkthat time will give understanding?

Strenuous application brings understanding, and it is a form ofslothfulness to think in terms of time and growth. Besides, what is it that evolves? (Greed,however much it may evolve, will remain, perhaps more refined, more subtle, under a differentname.) Is there not a continual change, a constant becoming and dying, and an identification thatgives a continuity to the ‘I am’? The ‘I am’ is different from yesterday, and thought clings to the ‘Iam’ in fear of the unknown, of being insecure.

Does not the highest thought spring frominsecurity, from non-identification? Is there a permanent entity that continues? Or is there onlythat which is real, immortal, which is to be realized only when all grasping has ceased?

This craving to be breeds ignorance and sorrow, and time will not free thought from sorrow. Sorrow isto be transcended by understanding its cause in the present, and a postponement, under adignified name, will not bring happiness. Lust, worldliness, and clinging to personal continuitybring pain, and these must be transcended through awareness and right thinking.Do you think a plan, a glorified blueprint, can liberate man from his bondages, making him happy?

Must he not exert himself to extricate himself from his own self-enclosing limitations andhindrances? He has created his own sorrow, and he alone can transcend his own creation.

The means, the technique, to realize the eternal is to comprehend and master himself. Self-knowledge cultivates right thinking, and this knowledge is not to be bought through the worship of another,or through the authority of another, or through any ritual or prayer; nor does it lie in any book orin any church.

It is to be discovered and nurtured through self-awareness of your thoughts-feelings. It is a strenuous ‘path’ to walk, and though there be many signposts, yet each one must discern, with heightened intelligence and watchfulness.

It is the particular fancy of each group to consider itself the most favoured, and by this method it gathers to itself those who are seeking favours and so flatter themselves. It is a trick of the propagandist and unworthy of those seeking truth.

For, truth does not belong to any group, toany organization, to any individual; the bigger and more powerful the organization, religious orotherwise, the further is it from reality, and so is it with the group and with the individual.Humility, which comes with candour, with that freedom from pretentiousness, is essential to discover that which is the ultimate solution of all our problems.

Do you not think that to lose oneself in wayside shrines, to decorate and collect aroundsignposts is a waste of time and unworthy of him who seeks truth? Professional mediators,beautifying externalities, and repetition of rituals are vain to him who is seeking the eternal.Earnestness, which is so rare, is dissipated in the things of ignorance, and the mind-heart is madedull.

Sensitivity and pliability of mind-heart are lost if there is no understanding of the ways of illusion. Stupidity breaks down the exquisite elasticity of the mind-heart, and it becomes a prey to delusion. Gather that earnestness to dispel ignorance and to understand and transcend ill will and sensory values. You seem earnest, and let us employ it for right means, which will uncover theright end.

We need to awaken to the functioning presence of spiritual realities in our lives.

Featured

The Nature of the Archons – You may think this sounds confused; not at all. It is our habit to project onto another all our fears and unconscious limited understandings so we can see more clearly our own maladies. We create outside ourselves what lives within, and we do it quite well. We are master creators regardless of our awareness. In fact, until we look inside ourselves and identify this madness that separates us from each other, we are doomed to continue this same stale existence. Unfortunately, there is no limit to the number of times we can blow each other up. We are living in fear, interfacing with our world not from our core essence, our divinity; but instead, we live out of a collective wounding. Tavistock Institute. Part 122

The Nature of the Archons – You may think this sounds confused; not at all. It is our habit to project onto another all our fears and unconscious limited understandings so we can see more clearly our own maladies. We create outside ourselves what lives within, and we do it quite well. We are master creators regardless of our awareness. In fact, until we look inside ourselves and identify this madness that separates us from each other, we are doomed to continue this same stale existence. Unfortunately, there is no limit to the number of times we can blow each other up. We are living in fear, interfacing with our world not from our core essence, our divinity; but instead, we live out of a collective wounding. Tavistock Institute. Part 122

The archons controls the three physical chakras

The Archonic energies are able to work through our lower chakras

To overcome the Archons, one need to overcome the three lower chakras

Earth is the last planet to be freed from the Dark Forces, there can be no new Archon invasion. Although the Light’s victory over the dark is guaranteed, and all negative timelines are now gone, we still need to be careful. Archons on the astral plane will continue to exert pressure on the psychological weak spots of the awake beings of the Light in order to cause divisions among the Light Workers. It serves them well if they can create minor conflicts between tie Light Workers which will take our minds off of bringing down the Dark Agendas of Control and Mind Control on planet Earth.

Spiritual evolution is the progressive advance of mankind toward a state of things in which the light of ethical perfection shall be reflected from the face of human society; that is, in which all men shall live and move and have their being in mu-tually promoting the highest life of each and all. It means that the object of social reformation shall not be a mere change in the conditions under which men live, but a change in human nature itself. It means that we shall look forward consciously to the breaking forth of new powers in ourselves, to the release, through our own efforts, of capacities dimly latent in us.

There are other absurdities too in holding the illusion as a duality of the real and unreal. Then , the cognition. This is silver ‘ can never be an illusion, as it affirms the real. To contend still it is an illusion because the dual is mistaken as real.

When we are living consciously and in light of our deepest essence, there is no need to look outside ourselves for supportive understanding or in fear of judgment. We have only to rest in knowing wisdom is transcendent, found in the core of our soul. Instead we look to religion, philosophy, infinite fact-finding, and no doubt, some fiction to find our way.

We had only to click our heels together to find our grounding and center in the Divine. Duality has served its purpose during our evolution. It has kept us, in the best of cases, living in peace and harmony with each other and, in the worst of cases, at war with others and ourselves. It commands boundaries, along with rules and regulations that are meant to keep us safe and guide us mindlessly through the cookbook of living.

The message has been “follow the recipe of duality for a good and happy life now and in the hereafter, amen.” The problem with recipe living is, we are robbed of our soul’s expression. Creativity is lost, and we look more now like clones, losing the piece that is uniquely ours to bring into the world.

The symphony waiting to be heard by our planet, created by the singular notes of our diversity, has sadly never been written. The melody of our past, in some respects, is a strangely flat work devoid of dimension. We are here to create, not conform. Conformity is safe, and creativity is delightfully messy in its process.

Sadly, many of us have forgotten why we signed up to come to the planet in the first place. Fortunately, this is changing, and we are on the cusp of all consciousness shifting an octave higher, maybe more. The energy on our planet is speeding up, sometimes uncomfortably so. It’s a “shake, rattle, and roll” kind of transition, which can be disconcerting.

Through the looking glass, past the illusion created by our ego, there is a profound wisdom waiting to be born. Our vision, altered by the ego’s creation, will soon be shattered by our soul’s evolution. The earth is awakening. There was a brief quickening, a felt presence of new life; then we were thrown into the sudden and powerful phase of transition leaving no mystery. New birth is certain.

We are still looking through the filter of our own ego. One does not have to fight a war to experience the wounding of a warrior.

Once we step through the looking glass, we become aware of the other, apart from ourselves. We are now asked to perform according to the rules of the day, the group-established norms. No matter where our tribe or continent, we all participate in this contest while being judged. Like the three stooges, we are poked, slapped, and undermined by those in power—or at least those in perceived power.

You may think this sounds confused; not at all. It is our habit to project onto another all our fears and unconscious limited understandings so we can see more clearly our own maladies. We create outside ourselves what lives within, and we do it quite well. We are master creators regardless of our awareness.

In fact, until we look inside ourselves and identify this madness that separates us from each other, we are doomed to continue this same stale existence. Unfortunately, there is no limit to the number of times we can blow each other up. We are living in fear, interfacing with our world not from our core essence, our divinity; but instead, we live out of a collective wounding.

Until we can enter within and hold gently and without judgment that part of ourselves that we fear most, exposing the darkness, we will continue to point to others out there and create tighter, more protective boundaries. The witch trials of Salem have never stopped. We did not learn from this time, and even now, we are “burning at the stake” those who embody understandings that challenge our left-brained expression of life.

We live from a tribal perspective, molded from a very young age. This happens in part from observations, but maybe more importantly, from the permeating group mind that is in constant interplay with the unconscious. This influence spreads like a virus from person to person, generating old fears in new ways.

We are preoccupied and pre-progammed, keeping rhythm with a beat not our own, and in so doing, we forget our own song.

When we learn to overcome evil with good , then only have we risen above the duality of existence: pleasure and pain.

Because of CONTROL human race has therefore become the instrument of the illusion of dualism.

The Nature of the Archons

Accordning the Scriptures, the spiritual struggle of the Christians is against superhuman forces. According to Eph. 6: 11, these are the forces of the devil. The gnostics personified and identified these superhuman forces as the archons. The gnostic contends against the archons in his fight for salvation, and because he has to fight against them, it is important that he knows their nature. Knowledge of the true nature of the archons is the gnostic’s weapon against them, and will lead to his salvation from them. The quotation from Paul gives weight to the topic and places it in a soteriological context. The gnostics’ meditation upon the nature of the archons is part of the salvatory process.

The Second Introduction (86: 26 87: 11) This part of the treatise contains a topic also found in the apocalyptic part of the treatise, where it appears in a more relevant context (see above pp. 6 —8). Differences in the two passages show that they do not stem from the same source. The passage 86: 26 —87: 11 introduces the archons represented by their source, the great archon. This is a classical myth in gnostic literature. The chief archon falsely believes himself to be the only God and cries: “It is I who am God; there is none [apart from trier (86: 34-31). This mistake demonstrates his blindness, and is immediately corrected by the voice from Imperishability: “You are mistaken, Samael (which is, `god of the blind’)” (87: 3 —4). The aim of the passage is to furnish a second introduction into the main theme : the reader is told of the basic characteristics of the archons, the chief of which is blindness. This is a blindness towards the World Above.

The archons are weak and without knowledge concerning God and the pneumatic world. The archons are not aware of the difference between these two worlds, and the Father uses this lack of knowledge in his plan for salvation.

The creation of the intelligible world “Within limitless realms dwells Imperishability. Sophia who is called Pistis, wanted to create something, alone without her consort; and her product was a celestial thing. A veil exists between the World Above and the realms that are below.

Sophia’s creation is projected through the veil between the World Above and the realms below (94: 8_1 0)60 61. In the next stage of the cosmogony, a shadow (haibes) comes into being beneath the veil and becomes matter (94: 10 —13). A comparison between the anthropogony and the cosmogony shows a similarity in the process of creation : Adam was created as a modelled form of an image reflected in the waters, an image of a pneumatic entity. In this case, the image is in the stage between the pneumatic female and the human body formed into matter.

The World Above is, in keeping with prevalent gnostic thought, eternal and not created.

Thus, weakness, ignorance and blindness are expressions of the archons’ lack of understanding and of their place in the lowest ontological level. Even more negative characteristics are added to these: because of their weakness, the archons want to demonstrate power; hence their ignorance and blindness lead to arrogance and envy. Power, arrogance and envy are the archons’ agressive characteristics which drive them to expand their area of domination and to fight for its maintainance. Arrogance (authadis, mntjasihit) is another consequence of their blindness. This characteristic is also connected with the initial boasting of the demiurge, both in the introduction and in the cosmogony (86: 29; 94: 17, 21). The archon, in his blindness, not only cannot see, but also does not want to see.

The archons are blind; but Adam and Eve, when they have eaten from the tree of knowledge, experience the fulfillment of the serpent’s promise “rather your eyes shall open” (90: 8 —9): they recognize the difference between good and evil (90: 9 —10). Therefore the archons become envious of man just as the serpent forsaw (90: 7 —8). This is a new feature of the archons’ nature, revealed by the paradise account: The archons are envious (phtkonos)83. They are envious of Adam and Eve, who are now capable of discerning between pneumatic reality and its imitation, because the archons themselves are not capable of this knowledge. Envy as a fundamental characteristic in the archontic nature is also evident in Ialdabaoth’s envy of the glory and exaltation of Sabaoth (kik erof, 96: 3-5). From this time, Envy (kik) exists in the world and engenders Death (96: 6 —9). The same type of envy as was presented in the paradise account is demonstrated here by Ialdabaoth: The envy those lacking knowledge have of those possessing knowledge.

Like the body, the soul too is a creation of the Archons, who endowed it with their own evil natures. Only the pneuma , the divine spark consisting of Lightsubstance, is pure. In the vast upheaval which preceded the creation of the world , particles of this Light – substance became entrapped in the material universe . The human body was formed specifically to hold these particles and prevent their escape. Salvation thus consists of liberating the pneuma from its bodily prison so that it may ascend to God .

In our deepest core, we are sparks of divine light trapped in material bodies. we have forgotten who we are because we have become drunk (ignorance).

The anguish of our world is traceable back to a great battle that took place before the creation of the present material universe. Long ago, long before our present world, light and darkness, good and evil, were once originally separate realms. How then did this terrible mixed-up world of ours come into being? According to Mani, border forces within the Kingdom of Darkness, instinctively drawn to the beauty of light across the frontier, plotted and succeeded in invading a segment of the Kingdom of Light. In response, God (or “the Father of Great-ness”) evoked emanations of his own light-substance and sent one of them, Primal Man, to turn back this invasion from the Kingdom of Darkness. In the great battle that followed, the forces of darkness succeeded in capturing and imprisoning this Primal Man.

Every person carries this cosmic battle of the Kingdom of Light and the Kingdom of Darkness within himself or herself. He claimed that we do not really know ourselves; we do not realize that, in our deepest core, we are sparks of divine light trapped in material bodies. We have forgotten who we are because we have become drunk from long years trapped in the dark delusions of the material world. Gnostic teaching opens us to the truth of ourselves.

Gnostic saw the task of redemption as a slow, painstaking recovery of the tiny tidbits of divine light trapped in matter. They viewed the visible universe as a vast light-processing plant, a place where the dross of dark matter can gradually and painstakingly be distilled away and shirked off and where tiny fragments of divine light can be recovered like precious diamonds from a subterranean mine. In the Manichean scheme of things, the sun and moon are two celestial refineries in this cosmic purification process: The sun and moon were established; they were placed on high [to] purify [the] soul. Daily they take up the purified part to the height; this sediment, however, they scrape [off and cast it below; and the] mixed [portion] they rotate, now above and now below.

The eternal One, seeking mani-festation, flows into nature and satisfies its hunger, so that the fire of nature bursts into light and divinely illumined consciousness.

Thus faith is not an historical science, that a man should make articles [of belief] for himself, and hang upon those alone, and force his mind into the workings of his reason: but it is one spirit with God, for the Holy Spirit works in the spirit of faith. True faith is a power of God, one spirit with God. It works in God and with God, and is free and bound to no articles [of belief], but only to true love, from which it fetches the strength and power of its life; it does not lie in human fancies.

Featured

The ego fears its discontinuity, its non-existence. The ego cannot fully accept the idea of immortality for it really does not exist outside of this illusionary reality. All the fears created by the ego are illusionary. We have released everything that the ego was clinging to and overcame the ego in meditation. Tavistock Institute. Part 121

The ego fears its discontinuity, its non-existence. The ego cannot fully accept the idea of immortality for it really does not exist outside of this illusionary reality. All the fears created by the ego are illusionary. We have released everything that the ego was clinging to and overcame the ego in meditation. Tavistock Institute. Part 121

The Archons control the Matrix, and the Archons using all forms of emotion-thought based fear concepts to keep mankind enslaved and imprisoned within the Matrix, and fear of death is the strongest of them.

The Bible, God’s instruction book for humanity, tells us that all `through fear of death have been living all their lives as slaves to constant dread’ [Hebrews 2:15;]. It says every human being is a slave to the fear of death. We live in a constant dread of it.

Fear of Death and Immortality

“The Fulcrum of human fear psychology—the epicenter—is the fear of death. You have fear of death because it is an unknown process. The ego fears its discontinuity, its non-existence. The ego cannot fully accept the idea of immortality for it really does not exist outside of this illusionary reality.

The ego knows it for sure and fears death, the death of this human body, yet this fear acts as the food for its own survival till death. Eradicating the fear of death involves mastery over ‘death in every moment: A thought arises and dies out.

The ego learns to capture your attention by jumping from thought to thought, in a sea of emotions and by jumping between past and future times. Death is like a game where every thought becomes a winning point. One more thought survived.

The ego pulls out more and more of them from the subconscious, reacts to each stimulus from the external environment, pushes you to ‘work’ hard for the survival of this mind-body system and everything that is impermanent. All the fears created by the ego are illusionary. Actually it only fears the Witness, the present moment, Enlightenment and the concept of immortality!

Once you become aligned WITH any of these ideas, slowly the ego los-es its battle. The ego is deprived of its usual weapons of time, illusions, fears and death. In the death of the ego or rather the transformation of this illusionary ‘monkey ego’ to the permanent Divine Self, you over-come the basis of all fears—the fear of death, the fear of the unknown, the fear of God, the fear of Truth and the fear of fear itself!

We don’t need any symbols along our path, even if we may have used many up until now. This is because if we use symbols, we are handing over our own power to them. Often, our world is full of symbols that we consciously or unconsciously “worship.” At first we may have “worshipped” material things in the external world. We made cars, houses, people, or money our symbols and false gods.

Then we turned away from the material path and started to look inside ourselves for answers. In doing so we often exchanged material goods for intangible ones. Perhaps we worshiped sacred symbols in this way. But even such symbols are nothing more than effigies to which we hand over our power. Our ego-based mind will tell us that by ourselves, we cannot make it hack to our Buddha-nature, that we are weak and need help. But after we have made a certain amount of progress in our practice. we need neither Buddha statues, nor saints, nor alters, nor incense, nor teachers or masters. nor other effigies or symbols for our path. Even if we believe that we arc not using any symbols, our ego-based mind is still trying to cling to such old ideas.

In this way it will even cling to the concepts of emptiness and no-mind. It is only we who project traits onto symbols. Let us therefore take back our own power, let us be strong without symbols. they only needlessly prolong the path. In truth, we have all the power in us which we need for the path. We need only ourselves, our connection with the emptiness. and our own willingness to work on ourselves and deal with our deep-rooted old ideas.

Life and death We will come quite close to our Buddha-nature, but will not be able to move forward if we have not dealt profoundly, at least once, with the subject of death and dying. This concept is the very foundation on which the ego-based mind rests. If we can get to the heart of it, we will no longer fear death. I low can we overcome our fear of death?

Actually. the question is: why do we still cling to the illusion that we must die? In Zen, it is said that one must surrender oneself in order to be able to experience liberation. Erroneously. this state in Zen is traditionally called The Great Death-. The ego-based mind naturally grasps at this illusion.

Life and death are real for us so long as we cling to our ego.

Who taught us the concept of life and death?

It’s been explained to us that the price of life is death. But that’s not true. Neither life nor death exists. Let us remember what we have experienced during zazen. Have we not transcended our thoughts, feelings and bodies?

We have released everything that the ego was clinging to and overcame the ego in meditation. It has thus already died once. And nonetheless we returned from the state of no-mind back into our bodies. What have we felt outside our body and apart from our thoughts and feelings? We were already there beyond life and death, even though we were perhaps unaware of this. Neither life nor death exists, just being. In meditation, we ultimately simply were. We have felt the infinity and immortality of the emptiness.

How can we persist in clinging to the concept of We and death? There is only being, nothing else. When our learning in this world is finished, we will lay down our bodies and continue to exist We are not our bodies, nor our emotions, thoughts, or ego. We are spiritual beings who arc immortal. The concept of life and death can therefore exist only if we are under the delusion that we are our bodies.

“The concept of life and death can therefore exist only if we are under the delusion that we are our bodies.”

Its the ego who creates or feeds the concept of fear of death and its the same ego who want´s everyone to identify themselves with their body-identity

Your fear of death will be replaced with the joy of life. Awareness of your glorious perfection will undo the false concepts of egotism and pride.

Death is an illusionary concept and can only appear real in the illusionary dualistic world of separation.

The old age that is passing away is not just a period of time. It is a personality. At the foundation of this age lies a malevolent mind. In its essence, the age is personal and evil (Gal. 1:4). It is the diabolical mind of Satan, and it blankets humanity like a fog. It is a philosophical stupor that is continually projected into the thinking of men. It is a mental anesthetic by which humanity blithely conforms to the will of Satan. It creates within all people the fear of death. In the matter of Job, Satan revealed the essence of his mental venom: “Skin for skin! Yes, all that a man has he will give for his life” (Job 2:4 NASU). In Hebrews 2:14-15 we are told that the devil holds men in slavery all their lives by the fear of death. This is therefore the fundamental means by which Satan has become the God of this world. Satan is the God and king of every man controlled by fear. And of course fear is also the foundation of greed and man’s quest for power. In the new age there is no need for greed or for power as God is sovereign and his blessings enable supernatural provision for every need (Phil. 4:19).

Death … transition, form, time. survival, fear, loss. change

In the illusionary dream world of separation, an eternal life is impossible because we identify who we are with a temporary form . our body. In an illusionary world of duality the mind created everything as separate. impermanent. decaying. constantly changing. and continuously dying. When we believe we are a physical body. ego identity. or soul personality. death is a constant threat.

The constant threat of death is what makes the separation so frightening and surviving this inevitable outcome so all pervasive. When we believe that we can die. we put our faith in what will inevitably bring us hopelessness and fear … we do not live at all. When death is our enemy, we live out all our days protecting ourselves from the threat of the many forms of loss.

We are constantly protecting ourselves from the threat of death . we exist in a state of survival and fear. When we spend our days surviving the threat of death we are not fully alive. It is impossible to be fully present and fully alive and simultaneously fearful of death … the fear of death is only possible w hen the mind entersjudgment the past, and the future. All fear dissolves when we become fully present, absolutely neutral, and aware of the infinite beauty of the now moment.

To believe in death is to believe in a reality that is impermanent, that has a beginning and an end. that is fleeting, limited. that can be destroyed and threatened. Death is just a made up belief in limitation, impermanence. structure, and form.

Death is just a box the mind chooses to believe, yet has nothing to do with Truth or Reality.

The limited box we call death. is a prison that robs the mind of the choice to live a life of unlimited joy. eternal love, and permanent freedom. Death is an illusionary concept and can only appear real in the illusionary dualistic world of separation.

Death is a made up concept within the separation that tells us that something can end, die, be threatened, or lost … that life is limited to what the five senses can perceive, and if we cannot perceive it with the five senses it is not real or it is gone. In Reality you never die … who you truly are is eternally alive, who you are is Life itself. Even within the illusion your awareness continues after physical death and you live. love. experience. grow. and evolve in the illusionary etheric realm just as you did when you dwelled in the physical realm.

The concept of fear of death keeps the ego alive and at same time keeps Your real Divine Higher Self asleep.

In Christianity, the concept of the immortal soul allows for the survival of individual identity even after death. … contrary, the total loss of individuality that eliminates the fear of death.

Self-expression involves the concept of ego-preservation. In its broadest sense it includes the individual’s endeavor to seek means of gratification, self-preservation, and ways of overcoming fear, including the fear of death. Individual, yet gregarious, man has a continuing need to readapt his person, his society, and his culture to changes in nature, in society, and in self so as to achieve equilibrium sufficient to maintain life. This continuing and necessary readaptation, however, demands a fundamental conformity, a denial of self, a sacrifice through selflessness.

If you understand that love is life’s reality, and that grace is all pervasive, you will also realise that your reality is love, and that freedomexists when you are united with the giver of grace — Divine Will. The development of the ego has manufactured a defensive world, full of anxiety, compulsion, insecurity, projection, and all those neuroses that psychologists enjoy theorising about. As you seek love by practising it, these masks can be released. With them go previous definitions of pleasure. Instead of attachment to this or that, you begin to find love in more and more of the human and natural world. You begin to appreciate creation in all its forms. The practice of love creates the conditions for surrender to Truth; it frees the body’s energy, allows it to become a chalice for omnipresent love, and provides liberation to bliss. The practice of conscious surrender supports that process. It proposes:

⦁ God, not self, is the doer.
⦁ Acts are done for God, not self.
⦁ The results of actions are God’s, not self s.

The life fear and the death fear : The problem of separation is expressed specifically in the concepts of “ life fear ” and “ death fear

Who is creating and feeding all these concepts; fear of loss, fear of death, feeding body-identity, and feeding separation concepts – the answer is the EGO, EGO, EGO, EGO.

The more you are identified with ego, the greater you will fear death.

“There’s only one thing I can think of that’s worse than death: that’s living with the fear of it.”

The human ego is afraid for silence, and one the weapons the ego is using is to create a constant chattering voice or constant sounds of interference. Therefore the goal with yoga and meditation is to shut off the ego-shattering voice

It is true that on the threshold of silence we often experience fear. It is the ego that is afraid. In the panoramic attention that you devote to choiceless awareness, the ego is not allowed to occupy center stage, where it thinks it belongs, and it begins to wonder what it will be like in silence, where it won’t be present at all. This fear resembles the fear of death, because entering into silence is a temporary death for the ego. The great silence would be its permanent death. Naturally it is afraid.

Featured

The Archons has designed a world and reality where rhe real Self is out of reach: Mankind continually strives for something he will never have, something that will always be out of his reach. Without delving too deeply into the story, the essential elements are plain: there are human beings on Earth and they live in a state of unconsciousness. There are two alien forces on the planet, struggling with each other for supremacy. One force wishes to keep humanity asleep and unaware; the other force wishes to give humanity knowledge so that it may free itself of the clutches of the planetary forces, the Archons or Aeons, and escape the prison that is the Earth. Tavistock Institute. Part 120

The Archons has designed a world and reality where rhe real Self is out of reach: Mankind continually strives for something he will never have, something that will always be out of his reach. Without delving too deeply into the story, the essential elements are plain: there are human beings on Earth and they live in a state of unconsciousness. There are two alien forces on the planet, struggling with each other for supremacy. One force wishes to keep humanity asleep and unaware; the other force wishes to give humanity knowledge so that it may free itself of the clutches of the planetary forces, the Archons or Aeons, and escape the prison that is the Earth. Tavistock Institute. Part 120

The Gnostic view of the world demands a revelation which comes from outside the cosmos and displays the possibility of deliverance, for of himself man cannot escape from his prison.”‘ Gnosticism reveals that Man is profoundly alienated, exiled from his true home, distant from, ignorant of, and perhaps unknown to, his heavenly Creator. Man is “asleep,” “drunken,” a slave to the senses. The redeemer’s mission is to awaken the “sleeping soul,” the “seed of light”; or to “awaken the dead.”‘ the Divine knowledge awakens the disciples to their true identity. As one disciple claimed, “he lifted me out of my sarcophagus!”

Man was originally created as a soul, but as his vibrations lost speed, he took on an etheric form as a spirit. As his speed kept decreasing, Man assumed his physical body. This tripartite model of Man is consistent with Gnostic anthropology, where man is made up of the flesh (sarx), soul (psyche) and spirit (pneuma). The pneuma still lingers in and belongs to the heavenly realm from whence it fell, but can be contacted by ascetic practices and redeemed through Gnosis.’

Man, as originally created, was made at the midway point between the angel and the brute —a little lower than the one, a little higher than the other. He was made, moreover, not perfect, but capable of perfection ; not immortal, but capable of immortality. He has given a psychical body, a body the centre and spring of which was the psyche, the ” anirnula vagula blandula ” of the ancients, poised between matter and spirit, and drawn upward and downward by alternate and opposite impulses.

When the soul had overcome the third Archon, it went upwards and saw the fourth Archon, (which) took seven forms. The first form is darkness, the second desire, the third ignorance, the fourth is the excitement of death, the fifth is the kingdom of the flesh, the sixth is the foolish wisdom of the flesh, the seventh is the wrathful wisdom. These are the seven [Archon] of wrath. They ask the soul, “Whence do you come, slayer of men, or where are you going, conqueror of space?” The soul answered and said, ‘What binds me has been slain, and what turns me about has been overcome, and my desire has been ended, and ignorance has died. In a [world] I was released from a world, [and] in a type from a heavenly type, and (from) the fetter of oblivion which is transient. From this time on will I attain to the rest of the time, of the season, of the aeon, in silence” (Robinson, 1977, p. 473).

The Archons control the Matrix, the mind prison, and their power is others ignorance. The state of ignorance is the Archons safety valve. One must overcome fear and end ignorance to exit the matrix and to be able to spiritually progress or expand theor consciousness or become enlighten, or raise their inner freqiencies, or begin understand the principles behind alchemy and its transformation.

Ignorance had been the jailkeeper. Because of ignorance, his mind had been obscured, just like the moon and stars hidden by the storm clouds. Clouded by endless waves of deluded thoughts, the mind had falsely divided reality into subject and object, self and others, existence and non-existence, birth and death, and from these discriminations arose wrong views—the prisons of feelings, craving, grasping, and becoming. The suffering of birth, old age, sickness, and death only made the prison walls thicker. The only thing to do was to seize the jailkeeper and see his true face. The jailkeeper was ignorance. And the means to overcome ignorance were the Noble Eightfold Path. Once the jailkeeper was gone, the jail would disappear and never be rebuilt again.

All beings contain within themselves the seeds of Enlightenment, and yet we drown in the ocean of birth and death for so many thousands of lifetimes!”

The human’s transmundane spirit or pneuma is “a portion of the divine substance from beyond which has fallen into the world; and the Archon created man for the express purpose of keeping it captive there.” The archons fashioned two com-ponents of man’s nature to imprison the spark of the divine: body, and “soul” or psyche—the “appetites and passions of natural man,” created in the image of the archons’ own psychic nature: “In its unredeemed state the pneuma thus immersed in soul and flesh is unconscious of itself, benumbed, asleep, or intoxicated by the poison of the world: in brief, it is ‘ignorant.’ Its awakening and lib-eration is effected through ‘knowledge.’ . . . The goal of gnostic striving is the release of the ‘inner man’ from the bonds of the world and his return to his native realm of light. The necessary condition for this is that he knows about the transmundane God and about himself, that is, about his divine origin as well as his present situation, and accordingly also about the nature of the world”

The Archons has designed a world and reality where rhe real Self is out of reach:

Mankind continually strives for something he will never have, something that will always be out of his reach.

Without delving too deeply into the story, the essential elements are plain: there are human beings on Earth and they live in a state of unconsciousness. There are two alien forces on the planet, struggling with each other for supremacy. One force wishes to keep humanity asleep and unaware; the other force wishes to give humanity knowledge so that it may free itself of the clutches of the planetary forces, the Archons or Aeons, and escape the prison that is the Earth.

tavistock 123

Simply stated, we are distracted by the world from having the personal realization of our own true self. Or as it is written in The Hypostasis of The Archons, “Moreover they threw mankind into great distraction and into a life of toil, so that their mankind might be occupied by worldly affairs, and might not have the opportunity of being devoted to the Holy Spirit.” You would think the above quote was written yesterday. As it turns out, “there is nothing new under the sun.” Today however, “worldly affairs” have greatly increased, and we can access them at the push of a button.

Again, take notice, our existence here is described as a distraction, ignorance, and stupor, all of which designed to prevent our personal realization of a higher self. All of the noise of the world acts to drown out the “still soft voice” which calls out to us. In The Gnostic Religion, by Hans Jonas, we read, “The orgiastic feast, intended to draw man into its drunken whirl, has besides intoxication another aspect: its noise is to drown out the “call of Life” and deafen man to the voice of the alien Man.”

“The metaphors of intoxication require special comment. The ‘drunkenness’ of the world is a phenomenon peculiarly characteristic of the spiritual aspect of what the Gnostics understood by the term ‘world.’ It is induced by the ‘wine of ignorance,’ which the world everywhere proffers to man…The ignorance of drunkenness is the soul’s ignorance of itself, its origin, and its situation in an alien world: it is precisely the awareness of alienness which the intoxication is meant to suppress; man drawn into the whirlpool and made oblivious of his true being is to be made one of the children of this world. This is the avowed purpose of the powers of the world in proffering their wine and holding their feast.” Even more to the point he writes, “We are dealing here, as in the whole group of metaphors of sleeping, not with a mythological detail, a mere episode in a narrative, but with a fundamental feature of existence…The ‘world’ on its part makes elaborate efforts to create and maintain this state in its victims and to counteract the operation of awakening: its power, even its existence, is at stake.”

It is alleged that our Soul is slumbering, ignorant of its true nature, and trapped within the world of matter-our material body. Furthermore, the world and all of its entrapments are designed solely to prevent her from awakening, from self realization. We have considered the noise of the world, and its quality of distraction. We see how “commercial programming” crosses the line of neutrality, and begins to actively attract the mind, using new forms of “bells and whistle.” It goes further even still. There is intelligence behind this noise. To paraphrase the quote above, there is a collective and elaborate effort to maintain this stupor, and to counteract our awakening. Hence, in the end days drugs will be a dominant tool used to subdue and confuse the thoughts of man. This collective and elaborate effort must therefore have an intelligence behind its increasing complexity. And that it is designed to counteract our awakening. implies the potential for us to awaken. This then brings us to the dual nature of the noise.

Freewill is a term often used but very little understood. Freewill sounds great, but what is it really? It is not the ability to choose between preconditions. It is not the ability to follow routine patterns or agree with the accepted normality. You see, to have freewill one must first be conscious that he has none, he must realize his predicament. To recognize the preconditioned, reactionary behavior and involuntary habitual thoughts that occupy his mind.

These machinations override and distract man from conscious presence at any given moment. The constant chatter of our mind is not our true self, and it won’t “pipe down” to allow for awareness of the Now. Distraction is the greatest obstacle to achieving conscious will, and “five sense reality” is the greatest distraction. Once a man has a will, he is free to utilize that will power as he commands. Until then, as Gurdjieff would say, man can do nothing. In his present state, man is unable to take action. He just does as he is programmed to do. You see, this is a reference to the conscious and subconscious mind, another inherent duality.

Understanding of the subconscious mind is another ancient science which is used to control the masses. Among other meanings, Isis is a symbol of the mother, the fertile womb, the cornucopia, the subconscious mind of man. Whatever is planted, or “inseminated” into the fertile womb will be “conceived” and made “real.” Whatever ideas are “planted” into the subconscious mind will be adopted by the individual and accepted as fact. We unconsciously claim ownership and identify with ideas which have been subtly and repeatedly suggested to us.

This is how it works. It is a back door into the control room of our mind. Modem day media “programming” and advertisement is an example of this science of mind, being used to manipulate the masses. We become imprisoned by our own beliefs, which were planted in our mind from an outside source.

We identify with these ideas because, from our perspective, they came from within our mind, they were “conceived” within us. We think these are our own ideas, how we actually feel, totally unaware of the subtle programming that we’ve been exposed to. The ultimate example of this is called “subliminal programming.”

This is no joke. As a result, man is led along a prescribed path, all along claiming that he is in fact leading the way. In the modem world especially, we are bombarded from all fronts by advertisements and gimmicks, repetitive suggestions as to how we should think, feel and act. Is it a coincidence that these three aspects of our being, are targeted for financial gain and doctrinal enslavement.

A false reality, an artificial projection is being developed by behavioral scientists, with the intent of influencing our own thoughts. Thoughts lead to feelings and actions. It is now common for people to purchase products way out of their “price range” and comment, “I don’t know why, but I just had to have it,” never knowing what it was that made them want it in the first place. These are the “false needs” we are encouraged to pursue and expend our energies on. This is the consensus reality which we receive from the television and media.

This contrived and manufactured “reality’ is called in the Bible, “the Lie.” In the “latter days” we will all be exposed to, and live within the Lie, a deception. Sadly, these commercial advertisements are the least of our worries.

For many years, behavioral scientists and psychologists have been working to learn about the deepest, darkest recesses of the mind. What do people fear the most, and how do you trigger those fears? This information has been used to manipulate millions of people in various ways.

Today we see it in the use of media to manipulate people into coming forward with their tax dollars, and our own children’s bodies, to go fight wars. To enrich the multi-national corporations that are extracting natural resources from all over the world. They have it down to a science. They tell us how to think and feel, they tell us what to do and we do it. These tactics work so well in fact, there seems no limit to how people can be misled to think, feel and act. As incredible as these assertions may seem, this knowledge is very old, very valued, and muck understood by some very powerful people. Not to belabor this subject, and at the risk of redundancy, we shall briefly review the words of H. Spencer Lewis, PhD. In a very curious book’ first printed in 1937, we find solid confirmation of this science. In bullet point style here is what Dr. Lewis had to share:

• “Throughout the ages mental poisoning of one form or another has enslaved millions of human beings and tortured the souls of men and women in all climes and conditions.”
• “As a result of the many years of analytical study tabulated in minute reports which were gradually brought together and put into a cumulative index of discovered facts.”
• “All of this brought to our understanding some certain fundamental actions on our part that were previously looked upon as primitive, natural instincts.”
• “One such almost universal instinct is to refuse to accept and obey the command of another person without careful analysis and ultimate agreement with the intent and purpose of the command.”

• “Psychology teaches us that the only successful way by which to make another mind or a strange mind obey a wish of our own mind is to present

that command or desire in such a subtle manner that it will be either unconsciously or willingly accepted by the other mind and acted upon with cooperation and approval before it has had time to analyze it and resent it.” ‘

• “And this school of unique forms of applied psychology has discovered some very fundamental principles. It has found that there are several ways in which very potent commands or suggestions can be given or conveyed by one mind to another, and that there are several ways in which such potent suggestions or actual commands can be and are readily accepted by another mind and almost unconsciously acted upon.’

• “In the long reports of the experts of this new school of applied psychology we come to realize that our daily lives, our daily affairs, our personal, private, intimate and public actions and reactions are almost hourly, and certainly daily, affected by the unsuspected commands and subtly potent suggestions of a horde of highly trained specialists who are working in every field of human interest solely for the purpose of making the rest of us do what they want us to do.”

• “Reading these reports, one begins to wonder whether any one of us ever has an original idea of his own, or a desire uniquely conceived and born in his consciousness without the fatherhood of some mental trickster.”

• “In fad, the psychology of the process seems to be this: (1) If you can offer a potent idea to another without letting the other person suspect for a fraction of a moment that you are anxious to have him adopt the idea, (2) it will be more readily adopted and accepted and acted upon than if a suspicion is aroused that you are trying to transplant an idea of your own into the other’s consciousness. Another very subtle point in connection with this psychological process is that (3) if you, in presenting your carefully veiled command and carefully worded or formed suggestion, can involve it, decorate it, and clothe it so that the other person’s mind will hear it or recognize it or see it without immediately understanding it’s real nature, but will later evolve it and mature it into a living, vital idea of the individual’s mind, (4) then that individual will think or believe that the idea is one of his own conception, his own logical and reasoning conclusion, and (vanity of vanities) because it is his own conceived and developed idea it must be true and correct and therefore worthy of immediate acceptance and highly enthusiastic adoption.” We have just read the words of H. Spencer Lewis PhD. regarding what can only be described as the proper method and formula for mind control. The significance of the previous quote can not be overstated, and one is encouraged to thoroughly contemplate the implications of this assertion. Not only can this process influence our thoughts, feelings and actions, it can assuredly influence

our overall health and well being, as Dr. Lewis continues to explain.

• “Strangest of all laws within the body of man! Whatever idea is accepted by our minds and consciousness without suspicion, without doubt, without challenge or without question becomes a law unto our bodies and proceeds to carry out its nature, its purpose, and its natural processes. Whatever idea is acceptable to us translates itself from a purely mental state into a dynamic physical power and force that carries on, unfolds, develops, and proceeds in accordance with principles beyond our control.” Basically, whatever we believe will become reality to us. Even a false, detrimental notion, if wholly believed, will become our reality, sickness and death included. For better or for worse, if our subconscious mind “accepts” an idea, it becomes a governing force, a “law” in our lives. Our subconscious mind can be likened to a computer, which is programmed to execute certain commands. The user of the computer (our conscious mind) can only run commands within the range of the computers programming. Any other commands “do not compute.” So it is with our mind. No matter how much a person consciously wants health and happiness, if they are subconsciously programmed to believe in disease and depression, that will be their experience.

• “But these very weaknesses and tendencies on the part of the human mind and consciousness constitute an open portal, an open doorway to the

influx and the incoming of strange ideas, and these fertilize the soil of our consciousness and make it highly susceptible to mental poisoning.”

• “It may seem like a paradox and a horrifying incongruity, but it is the truth, that the most violent and virulent of poisons possible to introduce into the human system, into the human mind, consciousness and body, are more easily administered, more readily accepted, more thoroughly absorbed, and more quickly set into disastrous operation than any of the material or chemical poisons known to man.” To put this information into context, remember that H. Spencer Lewis wrote these ideas in 1937 or earlier. He has described to us the methods of this wicked form of mind control quite candidly. Going so far as to call it a “back door” into the mind, and an “open portal” for strange ideas. The next quote from Mr. Lewis will be our last, for in it he delivers to us a final piece of the puzzle.

• “The methods of administering this poison are many, but they fall into three forms: audible suggestions and comments, visual suggestions, and the pictorial and mental.” Bingo, the cat is out of the bag. Not only does he describe the greatest single threat to the free-will and sovereignty of all human beings, but he also discloses the most effective method to administer this form of mental poison (mind control). Audible and visual suggestions combined with pictorial and mental suggestions. And while reading his words one can easily consider modem media with its subtle, yet invasive programming. It is very curios that, coinciding with the publication of Mental Poisoning, the practical tool for delivering such poison was in the developmental stages. Clearly, he is describing such mechanisms as the radio and television, the two greatest tools of mind control throughout the twentieth century. This is the back door and open portal into the mind. It may be extreme, but one could be led to believe that the radio and television were developed for the sole purpose of controlling the masses. Of course, there are shows and topics of interest which can be found on television and radio, these are used to draw viewers. But with any effective poison, 90% is good grain, while the remaining 10% can kill you. So it is with the mass media, we consume the “programming’ indiscriminately. All of this information confirmed in 1937, by the (then) leader of the Rosicrucian order known as AMORC.

As Dr. Lewis had written, “…one begins to wonder whether any one of us ever has an original idea of his own…” This sentiment is mirrored in the following quote; “Individuals incapable of formulating even a notion of their own, frantically search for someone to agree with, thereby entering upon the path of mental deterioration in which the intellect descends from the simple state of not knowing to the actual inability to know.”‘

Featured

Duality is the seed of conflict, “Duality is the idea or concept of separation”, Duality is based on createing division, This world of duality is an illusion. This world of duality is an illusion, The illusion of duality being the result of ignorance , will be dispelled by proper knowledge, therefore people on Earth will be kept away from real knowledge. Tavistock Institute. Part 119

Duality is the seed of conflict, “Duality is the idea or concept of separation”, Duality is based on createing division, This world of duality is an illusion. This world of duality is an illusion, The illusion of duality being the result of ignorance , will be dispelled by proper knowledge, therefore people on Earth will be kept away from real knowledge. Tavistock Institute. Part 119

Why then is it important to understand duality, and not only understand, but to see beyond its limitations? It is vitally important because duality is not a truth. It is part of the illusion, but it is not a truth in reality. Remember, I use the term reality to refer to what exists outside the illusion, or what is considered Truth.

Mankind is constantly fed with concept of duality because its feeding the mind with illusions and keeping Mankind enslaved and captivated in a “fixed” state of ignorance. The main source within the Archons Matrix (or Mind Prison) is IGNORANCE. Earth-Man is enslaved within their dimension, and FEAR is the FREQUNECY that suprress everyone to be tuned into the reality of the Archons. In other words Mankind is trapped in their perception which is govern and constantly fed through the five senses. As long people not moving the veil of ignorance the Arhons will govern everything on planet Earth. They using the human EGO, THREE LOWER CHAKRAS; and THE FIVE SENSES, and FEAR is the FREQUNCY, and IGNORANCE is the state of mind Man/Woman must break through or remove for liberation. By gnosis and knowledge man/woman may be able to achieve liberation from the Archons MATRIX.

What if the EGO/ARCHON party never ended? What if no one went home and became themselves again or the royalty never took their rightful place in the Kingdom? What if the costume provided a separate reality that became so engaging that no one remembered any other way? People might just forget who they really were. Is it possible that we could forget that we were wearing a grand elaborate costume?

Kundalini lies dormant but, like a tiny seed when the conditions are right, can awaken and grow into a mighty tree. In the same way an electrical cable connects a computer to the mains, the awakened kundalini connects human awareness to the all-pervasive power of divine love. Kundalini, then, is the divine power in man which when liberated becomes the causal factor in all higher experiences of the yogin.

So multiplicity is creation of the ignorance. Multiple names and forms are only appearance of one homogeneous principle. We study this, but this knowledge should settle within us. We should know this in totality without any doubt, simply knowing it in our faculty of intelligence but reacting to situations with our ego, i.e., with identification with body-mind interactions as the self, would not work.

That is the reason earlier it was said that the Knowledge cannot be comprehended through the mind, but we have to see the One only through the mind as it is advocated here. But how this will be possible? Possible through a Mind at Rest: The above discussions appear to be contradictory as it is first said that the Supreme cannot be comprehended through the mind and again later it is said to know That through the mind. But actually this is not contradictory. To know we have the only one instrument called mind.

In that mind we have to see the unity of our individual-self and the world with the Cosmic Self, One and the Only One. But it was said that such a realization is not possible through the mind since the nature of mind is to remain in a state of volition. Here in the above discussion we have already said, citi vistramya tisthasi, give rest to your mind, Control of the Sense Organs and the Mind,” p. 29).

So this Self-realization is not possible through a mind that is in volition but is possible through a mind at rest. When actions of the mind, citta, are halted, then that is called yoga. This is the unity or union of the individual with the source.

The Ego must be rmished: So for that delusion to be eradicated the ego must be finished.

I am not, the mind, man* not the intellect, not the ego, not the sub-consciousness, not the ears or the tongue, not the nose or the eyes, not even the ether or the earth, not the fire, not the airI am the form of Consciousness and Bliss, ciddnandera pah, I am Siva, livoham, I am Siva, fivoham. Here negation of the body, the five sense-organs, the five organs of action, the mind, the intellect, the ego, the subconsciousness and the five elements, viz., earth, water, etc., and contemplating on the Consciousness and Bliss as Christ or the Pure Existence is shown as the way. Christ means Bliss, removal of misery, Christ means Truth, the Pure Existence, and the principle that called the Self. Siva means the Pure Consciousness, the Knowledge. The yogic way of this negation is named samddhi, and this is inhibition of all the actions of the mind-stuff, citta. Then there are no cravings and aversions, and that is equanimity.

By control of the mind, all the yogis, attain fearlessness, removal of misery, knowledge of the Self, and everlasting„ peace. The seat of fear is only in our mind, miseries are only in our mind, the ignorance is only in our mind, and turbulences and disturbances are only in our mind. So the mind should be controlled to overcome these. This mind is the world, so purify it with care, so that the mind should be merged with That. This is the secret, and this is eternal.

So the purification of mind, is nothing but merging the mind, manolaya, with the Un-eroded Principle. Then there is eternal peace and this much is the secret. The Self should be Taught after Purification: From the above discussions we understand that the identity with the body-mind interactions is named as the ego, which is a product of the ignorance and is the cause of bondage.

This identity results in the enjoyment of various sense objects and gives pain and pleasures, but when one transcends that and sees the Self in all manifestations then he becomes established in the Knowledge and Bliss. But for this to happen, cleaning the senses and the internal organ named mind are of utmost necessity because without these the concept of unity of the individual self with the Cosmic Self or the Transcendental Self is not possible and if done so without cleaning the mind then there is danger of misperception of the body as the Self being strengthened to a highest degree.

In Kathopanitsad it is said, the nerves of the heart are a hundred and one.

“All the extraordinary spiritual, mystical traditions continuously work on awakening the Third Eye. It is the easiest, most powerful way of awakening yourself to higher dimensions. Third Eye is an important power which is stored in every human being. It is a possibility in every human being. We need to awaken it. We need to make it as reality. Third Eye is not just an eye; it is the very source of your Consciousness. Creating awareness, centering yourself on the Third Eye means awakening your consciousness.”

Yoga is the rule book for playing the game of Life, but in this game no one needs to lose. It is tough, and you need to train hard. It requires the willingness to think for yourself, to observe and correct, and to sur-mount occasional setbacks. It demands honesty, sustained application, and above all love in your heart. If you are interested to understand what it means to be a human being, placed between earth and sky, if you are interested in where you come from and where you will be able to go, if you want happiness and long for freedom, then you have al-ready begun to take the first steps toward the journey inward. The rules of nature cannot be bent. They are impersonal and im-placable. But we do play with them. By accepting nature’s challenge and joining the game, we find ourselves on a windswept and exciting journey that will pay benefits commensurate to the time and effort we put in—the lowest being our ability to tie our own shoelaces when we are eighty and the highest being the opportunity to taste the essence of life itself.

Yoga releases the creative potential of Life. It does this by estab-lishing a structure for self-realization, by showing how we can progress along the journey, and by opening a sacred vision of the Ultimate, of our Divine Origin, and final Destiny. The Light that yoga sheds on Life is something special. It is transformative. It does not just change the way we see things; it transforms the person who sees. It brings knowl-edge and elevates it to wisdom.

We must also come to see the relationship between nature and soul; yoga does not reject one for the other but sees them as inseparably joined like earth and sky are joined on the horizon. Yo u do not need to seek freedom in some distant land, for it exists within your own body, heart, mind, and soul. Illuminated emancipa­tion, freedom, unalloyed and untainted bliss await you, but you must choose to embark on the Inward Journey to discover it.

The Inward Journey

Spiritual realization is the aim that exists in each one of us to seek our divine core. That core, though never absent from anyone, re­mains latent within us. It is not an outward quest for a Holy Grail that lies beyond, but an Inward Journey to allow the inner core to reveal itself. In order to find out how to reveal our innermost Being, the sages explored the various sheaths of existence, starting from body and progressing through mind and intelligence, and ultimately to soul. The yogic journey guides us from our periphery, the body, to the center of our being, the soul. The aim is to integrate the var­ious layers so that the inner divinity shines out as through clear glass.

Kosas-The Sheaths of Being

Yoga identifies five of these different levels or sheaths of being (kosas), which must be completely integrated and in harmony with each other in order for us to achieve wholeness. When these subtle sheaths are in disharmony, they become sullied like a mirror reflecting the tarnished images of the sensory and sensual world. The mirror reflects what is in the world around us rather than letting the clear light of the soul within shine out. It is then that we experience disease and despair. True health requires not only the effective functioning of the physical exterior of our being, but also the vitality, strength, and sensitivity of the subtle levels within. Most of us think of our “body” as simply our physical form–our skin, bones, muscles, and internal organs. For yoga, however, this is only the outermost layer of our body or annamaya kosa. It is this anatomical body that encompasses the other four subtle bodies, or kosas.

When these bodies or sheaths are misaligned or clash with one another, we inevitably encounter the alienation and fragmentation that so trouble our world. When, on the other hand, we are able to bring the various sheaths of our body into alignment and harmony with one another, the fragmentation disappears, integration is achieved, and unity is established.

The physical body (annamaya kosa) must connect with and thereby imprint upon the energetic and organic body (pranamaya kosa), which must, in turn, accord with the mental body (manomaya kosa), the mental body with the intellectual body (vijnanamaya kosa), and the intellectual body with the blissful body (anandamaya kosa).

Likewise, if there is no communication between the blissful body and the physical body, then the blissful body cannot bring its illumination to the motion and action of the physical body, and there is darkness in life and not Light on Life.

The demarcation of the different sheaths is essentially hypothet­ical. We are unique and integral. Nevertheless, in order to achieve the integrity and wholeness we desire, there must be communication from the inner to the outer and the outer to the inner as each sheath blends with the next.

Only then are we bound together as one functional human being. If not, we experience dissolution and fragmentation, which make life uncomfortable and confusing. It is essential for the follower of the yoga journey to understand the need for integration and balance in the kosa.

For example, the mental and intellectual bodies (manomaya and vijnanamaya kosa) must function effectively in order for us to observe, analyze, and reflect what is happening in the physical and energetic bodies (annamaya and pranamaya kosa) and make readjustments. The physical body in other words is not something separate from our mind and soul. We are not supposed to neglect or deny our body as some ascetics suggest. Nor are we to become fixated on our body­our mortal self-either. The aim of yoga is to discover our immortal Self. The practice of yoga teaches us to live fully-physically and spir­itually-by cultivating each of the various sheaths.

After all, the goal of yoga may be the ultimate freedom but even before this is achieved, there is an incremental experience of greater freedom as we discover ever more self-control, sensitivity, and aware­ness that permit us to live the life we aspire to, one of decency; clean, honest human relations; goodwill and fellowship; trust; self-reliance; joy in the fortune of others; and equanimity in the face of our own mis­fortune. From a state of human goodness, we can progress toward the greater freedom.

Self-cultivation through asana is the broad gateway leading to the inner enclosures we need to xplore. In other words, we are going to try to use asana to sculpt the mind. We must discover what each sheath of being longs for and nourish it according to its subtle appetites. After all, it is the inner or subtler kosa that support the layers exterior to them. So we would say in yoga that the subtle precedes the gross, or spirit precedes matter. but yoga says we must deal with the outer or most manifest first, i.e. legs, arins, spine, eyes, tongue, touch, in order to develop the sensitivity to move inward.

This is why asana opens the whole spectrum of yoga’s possibilities. There can be no realization of existential, divine bliss without the support of the soul’s incarnate vehicle, the food-and-water­fed body, from bone to brain. If we can become aware of its limitations and compulsions, we can transcend them.

We all possess some aware­ness of ethical behavior, but in order to pursue yama and niyama at deeper levels, we must cultivate the mind. We need contentment, tran­quility, dispassion, and unselfishness, qualities that have to be earned. It is asana that teaches us the physiology of these virtues.

The fourth petal of yoga concerns the breathing techniques or pranayama (prana = vital or cosmic energy, ayama = extension, ex­pansion). Breath is the vehicle of consciousness and so, by its slow, measured observation and distribution, we learn to tug our attention away from external desires (vasana) toward a judicious, intelligent awareness (prajna). As breath stills mind, our energies are free to un­hook from the senses and bend inward to pursue the inner quest with heightened, dynamic awareness. Pranayama is not performed by the power of will.

The breath must be enticed or cajoled, like catching a horse in a field, not by chasing after it, but by standing still with an apple in one’s hand. In this way, pranayama teaches humility and frees us from greed or hankering after the fruits of our actions. Nothing can be forced; receptivity is everything.

The withdrawal of the senses into the mind (pratyahara) is the fifth petal of yoga, also called the hinge of the outer and inner quest. Un­fortunately, we misuse our senses, our memories, and our intelligence. We let the potential energies of all these flow outward and get scat­tered. We may say that we want to reach the domain of the soul, but there remains a great tug-of-war.

We neither go in nor out, and that saps the energy. We can do better. By drawing our senses of perception inward, we are able to expe­rience the control, silence, and quietness of the mind.

This ability to still and gently silence the mind is essential, not only for meditation and the inward journey but also so that the intuitive intelligence can func­tion usefully and in a worthwhile manner in the external world.

The final three petals or stages are concentration (dharana), med­itation (dhyana), and total absorption (samadhi). These three are a crescendo, the yoga of final integration (samyama yoga). We begin with concentration. Because dharana is so easy to trans­late as concentration, we often overlook or dismiss it. At school we learn to pay attention. This is useful, but it is not in yogic terms con­centration. We do not say of a deer in the forest, “Look, he’s concen­trating.” The deer is in a state of total vibrant awareness in every cell of his body. We often fool ourselves that we are concentrating because we fix our attention on wavering objects-a football match, a film, a novel, the waves of the sea, or a candle flame-but is not even the flame flickering? True concentration is an unbroken thread of aware­ness. Yoga is about how the Will, working with intelligence and the self-reflexive consciousness, can free us from the inevitability of the wavering mind and outwardly directed senses. Here, asana serves us greatly.

When each new point has been studied, adjusted, and sustained, one’s awareness and concentration will necessarily be simultaneously directed to myriad points so that in effect consciousness itself is dif­fused evenly throughout the body. Here consciousness is pt·netrating and enveloping, illuminated by a directed flow of intelligence and serving as a transformative witness to body and mind.

This is a sus­tained flow of concentration (dharana) leading to an exalted aware­ness. The ever-alert Will adjusts and refines, creating a totally self-correcting mechanism.

In this way, the practice of asana, per­formed with the involvement of all elements of our being, awakens and sharpens intelligence until it is integrated with our senses, our mind, our memory, our consciousness, and our soul. All of our bones, flesh, joints, fibers, ligaments, senses, mind, and intelligence are harnessed. The self is both the perceiver and the doer.

When I use the word “self” with a small s, I mean the totality of our awareness of who and what we are in a natural state of consciousness. Thus the self assumes its nat­ural form, neither bloated nor shrunken. In a perfect asana, performed meditatively and with a sustained current of concentration, the self as­sumes its perfect form, its integrity being beyond reproach.

Technically speaking, true meditation in the yogic sense cannot be done by a person who is under stress or who has a weak body, weak lungs, hard muscles, collapsed spine, fluctuating mind, mental agita­tion, or timidity. Often people think that sitting quietly is meditation. This is a misunderstanding.

True meditation leads us to wisdom (jnana) and awareness (prajna), and this specifically helps in understanding that we are more than our ego. For this one needs the preparations of the postures and the breathing, the withdrawal of the senses and concentration. This process of relaxing the brain is achieved through asana. We generally think of mind as being in our head.

In asana our conscious­ness spreads throughout the body, eventually diffusing in every cell, creating a complete awareness. In this way stressful thought is drained away, and our mind focuses on the body, intelligence, and awareness as a whole. This allows the brain to be more receptive, and concentration be­comes natural. How to keep the brain cells in a relaxed, receptive, and concentrated state is the art that yoga teaches.

“Duality is the seed of conflict”.

We cannot all go into outer space to glimpse a planet where shared human goals can be achieved by peaceful cooperation. But when we look at photos of our blue orb hanging in space with no national boundaries cut into its surface and the white cloak of clouds en­veloping it, we too are moved by the earth’s unity. How then do we live this unity? Duality is the seed of conflict. But we all have access to a space, an inner space, where there is an end to duality, an end to con­flict. This is what meditation teaches us, the cessation of the imper­sonating ego and the dawn of the true, unified Self, beyond which there is no other. Yoga says that the highest experience of freedom is One­ness, the supreme reality of unity. But we cannot penetrate inward in order to experience immortal bliss without first harmonizing the five sheaths that encompass the soul.

In the final stage of samadhi (union), the individual self, with all its attributes, merges with the Divine Self, with the Universal Spirit. Yogis realize that the divine is not more heavenward than inward and in this final quest of the soul, seekers become seers. In this way they ex­perience the divine at the core of their being. Samadhi is usually de­scribed as the final freedom, freedom from the wheel of karma, of cause and effect, action and reaction. Samadhi has nothing to do with perpetuating our mortal self. Samadhi is an opportunity to encounter our imperishable Self before the transient vehicle of body disappears, as in the cycle of nature, it surely must. Yogis, however, do not stay in this stage of exalted bliss, but when they return to the world their actions are different, as they know in their innermost being that the divine unites us all and that a word or action done to another is ultimately done equally to oneself.

Learning to Live in the Natural World

Before beginning this journey inward, we must clarify its nature. There is a frequent misunderstanding of the journey inward or the spiritual path, which suggests to most people a rejection of the natural world, the mundane, the practical, the pleasurable. On the contrary, to a yogi (or indeed a Taoist master or Zen monk) the path toward spirit lies en­tirely in the domain of nature. It is the exploration of nature from the world of appearances, or surface, into the subtlest heart of living matter. Spirituality is not some external goal that one must seek but a part of the divine core of each of us, which we must reveal. For the yogi, spirit is not separate from body.

A scientist sets out to conquer nature through knowledge-ex­ternal nature, external knowledge. By these means he may split the atom and achieve external power. A yogi sets out to explore his own internal nature, to penetrate the atom (atma) of being. He does not gain dominion over wide lands and restless seas, but over his own re­calcitrant flesh and febrile mind. This is the power of compassionate truth. The presence of truth can make us feel naked, but compassion takes all our shame away. It is this inner quest for growth and evolu­tion, or “involution,” that is the profound and transformational yogic journey that awaits the seeker after Truth. We begin this involution with what is most tangible, our physical body, and the yogasana prac­tice helps us to understand and learn how to play this magnificent in­strument that each of us has been given.

The yogi knows that the physical body is not only the temple for our soul but the means by which we embark on the inward journey toward the core. Only by first attending to the physical body can we hope to accomplish anything in our spiritual lives. If a man or woman has aspirations to experience the divine, but his or her body is too weak to bear the burden, of what use are their aspirations and ambitions?

That’s all the more reason, there­fore, for the vast majority of us who suffer from physical limitations and debilities to some degree to start yoga as soon as possible so that we may fit ourselves for the journey ahead of us.

Yoga offers us techniques to become aware, to expand and pene­trate, and to change and evolve in order to become competent in the lives we live and to initiate sensitivity and receptivity toward the life of which we are still only dimly aware.

We begin at the level of the phys­ical body, the aspect of ourselves that is most concrete and accessible to all of us. It is here that yogasana and pranayama practice allow us to understand our body with ever greater insight and through the body to understand our mind and reach our soul.

To a yogi, the body is a laboratory for life, a field of experimentation and perpetual research. For the yogi, the physical body corresponds to one of the elements of nature, namely the earth.

We are mortal clay, and we return to dust. All cultures recognize this truth, but nowadays we treat it as a mere metaphor. It is more than that. As you explore your own body, you are in fact exploring this element of nature itself. You are also developing the qualities of earth within yourself: solidity, shape, firmness, and strength.

Body will prove to be an obstacle unless we transcend its limita­tions and remove its compulsions. Hence, we have to learn how to ex­plore beyond our known frontiers, that is to expand and interpenetrate our awareness and how to master ourselves. Asana is ideal for this.

The keys to unlocking our potential are the qualities of purity and sensitivity. The point about purity, or simply cleanliness as it is often called in yoga texts, is not primarily a moral one. It is that purity per­mits sensitivity. Sensitivity is not weakness or vulnerability. It is clarity of perception and allows judicious, precise action. On the other hand, rigidity comes from impurity, from accumu­lated toxins, whether in the physical sense or the mental, when we call it prejudice or narrow-mindedness.

Rigidity is insensitivity. The sweat of exertion and the insight of penetration bring us, through a process of elimination and self-cultivation, both purity and sensitivity. Purity and sensitivity benefit us not only in relation to the inward journey but in relation to our outer environment, the external world.

The effects of impurity are highly undesirable. They cause us to de­velop a hard shell around us. If we construct a stiff shell between our­selves and the world outside our skin, we rob ourselves of most of life’s possibilities.

We are cut off from the free flow of cosmic energy. It be­comes difficult in every sense to let nourishment in or to let toxic waste out. We live in a capsule, what a poet called a “vain citadel.” As mammals, we are homeostatic.

That means we maintain certain mnstant balances within our bodies, temperature for example, by adapting to change and challenge in the environment. Strength and flexibility allow us to keep an inner balance, but man is trying more and more to dominate the environment rather than control himself.

Ultimately, when all the sheaths of the body and all the parts of a person coordinate together while performing an asana, you experience lhl· cessation of the fluctuations of the mind and also freedom from af­flictions. In asana you must align and harmonize the physical body and all the layers of the subtle emotional, mental, and spiritual body. This is integration. But how does one align these sheathes and experience this integration? How do we find such profound transformation in what from the outside may look simply like stretching or twisting the body into unusual positions? It begins with awareness.

There is an exercise of will, but the brain must be willing to listen to the body and see what is reasonable and prudent within the body’s capacity. The intelligence of the body is a fact. It is real. The intelligence of the brain is only imagination. So the imagination has to be made real. The brain may dream of doing a difficult back bend Imlay, but it cannot force the impossible even onto a willing body. Wl· arc always trying to progress, but inner cooperation is essential.

Brain has to cooperate with the message it receives from the body. I will often say to a student, “Your brain is not in your body! That is why you can’t get the asana.” I mean of course that his intelligence is in his head and not filling his body. It may be that your brain moves faster than your body or your body may fail to fulfill the instructions of your brain owing to lack of right guidance from your intelligence. Y

ou must learn to move the brain a bit more slowly so that it follows the body, or you have to make the body move faster to match the intelligence of the brain. Let the body be the doer, the brain the ob-server.

After acting, reflect on what you have done. Has the brain inter­preted the action correctly? If the brain does not observe correctly, then there is confusion in action. The duty of the brain is to receive knowl­edge from the body and then guide the body to further refine the ac­tion. Pause and reflect between each movement.

This is progression in attention. Then in the stillness, you can be filled with awareness. Ask yourself, “Has every part of me done its job?” The Self has to find out whether this has been done well or not. Pausing to reflect on your movement does not mean that you are not reflecting throughout the movement.

There should be constant analysis throughout the action, not just afterward. This leads to true understanding. The real meaning of knowledge is that action and analysis synchronize. Slow motion allows reflective intelligence. It al­lows our minds to watch the movement and leads to a skillful action. The art of yoga lies in the acuity of observation.

Self-consciousness is when the mind constantly worries and wonders about itself, doubting and being self-absorbed. It is like having the devil and angel sitting on your shoulders constantly arguing over what you should do. When you are self-conscious, you are going to ex­haust yourself. You are also going to strain the muscles unnecessarily because you are thinking about the asana and how far you want to stretch and not experiencing the asana and stretching according to your capacity. Self-awareness is the opposite of self-consciousness.

When you are self-aware, you are fully within yourself, not outside yourself looking in. You are aware of what you are doing without ego or pride. When you cannot hold the body still, you cannot hold the brain still. If you do not know the silence of the body, you cannot understand the silence of the mind.

Action and silence have to go together.

If there is action, there must also be silence. If there is silence, there can be con­scious action and not just motion. When action and silence combine like the two plates of a car’s clutch, it means that intelligence is in gear. While doing the postures, your mind should be in an interior con­scious state that does not mean sleep; it means silence, emptiness, space that can then be filled with an acute awareness of the sensations given by the posture. You watch yourself from inside. It is a full silence. Maintain a detached attitude toward the body and, at the same time, do not neglect any part of the body or show haste but remain alert while doing the asana.

Horizontal expansion and vertical extension should synchronize so that you are extending in all directions. Freedom in a posture is when every joint is active. Let us be full in whatever posture it is we arc doing just as we should be full in whatever we do in our lives.

Extension is freedom, and freedom allows for relaxation.

“Perfection is achieved when the effort to perform it becomes effortless and the infinite being within is reached.”

There is always relaxation in the right position, even though you are fully stretching. The ego is an unrelenting task master. It does not know that one must balance activity and passivity in the asana, exertion and relaxation. When one extends and relaxes, there is no oscillation of mind or body.

One who knows the art of relax­ation also knows the art of meditation. Whether one lives in the East or the West, North or South, everyone suffers from stress, and everyone craves rest and relaxation. If one stretches completely, one re­laxes completely. Look at a cat, a master of stretching and a master of relaxation.

Through yoga one can begin to develop a perfect balance between both sides of the body. All of us begin with imbalances, favoring one side or the other. When one side is more active than the other, the active side must become the guru for the inactive side to make it equally active. To the weaker side, we must apply attention. We must also show more care. We show keener interest to improve a dull and struggling friend than for an eager and intelligent one. In the same way you have to show yourself this same compassion and act on the weaker side of the body while taking pleasure in the achievement of the active side. Precision in action comes when the challenge by one side of the body is met by an equal counter-challenge of the other. This ignites the light of knowledge. You must keep your balance by using the intelli­gence of the body (whether instinct, feeling, or ability) but not by strength. When you keep the balance by strength, it is physical action; when by intelligence of the body, it is relaxation in action. Evenness is harmony, and in that evenness alone you learn.

Balance does not mean merely balancing the body. Balance in the body is the foundation for balance in life. In whatever position one is in, or in whatever condition in life one is placed, one must find balance. Balance is the state of the present-the here and now. If you balance in the present, you are living in Eternity.

When the intellect is stable, there is no past, no future, only present. Do not live in the future; only the present is real. The mind takes you constantly to the future, as it plans, worries, and wonders. Memory takes you to the past, as it ruminatl’s and regrets.

Only the Self takes you to the present, for the divine can be experienced only now. The past, present, and future are held to­gether in each asana as thought, word, and deed become one. One has to find the median line of each asana so that the energy is properly distributed.

When one wavers from the median line, then one goes either to the past or the future. Vertical ascending is the future; vertical descending is the past. The horizontal is the present. The pre­sent is the perfect asana.

When you open horizontally, future and past meet in the present. This is how dynamic extension and expansion allow you to find balance and live more fully in the present through your body. In asana, we find balance and integration in the three di­mensions of space, but we also find balance and integration in the fourth dimension of time. The ancient sages said that the key to life was balance.

But what are we sup­posed to balance? The answer lies in the three qualities of nature, which are called the guna. These three qualities must be balanced in your asana practice and in your body, mind, and soul. Roughly they are translated as solidity, dynamism, and luminosity. We have seen that the essence of nature is change, a never-ending expression and re-expression of itself. What, we must ask ourselves, constantly provokes that change? Why do things simply not stay as they are?

This is because of the guna, the three complementary forces that Indian philosophy identifies as emerging from the very root of na­ture at the moment of creation. Understanding the guna, these three forces of nature, will be important for the success of your practice of yogasana and your inward journey to the Universal Soul. As soon as nature becomes manifest, these three forces shift. They lose their balance and create instability. That instability is very fertile. Mathematicians say that numbers progress from one to two to three to many. It is the number three that unlocks the possibility of infinite diversity. Infinite, unmanifested origin is one. Duality is two.

“Duality is the seed of conflict”.

“Duality is the idea or concept of separation”.

Dualityis the idea or concept of separation, of division, but alone it cannot I manifest in phenomena. Three is a wave, a sine curve, a vibration like light or sound. When two waves collide, a new phenomenon is created. That is the creativity inherent in nature. Even at the subtlest level, that of vibration and infra-atomic particles, nature’s built-in wobble sets it on an endless cycle of creation, destruction, and recreation. From three comes many.

Perfecting: Always Be Happy with the Smallest Improvement

Let the goal be to reach Perfection, but be content with a little progress toward perfection every day. Overambition can be destructive of sus­tainable progress. Perfection is ultimately only with God. So what is the value of perfection if it can be found only in God? We are creatures who can dream of perfection, and it is this dream that inspires one to improve. It is this dream that ignites the effort needed to transform. Perfection creates interest in art and life. The instinct that draws us to­ward the dream of perfection is really a desire for God. Sometimes our body is willing, but our mind is weak and says, “We don’t have time,” or “Forget it, it’s not worth all the effort.” Sometimes it is our mind that is willing, but our body is weak and says, “I’m really too tired for all this trouble.”

A practitioner must focus between the mind and the body, listening to the counsel of each, but letting the intelligence and the soul make the true decision, for this is where real willpower and real dedication are found. Do to your capacity while always striving to extend your capacity. Ten minutes today. After a few days, twelve minutes. Master that, then again extend. It is better to do a good pose minimum than a bad pose maximum. Do not say that you are disappointed with yourself. Find time every day to do something to maintain the asana practice. Sometimes both body and mind yield to willpower, and at other times they rebel.

Do not be afraid. Do not be attached to your body. Even if fear comes, accept it and find the courage to come through it. When you experience fear, you must practice without attachment to the body, thinking of it objectively as an opportunity for creative work. When fear is not there, you can treat the body more subjectively, as a part of yourself that nonetheless requires practice and cultivation.

Yoga is mastered only by long persistent nonstop practice, with zeal and de­termination. When the gardener plants an apple seed, does he expect the apples to appear at once? Of course not. The gardener waters the seed, watches each day, and feels happy seeing the growth. Treat the body in the same way. We water our asana and pranayama practice with love and joy seeing the small progress. While we know what the goal is, we do not focus on enlightenment. We know that when our practice is ripe, illumination comes. Patience allied with disciplined practices brings the required willpower. Willpower is concrete, not ethereal. When you do something, you demonstrate your willpower, and it becomes all the easier to have the same power of will the next time. When you perform your asana, you are physically demonstrating willpower through the expression of the muscles. Willpower is not just in the mind, but it is also in the body.

If there is an end, then there is no God. Creation by God never ends, so creation of your movements never ceases. The moment you say, “I have got it,” you have lost everything you had. As soon as something comes, you have to go one step further. Then there is evo­lution. The moment you say, “I am satisfied with that,” that means stagnation has come. That is the end of your learning; you have closed the windows of your intellect. So let me do what I cannot do, not what I can do. You have always to do a little bit more than you think you can, in quality and in quantity. This is what leads ultimately to beauty and greatness.

Never compare with others. Each one’s capacities are a function of his or her internal strength. Know your capacities and continually improve upon them. Over time the intensity with which one can practice develops.

Featured

Letting Go – The Pathway of Surrender – Dedicated to removing the blocks to the Higher Self on the path to Enlightenment

Letting Go – The Pathway of Surrender – Dedicated to removing the blocks to the Higher Self on the path to Enlightenment

Dedicated to removing the blocks to the Higher Self on the path to Enlightenment

FOREWORD

This book provides a mechanism by which to unlock our innate capacities for happiness, success, health, well-being, intuition, unconditional love, beauty, inner peace, and creativity. These states and capacities are within all of us.

They do not depend on any outer circumstance or personal characteristic; they do not require belief in any religious system. No single group or system owns inner peace, as it belongs to the human spirit by virtue of our origin. This is the universal message of every great teacher, sage, and saint: “The kingdom of heaven is within you.” Dr. Hawkins says frequently, “What you are seeking is not different from your very own Self.” How can something innate to us—part and parcel of our true being—be so difficult to attain? Why all the unhappiness if we were endowed with happiness? If the “kingdom of heaven” is within us, why do we often “feel like hell”?

How can we get free of the sludge of non-peace that makes our journey to inner peace seem so arduous, like molasses running uphill on a freezing cold day? It’s nice to hear that peace, happiness, joy, love, and success are intrinsic to our human spirit. But what about all of the anger, sadness, despair, vanity, jealousy, anxieties, and daily little judgments that muffle the pristine sound of silence within us? Is there really a way to shake off the sludge and be free? Dance with unimpeded joy? Love all living things? Live in our greatness and fulfill our highest potential? Become a channel of grace and beauty in the world? In this book, Dr. Hawkins offers a pathway to the freedom that we long for but find difficult to attain. It may sound counter-intuitive to get somewhere by “letting go”; however, he certifies from clinical and personal experience that surrender is the surest route to total fulfillment.

Letting Go: The Pathway of Surrender provides the roadmap to a freer life for anyone who is willing to make the trip. Your life will be changed for the better if you apply the principles described in this book. They are not difficult to understand or to implement. They do not cost anything. They do not require special attire or travel to an exotic country. The major requirement for the journey is a willingness to let go of the attachment to your current experience of life.

We learn that the answer to the problems we face is within us. By letting go of the inner blocks to it, the truth of our inner Self shines forth and the path to peace is revealed. Other spiritual teachers have emphasized the cultivation of inner peace as the only real solution to personal difficulties, as well as collective conflicts: “Inner disarmament first, then outer disarmament” (The Dalai Lama);

“Be the change you want to see in the world” (Gandhi). The implication is clear. Because we are all part of the whole, when we heal something in ourselves, we heal it for the world. Each individual consciousness is connected to the collective consciousness at the energetic level; therefore, personal healing emerges collective healing. Dr. Hawkins may be the first to attempt to understand this principle in light of scientific and clinical applications. The crucial point is: by changing ourselves, we change the world. As we become more loving on the inside, healing occurs on the outside. Much like the rising of the sea level lifts all ships, so the radiance of unconditional love within a human heart lifts all of life.

Dr. David R. Hawkins is a world-renowned author, psychiatrist, clinician, spiritual teacher, and researcher of consciousness. Details of his extraordinary life are given in the “About the Author section at the back of the book. His unique work effulges from a wellspring of universal compassion and is dedicated to the alleviation of suffering in all dimensions of life.

The gift of Dr. Hawkins’ work to human evolvement is beyond what can be said about it. The state of Enlightenment is totally complete in its bliss, such that one would never leave it except out of a total surrender of love to God and to one’s fellow human beings, to share the gift that was given. This book on letting go, and all of his work in the world, is the result of that surrender.

As you will read in one of the chapters, there was a very deep surrender that allowed the resumption of his personal consciousness in order to fulfill certain commitments in the world. The state of oneness was not lost or left, but extraordinary love had to be directed toward the challenge of verbalizing the ineffable. You will notice that some of his pronouns do not fit grammatical convention—for example, “our life”—yet they are true to the experience of a spiritual state that knows the impersonal oneness of all life. That Dr. Hawkins would re-enter the world of logic and language in order to share a “Map of Consciousness” with us—so that we might also complete our destiny—speaks volumes of his selfless love for humanity. By showing us the way to liberation, Dr. Hawkins gives us the chance of reaching it.

The letting go technique is a pragmatic system of eliminating obstacles and attachments. It can also be called a mechanism of surrender. There is scientific proof of its efficacy, an explanation of which is included in one of the chapters. Research has shown the technique to be more effective than many other approaches currently available in relieving the physiologic responses to stress. After researching most of the various stress-reduction and consciousness methods, this approach stands out for its sheer simplicity, efficiency, clinical efficacy, absence of questionable concepts, and rapidity of observable results. Its simplicity is deceptive and almost disguises the real benefit of the technique. Simply stated, it sets us free from emotional attachments. It verifies the observation made by every sage, that attachments are the primary cause of suffering.

The mind, with its thoughts, is driven by feelings. Each feeling is the cumulative derivative of many thousands of thoughts. Because most people throughout their lives repress, suppress, and try to escape from their feelings, the suppressed energy accumulates and seeks expression through psychosomatic distress, bodily disorders, emotional illnesses, and disordered behavior in interpersonal relationships. The accumulated feelings block spiritual growth and awareness, as well as success in many areas of life.

INTRODUCTION
While in contemplation one day, the mind said: “What in the world is wrong with us?” “Why doesn’t happiness stay put?” “Where are the answers?’ “How do we address the human dilemma?” “Have I gone nuts or has the world gone crazy?”

The solution to any problem seems to bring only brief relief, for it is the very basis of the next problem. “Is the human mind a hopeless squirrel cage?” “Is everybody confused?” “Does God know what He’s doing?” “Is God dead?”

The mind just kept chattering along: “Does anybody have the secret?” Don’t worry—everybody’s desperate. Some seem cool about it. “I can’t see what all the fuss is about,” they say. “Life seems simple to me.” They are so scared they can’t even look at it! How about the experts? Their confusion is more sophisticated, wrapped in impressive jargon and elaborate mental construction.

They have predetermined belief systems into which they try to squeeze you. It seems to work for a while and, then, it is just back to one’s original state again.

Intuitively, we know that somewhere there is an ultimate answer. We stumble down dark byways into cul-de-sacs and blind alleys; we get exploited and taken, disillusioned, fed up, and we keep on trying. Where is our blind spot? Why can’t we find the answer? We don’t understand the problem; that’s why we can’t find the answer. Maybe it’s ultra simple, and that’s why we can’t see it. Maybe the solution is not “out there,” and that’s why we can’t find it. Maybe we have so many belief systems that we are blinded to the obvious.

Throughout history, a few individuals have reached great clarity and have experienced the ultimate solution to our human woes. How did they get there? What was their secret? Why can’t we understand what they had to teach? Is it really next to impossible or nearly hopeless? What about the average person who is not a spiritual genius? Multitudes follow spiritual pathways, but scarce are the ones who finally succeed and realize the ultimate truth. Why is that? We follow ritual and dogma and zealously practice spiritual discipline—and we crash once again!

Even when it works, the ego quickly comes in and we are caught in pride and smugness, thinking we have the answers. Oh, Lord, save us from the ones who have the answers! Save us from the righteous! Save us from the do-gooders!

Confusion is our salvation. For the confused, there is still hope. Hang on to your confusion. In the end it is your best friend, your best defense against the deathliness of others’ answers, against being raped by their ideas. If you are confused, you are still free.

If you are confused, this book is for you. What’s in the book? It tells of a simple method to reach great clarity and transcend your problems along the way. It’s not by finding the answers, but by undoing the basis of the problem. The state reached by the great sages of history is available; the solutions are within us and easy to find.

The mechanism of surrender is simple and the truth is self-evident. It works during daily life. There is no dogma or belief system. You verify everything for yourself, so you cannot be misled. There is no dependence on any teachings. It follows the dicta of “Know thyself”;

“The truth shall set you free”; and “The kingdom of God is within you.” It works for the cynic, the pragmatist, the religionist, and the atheist. It works for any age or cultural background. It works for the spiritual person and the non-spiritual person alike. Because the mechanism is your own, nobody can take it away from you. You are safe from disillusionment.

You will find out for yourself what is real and what are just the mind’s programs and belief systems. While all of this is going on, you will become healthier, more successful with less effort, happier, and more capable of real love. Your friends will notice a difference; the changes are permanent. You aren’t going to go for a “high” and crash later. You will discover there is an automatic teacher within yourself. Eventually you will discover your inner Self. You always unconsciously knew it was there.

When you come upon it, you will understand what the great sages of history were trying to convey. You will understand it because Truth is self-evident and within your own Self. This book is written with you, the reader, constantly in mind. It is easy, effortless, and enjoyable. There is nothing to learn or memorize. You will become lighter and happier as you read it. The material will automatically start bringing you the experience of freedom as you read through the pages.

You are going to feel the weights being removed. Everything you do will become more enjoyable. You are in for some happy surprises about your life! Things are going to get better and better! It’s okay to be skeptical. We’ve been taken down the primrose path before, so be as skeptical as you like. Indeed, it’s advisable to avoid gushing enthusiasm.

It is a setup for a letdown later. Therefore, rather than enthusiasm, quiet observation will serve you better. Is there such a thing as something for nothing in the universe? Oh, yes, most certainly there is. It’s your own freedom which you have forgotten and don’t know how to experience. What is being offered to you is not something that has to be acquired. It is not something that is new or outside of yourself. It is already yours and merely has to be reawakened and rediscovered. It will emerge of its own nature. The purpose of sharing this approach is merely to put you in touch with your own inner feelings and experiences. In addition, there is much helpful information that your mind will want to know. The process of surrender will begin automatically, for it is the nature of the mind to seek relief from pain and suffering and to experience greater happiness.

THE MECHANISM OF LETTING GO

What is it?

Letting go is like the sudden cessation of an inner pressure or the dropping of a weight It is accompanied by a sudden feeling of relief and lightness, with an increased happiness and freedom. It is an actual mechanism of the mind, and everyone has experienced it on occasion.

A good example is the following. You are in the midst of an intense argument; you are angry and upset, when suddenly the whole thing strikes you as absurd and ridiculous. You start to laugh. The pressure is relieved. You come up from anger, fear, and feeling attacked to feeling suddenly free and happy.

Think how great it would be if you could do that all of the time, in any place, and with any event. You could always feel free and happy and never be cornered by your feelings again. That’s what this technique is all about: letting go consciously and frequently at will. You are then in charge of how you feel, and you are no longer at the mercy of the world and your reactions to it. You are no longer the victim. This is employing the bask teaching of the Buddha, which removes the pressure of involuntary reactivity.

We carry around with us a huge reservoir of accumulated negative feelings, attitudes, and beliefs. The accumulated pressure makes us miserable and is the basis of many of our illnesses and problems. We are resigned to it and explain it away as the “human condition.” We seek to escape from it in myriad ways. The average human life is spent trying to avoid and run from the inner turmoil of fear and the threat of misery. Everyone’s self-esteem is constantly threatened both from within and without.

If we take a close look at human life, we see that it is essentially one long elaborate struggle to escape our inner fears and expectations that have been projected upon the world. Interspersed are periods of celebration when we have momentarily escaped the inner fears, but the fears are still there waiting for us. We have become afraid of our inner feelings because they hold such a massive amount of negativity that we fear we would be overwhelmed by it if we were to take a deeper look.

We have a fear of these feelings because we have no conscious mechanism by which to handle the feelings if we let them come up within ourselves. Because we are afraid to face them, they continue to accumulate and, finally, we secretly begin looking forward to death to bring all of the pain to an end. It is not thoughts or facts that are painful but the feelings that accompany them.

Thoughts in and of themselves are painless, but not the feelings that underlie them! It is the accumulated pressure of feelings that causes thoughts. One feeling, for instance, can create literally thousands of thoughts over a period of time. Think, for instance, of one painful memory from early life, one terrible regret that has been hidden. Look at all the years and years of thoughts associated with that single event.

If we could surrender the underlying painful feeling, all of those thoughts would disappear instantly and we would forget the event. This observation is in accord with scientific research. The Gray-LaViolette scientific theory integrates psychology and neurophysiology. Their research demonstrated that feeling tones organize thoughts and memory (Gray-LaViolette, 1981). Thoughts are filed in the memory bank according to the various shades of feelings associated with those thoughts. Therefore, when we relinquish or let go of a feeling, we are freeing ourselves from all of the associated thoughts.

The great value of knowing how to surrender is that any and all feelings can be let go of at any time and any place in an instant, and it can be done continuously and effortlessly. What is the surrendered state? It means to be free of negative feelings in a given area so that creativity and spontaneity can manifest without opposition or the interference of inner conflicts. To be free of inner conflict and expectations is to give others in our life the greatest freedom. It allows us to experience the basic nature of the universe, which, it will be discovered, is to manifest the greatest good possible in a situation. This may sound philosophical, but, when done, it is experientially true.

Christ said, “Why do you see the splinter which is in your brother’s eye, and do not feel the beam which is in your own eye (Matthew 7:3)?”

All the Great Masters point us within. Everything in the universe emits a vibration. The higher the vibration, the more power it has. Emotions, also, because they are energy, emit vibrations.

There is progressive diminishing of dependence on anything or anyone outside of ourselves. These principles are in accord with the basic teaching of the Buddha to avoid attachment to worldly phenomena, as well as the basic teaching of Jesus Christ to “be in the world but not of it.”

There are numerous complicated psychologies of the human emotions. They often involve considerable symbology and references to mythology, and they are based on hypotheses that are hotly debated. As a result, there are various schools of psychotherapy with their different aims and methods. Simplicity is one of the earmarks of truth, and so we will describe a simple, workable, testable map of the emotions that can be verified by subjective experience, as well as by objective testing.

The Goal of Survival Whichever psychology is studied reveals that the primary human goal, superseding all others, is survival. Every human desire seeks to ensure one’s personal survival and the survival of one’s identified groups, such as family, loved ones, and country. Humans fear, most of all, the loss of the capacity to experience. To that end, people are interested in the survival of the body because they believe that they are the body and, therefore, they need the body to experience their existence.

Because people view themselves as separate and limited, they are stressed by their sense of lack. It is common for humans to look outside of themselves for the satisfaction of their needs. This leads them to experience themselves as vulnerable because they are insufficient unto themselves. The mind is, therefore, a survival mechanism, and its method of survival is primarily the use of emotions. Thoughts are engendered by the emotions and, eventually, emotions become shorthand for thoughts.

Thousands and even millions of thoughts can be replaced by a single emotion. Emotions are more basic and primitive than mental processes. Reason is the tool the mind uses to achieve its emotional ends. When used by the intellect, the basic underlying emotion is usually unconscious or at least out of awareness. When the underlying emotion is forgotten or ignored and not experienced, people are unaware of the reason for their actions and they develop all kinds of plausible reasons.

In fact, they frequently do not know why they are doing what they are doing. There is a simple way to become conscious of the underlying emotional goal behind any activity through use of the question, “What for?” With each answer, “What for?” is asked again and again until the basic feeling is uncovered. An example would be the following. A man wants a new Cadillac. His mind gives all the logical reasons but logic doesn’t really explain it. So he asks himself, “What do I want the Cadillac for?” “Well,” he says, “it is to achieve status, recognition, respect, and solid citizen success status.” Again: “What do I want status for?” “Respect and approval from others,” he might say, “and to ensure that respect.” Again: “What do I want respect and approval for?” “To have the feeling of security.” Again: “What do I want security for?” “To feel happy.” The continual question, “What for?,” reveals that basically there are feelings of insecurity, unhappiness, and lack of fulfillment. Every activity or desire will reveal that the basic goal is to achieve a certain feeling.

There are no other goals than to overcome fear and achieve happiness. Emotions are connected with what we believe will ensure our survival, not with what actually will. Emotions themselves are actually the cause of the basic fear that drives everyone to seek security constantly.

“Like goes to like.” The different energies constellate in “attractor patterns” or “levels of consciousness.” The Map of Consciousness (see Appendix A) provides a linear, logarithmic view of this nonlinear energetic terrain. Each level of consciousness (or attractor pattern) is calibrated on a logarithmic scale of energetic power, ranging from 1-1000. The level of Pull Enlightenment (1000), at the top of the Map, represents the highest level attainable in the human realm; it is the energy of Jesus Christ, the Buddha, and Krishna. The level of Shame (20) is at the bottom, close to death, representing bare survival. The level of Courage (200) is the critical point that marks the shift from negative to positive energy. It is the energy of integrity, being truthful, empowerment, and having the capacity to cope. The levels of consciousness below Courage are destructive, whereas the levels above it are life-supportive. A simple muscle-test reveals the difference: negative stimuli (below 200) instantly weaken the muscle, and positive stimuli (above 200) instantly strengthen the muscle. True “power” strengthens; “force” weakens. Above the level of Courage, people seek us out because we give energy to them (“power) and we have goodwill towards them. Below the level of Courage, people avoid us because we take energy from them (“force”) and we want to use them for our own material or emotional needs. Here, we delineate the basic scale, starting from the higher energies down to the lower:

My Personal thoughts; (To understand this scale the three first chakras can be represented from energy frequency from 0-200 in this scale, and this also reprsent the Matrix or the mind prison Mankind is trapped within. Much what see, hear and read in news, media and watch from the movie industry is designed to keep mankind in the lower state of mind). Ego therefore don´t want to be enlighten, but instead feeding people´s mind with ignorance. “Enlightenment is ego’s ultimate disappointment.”

Peace (600): This is experienced as perfection, bliss, effortlessness, and oneness. It is a state of non-duality beyond separateness and beyond the intellect, as in the “peace that passeth all understanding.” It is described as Illumination and Enlightenment. It is rare in the human realm. Joy (540): Love that is unconditional and unchanging, despite circumstances and actions of others. The world is illuminated by exquisite beauty, which is seen in all things. The perfection of creation is self-evident. There is closeness to unity and discovery of Self; compassion for all; enormous patience; the feeling of at-oneness with others and a concern for their happiness. A sense of self-completion and self-sufficiency prevails. Love (500): A way of being that is forgiving, nurturing, and supportive. It does not proceed from the mind; rather, it emanates from the heart. Love focuses on the essence of a situation, not the details. It deals with wholes, not particulars. As perception is replaced with vision, it takes no position and sees the intrinsic value and lovability of all that exists.

Reason (400): This aspect differentiates humans from the animal world. There is the ability to see things in the abstract, to conceptualize, to be objective, and to make rapid and correct decisions. Its enormous utility is problem solving. Science, philosophy, medicine, and logic are expressions of this level. Acceptance (350): This energy is easy-going, laid back, harmonious, flexible, inclusive, and free of inner resistance. “Life is good. You and I are good. I feel connected.” It meets life on life’s terms. There is no need to blame others or blame life.
Willingness (310): This energy subserves survival by virtue of a positive attitude that welcomes all expressions of life. It is friendly, helpful, wants to assist, and seeks to be of service.


Neutrality (250): This is a way of life that is comfortable, pragmatic, and relatively free of emotionality. “It’s okay either way.” It is free of rigid positions, nonjudgmental, and noncompetitive. Courage (200): This energy says, “I can do it.” It is determined, excited about life, productive, independent, and self-empowered. Effective action is possible. Pride (175): “My way is the best way.” says this level. Its focus is achievement. desire for recognition, specialness, and perfectionism. It feels “better than … ” and superior to others. Anger (150): This energy overcomes the source of fear by force, threats, and attack. It is irritable, explosive, bitter, volatile, and resentful. It likes to “get even,” as in “I’ll show you.” Desire (125): It is always seeking gain, acquisition, pleasure, and “getting” something outside oneself. It is insatiable, never satisfied, and craving. have to have it.” “Give me what I want, and give it to me now!” Fear (100): This energy sees “danger,” which is “everywhere.” It is avoidant, defensive, preoccupied with security, possessive of others, jealous, restless, anxious, and vigilant. Grief (75): There is helplessness, despair, loss, regret, and the feeling, “If only I had … ” Separation. Depression. Sadness. Being a “loser.” Mournful, as in “I can’t go on.” Apathy (50): This energy is characterized by hopelessness, playing dead, being a “drain” to others, being immobilized, and the feelings: “I can’t” and “Who cares?” Poverty is common. Guilt (30): In this energy field, one wants to punish and be punished. It leads a self-rejection, masochism, remorse, “feeling bad,” and self-sabotage. “It’s all n fault” Accident-proneness, suicidal behavior, and projection of self-hatred ono “evil” others are common. It is the basis of many psychosomatic illnesses. Shame (20): Characterized by humiliation, as in “hanging your head in shame.’ It is traditionally accompanied by banishment. It is destructive to health and leads to cruelty toward self and others.

The energy levels are also traditionally associated with the body energy centers that are sometimes referred to as “chakras.” The chakras are energy centers through which “kundalini energy” is said to flow, once it is awakened at the level of Courage (200). The energy centers (chakras) can be measured by a variety of clinical techniques and sensitive electronic instruments.

On the Map of Consciousness, the chakras calibrate as follows: Crown (600), Third Eye (525), Throat (350), Heart (505), Solar Plexus (275), Sacral or Spleen (275), Base or Root Chakra (200). When we relinquish negative feelings, the energy in our higher chakras increases. For instance, instead of habitually “venting our spleen” (second chakra), we are now described as “all heart” (fifth chakra). This energy system has a direct impact on the physical body.

The energy in each chakra flows out through channels called “meridians” to the whole energy body, which is like a blueprint to the physical body. Each meridian is associated with a particular organ, and each organ is associated with a particular emotion. A negative emotion throws off the energy balance of its associated acupuncture meridian and related organ.

For instance, depression, despair, and melancholy are associated with the liver meridian, so these emotions tend to interfere with liver function. Every negative feeling impairs a body organ and, as the years go by, that organ becomes diseased and eventually fails to function. The lower our emotional state, the more negatively we influence not only our own lives but also all of life around us.

The higher the emotional level of evolution, the more positive our life becomes on all levels, and we support all life around us. As negative emotions are acknowledged and surrendered, we get freer and move up the scale, eventually experiencing predominantly positive feelings. All lower emotions are limitations and blind us to the reality of our true Self. As we surrender our way up the scale and near the top, a new type of experience begins to happen. At the very top of the scale, there occurs the realization of one’s true Self and the varying levels of Illumination.

The main importance of this is to note that, as we get higher and freer, what the world calls spiritual awareness, intuition, and growth of consciousness occur. This is the common experience of all who surrender their negative feelings. They become more and more conscious. That which is impossible to see or experience at lower levels of consciousness becomes self-evident and stunningly obvious at higher levels.

This whole book can be downloaded from PDFDRIVE.COM. Just search for Letting Go – The Pathway of Surrender

CONTENT

Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter 2: The Mechanism of Letting Go
What is it?
Feelings and Mental Mechanisms
Feelings and Stress
Life Events and Emotions
Mechanism of Letting Go
Resistance to Letting Go
Chapter 3: The Anatomy of Emotions
Goal of Survival
Scale of Emotions
Understanding Emotions
Handling Emotional Crises
Healing the Past
Enhancing Positive Emotions
Chapter 4: Apathy and Depression
“I Can’t” vs. “I Won’t”
Blame
Choosing the Positive
The Company We Keep
Chapter 5: Grief
Allowing the Grief
Handling Loss
Preventing Grief
Chapter 6: Fear
Fear of Public Speaking
Healing Effect of Love
Owning the “Shadow”
Guilt
Chapter 7: Desire
Desire as an Obstacle
Having—Doing—Being
Glamour
Power of Inner Decision
Chapter 8: Anger
Using Anger Positively
Self-Sacrifice
Acknowledgment
Expectations
Chronic Resentment
Chapter 9: Pride
Vulnerability of Pride
Humility
Joy and Gratitude
Opinions
Chapter 10: Courage
Courage to Let Go
Self-Empowerment
Awareness of Others
Chapter 11: Acceptance
Everything Is Perfect As It Is
Acceptance of Self and Others
Personal Responsibility
Chapter 12: Love
Love in Everyday Life
Love Heals
Unconditional Love
Oneness
Chapter 13: Peace
Profound Impact of Peace
Silent Transmission
Surrender to Ultimate Reality
Chapter 14: Reducing Stress and Physical Illness
Psychological Aspects and Stress Proneness
Medical Aspects of Stress
Energy System Response to Stress and the Acupuncture System
Interventions to Alleviate Stress
Kinesiologic Testing
Kinesiologic Testing Technique
The Relationship of Consciousness to Stress and Disease
Chapter 15: The Relationship between Mind and Body
Influence of Mind
Disease-Prone Beliefs
Comparison with Other Techniques
Chapter 16: The Benefits of Letting Go
Emotional Growth
Problem Solving
Lifestyle
Resolution of Psychological Problems: Comparison with
Psychotherapy
Chapter 17: Transformation
Health
Wealth
Happiness
State of Inner Freedom
Chapter 18: Relationships
Negative Feelings
The Human Condition
Positive Feelings
Sexual Relations
Chapter 19: Achievement of Vocational Goals
Feelings and Abilities
Negative Feelings Related to Work
Positive Feelings Related to Work
Feelings and the Decision-Making Process
Feelings and Sales Ability
Chapter 20: Physician, Heal Thyself
Basic Principles
Healing of Multiple Diseases
Healing of Vision
Chapter 21: Questions and Answers
Religious and Spiritual Goals
Meditation and Inner Techniques
Psychotherapy
Alcoholism and Drug Addiction
Relationships
The Mechanism
Surrender to the Ultimate

Featured

Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism – “It is important to see that the main point of any spiritual practice is to step out of the bureaucracy of ego”. Dharma is applicable to every age, to every person; it has a living quality. It is not enough to imitate your master or guru; you are not trying to become a replica of your teacher.

Cutting Through Spiritual Materialism – “It is important to see that the main point of any spiritual practice is to step out of the bureaucracy of ego”. Dharma is applicable to every age, to every person; it has a living quality. It is not enough to imitate your master or guru; you are not trying to become a replica of your teacher.

Foreword

The inspiration to find the truth, to see what is real, and to lead a genuine life—the culmination of which can be enlightenment—is what underlies every spiritual journey. However, embarking on this journey is rarely as straightforward as we may wish.

The journey toward enlightenment ultimately may be both profound and simple, yet the process of understanding that simplicity tends to be multidimensional, if not downright complicated.

For in order to understand a spiritual path, we must acknowledge and understand our own mind, now, as it pertains to the journey. What misunder-standings and concepts we may have about a spiritual practice, we must overcome so that we’re not merely practicing according to our own conceptualized idea.

Ego, and the myriad games it plays to unravel our inspiration for enlightenment, must always be monitored. To understand the essential qualities of the spiritual path, especially what obstacles or conundrums might lie ahead, we need a clear sense of direction. We need teachings, instructions, and guidance from someone who has traveled the path and therefore can give valid and confident advice about how others could travel this same path.

Cutting Through Spiritual

Materialism has become a classic. For those in the audience who were experimenting with rejecting society in order to pursue an idealistic, transcendental path, his teachings shed new light onworking with themselves in the context of their own country, family, and culture. As an enthusiastic newcomer to the West and a spiritual elder as well, he was able to introduce to them the basic workability of their own situation as part of the spiritual path.

Rejecting everything was not the solution. Training one’s mind, body, and speech in accordance with the truth would bring about the understanding and wisdom that produces peace.

Many of those students followed his advice, continuing on their spiritual journeys and at the same time becoming parents, teachers, business people, and even dharma teachers. These people have now become the elders for a new generation of inquisitive minds.

Even though the message of this book was addressed to a particular group at a particular time in history, it is not only for that generation. These teachings will never be dated or pigeonholed. In the last thirty years, in our continuing pursuit of whatever will distract us from the truth of pain and suffering, we have become even more materialistic.

Although the Bud-dhist way is not theistic, it does not contradict the theistic dis-ciplines. Rather the differences between the ways are a matter of emphasis and method. The basic problems of spiritual materialism are common to all spiritual disciplines. The Bud-dhist approach begins with our confusion and suffering and works toward the unraveling of their origin. The theistic ap-proach begins with the richness of God and works toward raising consciousness so as to experience God’s presence. But since the obstacles to relating with God are our confusions and negativities, the theistic approach must also deal with them. Spiritual pride, for example, is as much a problem in theistic disciplines as in Buddhism. According to the Buddhist tradition, the spiritual path is the process of cutting through our confusion, of uncovering the awakened state of mind. When the awakened state of mind is crowded in by ego and its attendant paranoia, it takes on the character of an underlying instinct. So it is not a matter of building up the awakened state of mind, but rather of burning out the confusions which obstruct it. In the process of burning out these confusions, we discover enlightenment. If the process were otherwise, the awakened state of mind would be a product, dependent upon cause and effect and therefore liable to dissolution. Anything which is created must, sooner or later, die. If enlightenment were created in such a way, there would always be the possibility of ego reasserting itself, causing a return to the confused state. Enlightenment is permanent be-cause we have not produced it; we have merely discovered it (p.4).

In the Buddhist tradition the analogy of the sun appearing from behind the clouds is often used to explain the discovery of enlightenment. In meditation practice we clear away the confusion of ego in order to glimpse the awakened state. The absence of ignorance, of being crowded in, of paranoia, opens up a tremendous view of life. One discovers a different way of being. The heart of the confusion is that man has a sense of self which seems to him to be continuous and solid. When a thought or emotion or event occurs, there is a sense of someone being conscious of what is happening. You sense that you are read-ing these words. This sense of self is actually a transitory, dis-continuous event, which in our confusion seems to be quite solid and continuous. Since we take our confused view as be. ing real, we struggle to maintain and enhance this solid self. We try to feed it pleasures and shield it from pain. Experi-ence continually threatens to reveal our transitoriness to us, so we continually struggle to cover up any possibility of dis-covering our real condition. “But,” we might ask, “if our real condition is an awakened state, why are we so busy trying to avoid becoming aware of it?” It is because we have become so absorbed in our confused view of the world, that we consider it real, the only possible world. This struggle to maintain the sense of a solid, continuous self is the action of ego Ego, however, is only partially successful in shielding us from pain. It is the dissatisfaction which accompanies ego’s struggle that inspires us to examine what we are doing.

Since there are always gaps in our self-consciousness, some insight is possible. An interesting metaphor used in Tibetan Buddhism to describe the functioning of ego is that of the “Three Lords of Materialism”:

the “Lord of Form,” the “Lord of Speech,” and the “Lord of Mind.” In the discussion of the Three Lords which follows, the words “materialism” and “neurotic” refer to the action of ego.

The Lord of Form refers to the neurotic pursuit of physical comfort, security and pleasure. Our highly organized and technological society reflects our preoccupation with manipu. I sting physical surroundings so as to shield ourselves from the irritations of the raw, rugged, unpredictable aspects of life. Push-button elevators, pre-packaged meat, air conditioning, flush toilets, private funerals, retirement programs, mass pro-duction, weather satellites, bulldozers, fluorescent lighting, nine to five jobs, television—all are attempts to create a man-ageable, safe, predictable, pleasurable world.

The Lord of Form does not signify the physically rich and secure life-situations we create per se. Rather it refers to the neurotic preoccupation that drives us to create them, to try to control nature. It is ego’s ambition to secure and entertain it-self, trying to avoid all irritation. So we cling to our pleasures and possessions, we fear change or force change, we try to create a nest or playground.

The Lord of Speech refers to the use of intellect in relating to our world. We adopt sets of categories which serve as handles, as ways of managing phenomena. The most fully developed products of this tendency are ideologies, the systems of ideas that rationalize, justify and sanctify our lives. Nationalism, communism, existentialism, Christianity, Buddhism —all provide us with identities, rules of action, and interpretations of how and why things happen as they do.

Again, the use of intellect is not in itself the Lord of Speech. The Lord of Speech refers to the inclination on the part of ego to interpret anything that is threatening or irritating in such a way as to neutralize the threat or turn it into something “positive” from ego’s point of view. The Lord of Speech re-fers to the use of concepts as filters to screen us from a direct perception of what is. The concepts are taken too seriously; they are used as tools to solidify our world and ourselves.

If a world of nameable things exists, then “I” as one of the name-able things exists as well. We wish not to leave any room for threatening doubt, uncertainty or confusion. The Lord of Mind refers to the effort of consciousness to maintain awareness of itself. The Lord of Mind rules when we use spiritual and psychological disciplines as the means of maintaining our self-consciousness, of holding onto our sense of self. Drugs, yoga, prayer, meditation, trances, various psy-chotherapies—all can be used in this way.

Ego is able to convert everything to its own use, even spiri-tuality. For example, if you have learned of a particularly beneficial meditation technique of spiritual practice, then ego’s attitude is, first to regard it as an object of fascination and, second to examine it. Finally, since ego is seeming solid and cannot really absorb anything, it can only mimic. Thus ego tries to examine and imitate the practice of meditation and the meditative way of life. When we have learned all the tricks and answers of the spiritual game, we automatically try to imitate spirituality, since real involvement would require the complete elimination of ego, and actually the last thing we want to do is to give up the ego completely.

However, we cannot experience that which we are trying to imitate; we can only find some area within the bounds of ego that seems to be the same thing. Ego translates everything in terms of its own state of health, its own inherent qualities. It feels a sense of great accomplishment and excitement at having been able to create such a pattern. At last it has created a tangible ac-complishment, a confirmation of its own individuality. If we become successful at maintaining our self-consciousness through spiritual techniques, then genuine spiritual de velopment is highly unlikely.

Our mental habits become so strong as to be hard to penetrate. We may even go so far as to achieve the totally demonic state of complete “Egohood.” Even though the Lord of Mind is the most powerful in sub-verting spirituality, still the other two Lords can also rule the spiritual practice. Retreat to nature, isolation, simple, quiet, high people—all can be ways of shielding oneself from irri-tation, all can be expressions of the Lord of Form.

Or perhaps religion may provide us with a rationalization for creating a secure nest, a simple but comfortable home, for acquiring an amiable mate, and a stable, easy joh. The Lord of Speech is involved in spiritual practice as well. In following a spiritual path we may substitute a new religious ideology for our former beliefs, but continue to use it in the old neurotic way. Regardless of how sublime our ideas may be, if we take them too seriously and use them to maintain our ego, we are still being ruled by the Lord of Speech.

Most of us, if we examine our actions, would probably agree that we are ruled by one or more of the Three Lords. “But,” we might ask, “so what? This is simply a description of the human condition. Yes, we know that our technology cannot shield us from war, crime, illness, economic insecurity, laborious work; old age and death; nor can our ideologies shield us from doubt, uncertainty, confusion and disorienta. tion; nor can our therapies protect us from the dissolution of the high states of consciousness that we may temporarily achieve and the disillusionment and anguish that follow. But what else are we to do?

The Three Lords seem too powerful to overthrow, and we don’t know what to replace them with.

The Buddha, troubled by these questions, examined the process by which the Three Lords rule. He questioned why our minds follow them and whether there is another way. He discovered that the Three Lords seduce us by creating a funda-mental myth: that we are solid beings. But ultimately the myth is false, a huge hoax, a gigantic fraud, and it is the root of our suffering. In order to make this discovery he had to break through very elaborate defenses erected by the Three Lords to prevent their subjects from discovering the fundamental deception which is the source of their power.

We cannot in any way free ourselves from the domination of the Three Lords unless we too cut through, layer by layer, the elaborate defenses of these Lords.

The Lords’ defenses are created out of the material of our minds. This material of mind is used by the Lords in such a way as to maintain the basic myth of solidity. In order to see for ourselves how this process works we must examine our own experience.

“But how,” we might ask, “are we to conduct the examination? What method or tool are we to use?” The method that the Buddha discovered is meditation. He discovered that struggling to find answers did not work. It was only when there were gaps in his struggle that insights came to him. He began to realize that there was a sane, awake quality with-in him which manifested itself only in the absence of struggle.

So the practice of meditation involves “letting be.” There have been a number of misconceptions regarding meditation. Some people regard it as a trancelike state of mind. Others think of it in terms of training, in the sense of mental gymnastics. But meditation is neither of these, although it does involve dealing with neurotic states of mind.

The neurotic state of mind is not difficult or impossible to deal with. It has energy, speed and a certain pattern. The practice of meditation involves letting be—trying to go with the pattern, trying to go with the energy and the speed. In this way we learn how to deal with these factors, how to relate with them, not in the sense of causing them to mature in the way we would like, but in the sense of knowing them for what they are and working with their pattern.

There is a story regarding the Buddha which recounts how he once gave teaching to a famous sitar player who wanted to study meditation. The musician asked, “Should I control my mind or should I completely let go?” The Buddha answered, “Since you are a great musician, tell me how you would tune the strings of your instrument.” The musician said, “I would make them not too tight and not too loose.” “Likewise,” said the Buddha, “in your meditation practice you should not im-pose anything too forcefully on your mind, nor should you let it wander.”

That is the teaching of letting the mind be in a very open way, of feeling the flow of energy without trying to subdue it and without letting it get out of control, of going with the energy pattern of mind. This is meditation practice. Such practice is necessary generally because our thinking pattern, our conceptualized way of conducting our life in the world, is either too manipulative, imposing itself upon the world, or else runs completely wild and uncontrolled.

Therefore, our meditation practice must begin with ego’s outermost layer, the discursive thoughts which continually run through our minds, our mental gossip. The Lords use discursive thought as their first line of defense, as the pawns in their effort to deceive us.

The more we generate thoughts, the busier we are mentally and the more convinced we are of our exis-tence. So the Lords are constantly trying to activate these thoughts, trying to create a constant overlapping of thoughts so that nothing can be seen beyond them. In true meditation there is no ambition to stir up thoughts, nor is there an ambi-tion to suppress them. They are just allowed to occur spontaneously and become an expression of basic sanity. They become the expression of the precision and the clarity of the awakened state of mind (p. 10).

Spiritual Materialism

We have come here to learn about spirituality. I trust the genuine quality of this search but we must question its nature. The problem is that ego can convert anything to its own use, even spirituality. Ego is constantly attempting to acquire and apply the teachings of spirituality for its own benefit.

The teachings are treated as an external thing, external to “me,” a philosophy which we try to imitate. We do not actually want to identify with or become the teachings. So if our teacher speaks of renunciation of ego, we attempt to mimic renuncia-tion of ego. We go through the motions, make the appropriate gestures, but we really do not want to sacrifice any part of our way of life.

We become skillful actors, and while playing deaf and dumb to the real meaning of the teachings, we find some comfort in pretending to follow the path. Whenever we begin to feel any discrepancy or conflict be-tween our actions and the teachings, we immediately interpret the situation in such a way that the conflict is smoothed over.

The interpreter is ego in the role of spiritual advisor. The situation is like that of a country where church and state are separate. If the policy of the state is foreign to the teachings of the church, then the automatic reaction of the king is to go to the head of the church, his spiritual advisor. and ask his blessing.

The head of the church then works out some justification and gives the policy his blessing under the pretense that the king is the protector of the faith. In an individual’s mind, it works out very neatly that way, ego being both king and head of the church.

This rationalization of the spiritual path and one’s actions must he cut through if true spirituality is to be realized. How. ever, such rationalizing is not easy to deal with because every-thing is seen through the filter of ego’s philosophy and logic, making all appear neat, precise and very logical. We attempt to find a self-justifying answer for every question.

In order to reassure ourselves, we work to fit into our intellectual scheme every aspect of our lives which might be confusing. And our effort is so serious and solemn, so straight-forward and sin-cere, that it is difficult to be suspicious of it. We always trust the “integrity” of our spiritual advisor. It does not matter what we use to achieve self-justification: the wisdom of sacred books, diagrams or charts, mathematical calculations, esoteric formulae, fundamentalist religion, depth psychology, or any other mechanism.

Whenever we begin to evaluate, deciding that we should or should not do this or that, then we have already associated our practice or our knowledge with categories, one pitted against the other, and that is spiri-tual materialism, the false spirituality of our spiritual advisor. Whenever we have a dualistic notion such as, “I am doing this because I want to achieve a particular state of conscious-ness, a particular state of being,” then automatically we sepa-rate ourselves from the reality of what we are. If we ask ourselves, “What is wrong with evaluating, with taking sides?”, the answer is that, when we formulate a secondary judgment, “I should be doing this and should avoid doing that,” then we have achieved a level of complication which takes us a long Nay from the basic simplicity of what we are. The simplicity of meditation means just experiencing the ape instinct of ego.

“It is important to see that the main point of any spiritual practice is to step out of the bureaucracy of ego”.

If anything more than this is laid onto our psychology, then it becomes a very heavy, thick mask, a suit of armor. It is important to see that the main point of any spiritual practice is to step out of the bureaucracy of ego.

This means stepping out of ego’s constant desire for a higher, more spiri-tual, more transcendental version of knowledge, religion, vir-tue, judgment, comfort or whatever it is that the particular ego is seeking. One must step out of spiritual materialism. If we do not step out of spiritual materialism, if we in fact prac-tice it, then we may eventually find ourselves possessed of a huge collection of spiritual paths.

We may feel these spiritual collections to be very precious. We have studied so much. We may have studied Western philosophy or Oriental philosophy, practiced yoga or perhaps have studied under dozens of great masters. We have achieved and we have learned. We believe that we have accumulated a hoard of knowledge.

And yet, having gone through all this, there is still something to give up. It is extremely mysterious! How could this happen? Im-possible! But unfortunately it is so. Our vast collections of knowledge and experience are just part of ego’s display, part of the grandiose quality of ego. We display them to the world and, in so doing, reassure ourselves that we exist, safe and secure, as “spiritual” people.

There is a saying in the Tibetan scriptures: “Knowledge must be burned, hammered and beaten like pure gold. Then one can wear it as an ornament.” So when you receive spiritual instruction from the hands of another, you do not take it uncritically, but you burn it, you hammer it, you beat it, until the bright, dignified color of gold appears. Then you craft it into an ornament, whatever design you like, and you put it on. Therefore, dharma is applicable to every age, to every person; it has a living quality. It is not enough to imitate your master or guru; you are not trying to become a replica of your teacher. The teachings are an individual personal experience, right clown to the present holder of the doctrine.

One of the difficulties in surrendering to a guru is our preconceptions regarding him and our expectations of what will happen with him. We are preoccupied with ideas of what we would like to experience with our teacher: “I would like to see this; that would be the best way to see it; I would like to experience this particular situation, because it is in exact accordance with my expectation and fascination.”

So we try to fit things into pigeonholes, try to fit the situation to our expectations, and we cannot surrender any part of our anticipation to all. If we search for a guru or teacher, we expect him to be saintly, peaceful, quiet, a simple and yet wise man. When we find that he does not match our expectations, then we begin to be disappointed, we begin to doubt.

In order to establish a real teacher-student relationship it is necessary for us to give up all our preconceptions regarding that relationship and the condition of opening and surrender.

“Surrender” means opening oneself completely, trying to get beyond fascination and expectation. Surrender also means acknowledging the raw, rugged, clumsy and shocking qualities of one’s ego, acknowledging them and surrendering them as well. Generally, we find it very difficult to give out and surrender our raw and rugged qualities of ego. Although we may hate ourselves, at the same time we find our self-hatred a kind of occupation. In spite of the fact that we may dislike what we are and find that selfcondemnation painful, still we cannot give it up completely.

If we begin to give up our self-criticism, then we may feel that we are losing our occupation, as though someone were taking away our job. We would have no further occupation if we were to surrender everything; there would be nothing to hold on to. Self-evaluation and self-criticism are, basically, neurotic tendencies which derive from our not having enough confidence in ourselves, “confidence” in the sense of seeing what we are, knowing what we are, knowing that we can afford to open. We can afford to surrender that raw and rugged neurotic quality of self and step out of fascination, step out of preconceived ideas.

We must surrender our hopes and expectations, as well as our fears, and march directly into disappointment, work with disappointment, go into it and make it our way of life, which is a very hard thing to do. Disappointment is a good sign of basic intelligence. It cannot be compared to anything else: it is so sharp, precise, obvious and direct. If we can open, then we suddenly begin to see that our expectations are irrelevant compared with the reality of the situations we are facing. This automatically brings a Jeeling of disappointment. Disappointment is the best chariot to use on the path oJ the dharma. It does not confirm the existence of our ego and its dreams. However, if we are involved with spiritual materialism, if we regard spirituality as a part of our accumulation of learning and virtue, iJ spirituality becomes a way of building ourselves up, then of course the whole process of surrendering is completely distorted. If we regard spirituality as a way of making ourselves comfortable, then whenever we experience something unpleasant, a disappointment, we try to rationalize it: “Of course this must be an act of wisdom on the part of the guru (p. 23-25)

This was just a few pages from the beginning of the book. There is 220 more pages to read. You can download the whole book from PDFDRIVE.COM

Contents
Foreword Xl
Introduction 3
Spiritual Materialism I3
Surrendering 23
The Guru 3I
Initiation 53
Self-Deception 63
The HardWay 77
The Open Way 9I
Sense of Humor III
The Development of Ego I2I
The Six Realms 138
The Four Noble Truths I5I
The Bodhisattva Path 167
Shunyata 187
Prajna and Compassion 207
Tantra 2I7

Featured

One who knows the knowledge, and the ignorance, both at the same time; he crosses the death, through the ignorance, and attains immortality,through the knowledge.Veil of manifestation covers the Knowledge. We are deluded by the outer world through our sense-organs and mind. Ego creates separation through ignorance, and ignorance is food for the ego. Without ignorance the ego dissolves. Therefore, ignorance is the safety valve for its own survival. Tavistock Institute. Part 118

One who knows the knowledge, and the ignorance, both at the same time; he crosses the death, through the ignorance, and attains immortality,through the knowledge.Veil of manifestation covers the Knowledge. We are deluded by the outer world through our sense-organs and mind. Ego creates separation through ignorance, and ignorance is food for the ego. Without ignorance the ego dissolves. Therefore, ignorance is the safety valve for its own survival. Tavistock Institute. Part 118

Truth is the common property of all. No nation, sect, creed or person can hold an absolute claim over it. He who is sincere, he who aspires after lt, gets It. Without sincerity, without ardent work, nothing can be had.

Truth is like the centre of a circle and the different radii joining the centre are like the different paths and doctrines; and an aspirant selects his path as per his growth, taste and tendency. Though the paths are many, the aim, the goal and the final-re-aching point is the same. Broadly speaking, the mind has got four main faculties, viz., willing, feeling, thinking and the gathering (the tendency to concentrate) faculties.

All the methods adopted, all the paths followed to reach the Ultimate Goal, can be safely put under any one of these faculties. As per these four main faculties of the mind, all the religions of the world and all the religious paths followed, can be grouped under four main heads, viz., work, worship, philosophy and psychology.

In every individual there is the infinite power behind. But in the vast majority of the beings these powers are lying dormant. Many do not know their own capacities, capabilities and the hidden treasures. So long as this hidden power is unnoticed, so long as one does not get access to this pwer, there is no spiritual awakening. One cannot understand the real significance of Dharma (righteousness), and one can never enjoy real conentration of mind and bliss. This central bodily poser residing and working in the living body; is called by the name of Kundalini Shakti or the Primal Power

Sandilya Upanishad says as regards the Kundalmi Shakti thus – Having by contraction opened the door of Kundalini, one should force open the door of Moksha (Freedom) Closing with Her mouth the door through which one ought to go, the Kundalini sleeps.

Again Yoga Vasishta says on the same subject thus :—There is an organ with its mouth closed, situated inside the abdomen. It is presided over by Kundalini, which exists dormant within it. The organ has circular shape and is named Kundalini. It is the centre of the Supreme Power and is the source of all the forces of the living creatures. The Tantras and the Yoga-schools are replete with the workings of the Kundalini Shakti. They give a most prominent place to the raising up of the Kundalini Shakti to the Sahasrara (upper cerebrum). As per these schools of thought, there is no Divine-realization and there is no Freedom so long as the Kundalini Shakti remains in the lowest centre, Muladhara. Ta be blessed with success in Yoga means making the Kundalini Shakti enter Sushumna canal and the taking it to Sahasrara (upper cerebrum).

The purpose of these practices is not merely to acquire physical fitness andmental health, but primarily to awaken the body’s dormant psychospiritualpower called kundalini-shakti. When this power, which is a form of consciousenergy, is fully aroused it begins to transform the body. It leads to the ecstaticrealization of one’s true identity as the pure, universal consciousness (cit), and italso progressively renders the body transparent to that supreme consciousness.

This alchemical process of transmutation of the very constituents of the bodyis the domain of Layayoga. Laya refers to the absorption of the elements (tattva) constituting the body, which occurs when the kundalini power rises from the psychoenergetic center (cakra) at the base of the spine toward the center at thecrown of the head. In its ascent along the spinal axis, it must pierce a series of psychoenergetic centers, each of which relates to specific psychosomaticfunctions and also anatomical structures. As it passes through each center, the kundalini absorbs each center’s elements and correlated function.

This induces a deepening state of mental concentration and conscious lucidity, but at the sametime decreases physical animation. Thus the outside observer would notice adrastic decrease in metabolism and spontaneous suspension of breathing. In away, the ascent of the kundalini amounts to a consciously undergone deathprocess.If the yogin remains long enough in this state of suspended animation, thebody simply dies. But this is not the intended outcome of Tantra. Rather, thesuccessful practitioner of Tantrayoga must next skillfully guide the kundalini from the crown center back to its home at the base of the spine. This restores allthe bodily functions, yet brings a new element into play: the gradual suffusion ofthe body with consciousness. For the Tantric adept, enlightenment is nothingunless it includes the body. Thus the delicate process of Layayoga is designed tobring enlightenment down to earth, into the body—a quite literally breathtaking adventure.

Veil of manifestation covers the Knowledge. We are deluded by the outer world through our sense-organs and mind.

Our life is a journey to the Divine, from animal being to rational being and finally to the divine being. It is our own lost kingdom. Nobody has thrown us out of it; it is only our ego, our wrong identity with the body-mind interactions that has derailed us. This is subjected to death again and again. We have to leave this wrong identity till we answer the above questions through our life. We have to know that we are Truth, the Pure Existence. This physical death is nothing but the womb of Mother Nature to give us temporary rest for rebirth till we complete our evolution to the Divine.

We are made with the same principle God is. Our identification with the physical body makes us separate from God and this is the state of ignorance. We have to eradicate this ignorance by the action of God, i.e., the action of the breath, pranakarma. Our mind is the result of ignorance and is responsible for this wrong identification. Breath-practice, pranakarma, absorbs the mind into vital force. This action of God reverses the process and leads us from body to God. This is why it is so necessary to perform that action. That is our spiritual practice.

Though immortality is always with us due to our ego we are dying in each moment. Our process of development lies with the annihilation of our ego, and to remove the darkness caused by it. The real happiness will then descend. For that we need to win over the senses and the mind.

Yoga: I will try to give you a simple idea although real understanding will come only through long and uninterrupted practice. Yoga means “to join,” this is union with our own origin. In fact, we are never separated from our source but we have forgotten our true identity and identify ourselves with our physical body, our mind, our intellect and our ego. Speaking in broad terms, we can say that we are in our mind, citta, meaning that we are with the actions of our mind. This situation leads to duality/plurality and is the reason why we need to unite with our true Self. Then the state of unity with our true Self is the transcendental state.

Mind Deludes: In the present day world we have all become slaves to our mind. Whatever we do, we do simply due to the swaying of our emotions, influenced by our thoughts and desires or due to being attracted by gain and allurements. Things should not be like this. We have to be master of our mind.

Mankind is controlled by the Ego, Mass Consciousness and Public Opinion. These thoughts are not from God or is not our own.

Following Ego is Catastrophic and following them who feeding mass consciounsess will lead to enslavement of mankind.

To know the Self is the Route: There are no other routes, only one route to reach the Ultimate. That is to know Him, to know the Self. This is what has been said in Upanisads again and again.

Then this is the Knowledge. When “I” exists as a separate entity then this is the ignorance. Though ‘That” is always with “I” and though “I” proceeds from “That” but still then due to the ignorance “I” close its eyes and refuses to recognize “That.” When the third eye or the discriminating intellect develops then “I” recognize and merge with “That.”

When that divine Swan is known which the Fire is, mingled in the water body (or our individual body), one crosses the death, and becomes immortal. This physical body cannot become immortal. This is subjected to birth, growth, changes, decay, diseases and death. Only yogic practices, herbs and will power can prolong this. Then who will become immortal? This is we, ourselves, the Principle that we are. This is always immortal, only one has to know that. Then one is immortal, one with the Principle. Multiplicity is finished; it is the unity, the One and the Only One. This is the Knowledge, not the knowledge of the outer world, but the knowledge of the inner self.

This makes even clearer that one inner controller is everything, which is the Self. That is hamsa and That is the Knowledge. One has manifested into many. Once we know that Principle then the veil of ego falls down, the wrong identity ceases. Knowing Him is only the route for the eternal peace named liberation.

One who knows the knowledge, and the ignorance, both at the same time; he crosses the death, through the ignorance, and attains immortality,through the knowledge. Here the ignorance, means action that is. based on desires. Desires, actions and its results are under the purview of the ignorance. Once one attains the Knowledge, then actions do not become actions or the cause of bondage. Here again it is said that one has to cross the death through the ignorance. When we say action is avidyd, we have to remember that in the scriptures dealing with emancipation, there is no scope for forbidden actions; only those actions approved by scriptures are to be understood.

Then there is no separate existence. Elimination of separate existence of the individual self is elimination of the ignorance. Ego creates separation through ignorance, and ignorance is food for the ego. Without ignornace the ego dissolves, so the ego don´t want remove ignorance and therefore don´t feed mankind with real enlighten knowledge because the ego will cease through enlightment. So everything in this Earthly lifestyle is designed to prevent people from becoming fully enlighten, and to keep them away from the route to the divine.

Then people for thosuends of years wrongly has identifying themselves with the body-identity, they also believe in the concept of fear of death. The concept of fear of death is a design of the ego to prevent mankind from dissolving the ego and find their True Higher Self beyond the veil of the ego-fears.

Once you have this knowledge, you become Divine. a knower of God. This Self is the Divine God”. ‘That is Truth, which is the Self”. This is the final knowledge. Acquiring this knowledge, you are one with all. You are established in the Truth, Knowledge and Infinity. You are Christ or Buddha, the vastness. With your identification with the body-mind interactions and identification with names and forms, you are just a small entity separated from your own source. But still then you are a particle of the Consciousness embedded within the whirlpool of the ignorance, subjected to its actions and results, enjoying the results of actions, going up and down, and feeling sorrow and happiness. These all phenomena vanish when you have that Supreme Knowledge.

tavistock 118

When we remain absolutely still we experience the exquisiteness of the breath as transformer of the subtle body as the Kundalini is activated. The wakening of the Kundalini is not simply the arousal of a dormant force within us, as Gopi Krishna explains: The arousal of kundalini, in its true sense, does not simply imply the ac-tivity of a hitherto sleeping force, but actually the start of a new activity by changing the whole system to adapt it to a new pattern of conscious-ness through changing the composition of the bioenergy or subtle life force permeating the whole body.

When Kundalini awakens. She spiritualizes the body and mind as if the divine influence of God has descended on the physical plane. Such influence varies in intensity with different persons and in particular individuals too its flow of intensity fluctuates from time to time.

As a minute spark of fire may burn heaps of straw in no time and the ensuing big conflagration is not different from the original spark, so the divine spark of the awakened Kundalini is the Lord Himself. When the whole heap of straw has been consumed, the fire extinguishes into voidness. Burning of straw is but the manifestation of heat lying involved in it through the involutionary process. All the fire that appeared from combustion was simply lying hidden in the form of straws, as if the fire itself had assumed the form of straws. Ignition once started soon uncoils the whole amount of heat stored up there and sends the whole heap into flames. Similarly when a master throws sparks of divine fire, it ignites and sets the involved Kundalini to flames, which soon takes up the form of a big fire—the Lord on the physical plane. A Yogi calls Him the self of his self, but when all straws have been burnt, like the extinguished fire, the Kundalini power also merges into the Absolute. One has simply to raise one’s self to the ignition point. All other preparations in the form of piety, virtuous deeds, devotion to God, and prayers or other methods of invoking God, improve our combustibility in that respect that the slightest touch or contact with spiritual persons may light in us the divine fire instantaneously.

When Kundalini lies in dormant condition, spiritual consciousness remains clouded with the physical forces and Atman appears in bondage, but when She is aroused shining with the dawn of spiritual consciousness, she assumes the role of Guru.

And the seventh angel sounded; and there were great voices in the sky (activation of the Seventh Sense Power), saying, The Kingdoms of this world are become the kingdoms are of lord (Real Man); and he shall reign for ever and ever (Rev. 11:15).

This is the Super-conscious Department of Mind, so potent that no one is able to measure it, with a vibratory rate beyond the rate of vibration capable of being registered by any mechanical instrument so far produced by science, and which psychologists say never forgets, and even contains all the wisdom of past ages.

“There should be Time no longer” means that in the Sevenfold Hind Power man rises above the illusion of Time (Rev. 10:6).

And the seventh angel poured out his vial into the air; and there came a great voice from the temple, from the throne (brain), saying “He is born.” (Rev. 16:17).

This is the birth of the Redeemed Man, with the Sevenfold Mind Power. This is the Resurrection of the World Within, the Kingdom of Heaven within; the Resurrection of the god (Pineal Gland).

At this point, the church fathers also falsified their translation, making it read “It is done” (Rev. 16:17). They changed “He” to “it,” and “born” to “done.” “He is born” becomes “It is done”

Revelation in this Forbidden Field was carefully guarded. What little the Masters wrote about it was always so heavily veiled in symbol and fable that only the most advanced Occultists could decode it.

Neither should we relate the secrets of this Forbidden Field in any but the most general terms. Only a few can comprehend what we say, and fever still can be constrained to believe it.

Science knows not that the Pineal is the organ of the Seventh Sense. It is the organ of memory, of expectation and anticipation. It is the organ that never forgets and even contains all the wisdom of past ages.

Man would know nothing of past or future without the function of the Pineal. Many have poor memory, some have little, others almost none, because the Pineal is dormant, semi-dormant, sluggish.

It seems that the conscious phase of mind depends on the Pituitary and Pineal glands. The weaker their function, the weaker the conscious phase of mind. By increased action of these glands, man’s knowledge of himself, of his environment, and of the universe is increased.

Some increase in the action of these glands may be produced by concentration of thought. Also, brain power to perceive situations is thus improved.

Kundalini is also known, is a catalyst which leads to enlightenment and transcendental consciousness

Kundalini awakening and the subsequent changes in the physical and mental bodies is not a psychosomatic or unnatural event. Instead Kundalini awakening is a very scientific and biological event in the body. Today research done in the mind and consciousness seem to be coming closer to this understanding. They can see that there are marked physical differences in those men and women who have consistently practiced meditation.

After the crown has fully opened, the feminine and masculine energies of the body can move permanently into wholeness. Once this has occurred, the now undifferentiated force can flow back downward, opening the spiritual heart and completing the process of enlightenment. Some choose to postpone achieving full enliqhtenment in „ order to be of service to their fellow humans, to be a catalyst, or assistant for the evolution of humankind.

The fear of death dissolves. A drastic reorganization process occurs in which we no longer focus on the sort of commotion and projections emerging out of trauma and blind emotive reaction, nor identify with the human form as the dominant force and concern in our existence.

The key points for understanding kundalini from a Thomist perspective are the nature of the human soul as a spiritual being in potency which needs to be united to the material universe in the body in order to activate itself, and how the human soul contains and animates these lower levels of material being. What is kundalini? It is a fundamental energy of the soul that activates all the levels of the soul, from lowest to highest, fitting it for enlightenment

If kundalini is such a fundamental, energy why don’t more people experience it?

We have to distinguish between this energy in a general sense which all of us have and which is operative in our development, from kundalini in a dramatic and manifest form which is limited to a few people. This fundamental process moving us toward enlightenment can take place even if we are not consciously aware of it, but kundalini in its manifest form gives us an invaluable picture of what is at stake.

When the Kundalini reaches the Sahasrara, it means the person is on the first step towards what Krishna calls moksha and Buddha calls nirvana or liberation Depending on the person, it may take lives for awakening the Kundalini, and it may take many lives again for the Kundalini to reach the Sahasrar, and again, many lives to attain liberation.

You can remain locked up and limited in the conscious ego’s physical motivation and walls of protection or you can free yourself and go beyond time.

The Kundalini Deep inside the body lies a treasure, Of which humanity is ignorant, Only a few have discovered it, The perfume of which is fragrant. Vast is this treasure, Beyond timeless measure, Available to but only, The saintly and the austere. It hath no directions, no map for it,

To fall into the hands of the unholy and the impure. This treasure in its grace reveals itself, To the holy one who dives deep within himself.

The Kundalini Book of Living and Dying is such a significant work; it explains the nature of kundalini, why it is important, and how any person can bring its benefits into his or her life. In the process of enlightening our-selves, we contribute mightily to the enlightenment of the soul of global humanity.

Our ability to evolve as human beings and as souls, our ability to unite with God, our ability to leave behind forever hate, war, and ter-rorism will be facilitated—even determined—by kundalini.

This energy of enlightenment resides within each and every one of us, often dormant until we make the choice to seek unity with God. In our ensuing spiritual study and practice, we awaken the sleeping power within, and we are profoundly changed—physically, mentally, and spiritually. The hallmarks of kundalini are phenomena such as surges of electricity in the body, detachment from the body, intense heat and fire, buzzing sounds, a feeling of being in the presence of God, and awareness of spiritual presences such as angels.

More important, however, are the benefits that lie beyond the phenomena: creativity, genius, enhanced well-being, longevity, and, most significant of all, enlightenment. Experiences of kundalini have been recorded around the world since ancient times. Kundalini is the divine fire of God and the gods, the samadhi of adepts, the raptures of saints, the healing power that floods through the hands of healers, the inspiration of invention, the intense happiness of a peak experience.

The average person may think that kundalini belongs only to those whose spiritual practice elevates them into a ratified atmos-phere of consciousness, but this is not so. Kundalini is universal, available to all. Anyone who prays or meditates regularly is likely at some point to feel the power of kundalini.

By means of this sacrifice, this individual incarnates the Christ, thereby embodying the supreme source of wisdom and compassion. This is the entrance to the Direct Path to complete liberation from the ego, a route that only very few take, due to the fact that one must pay the entirety of one’s karma in one life.

Featured

The Ego’s Cooperation With or Obstruction of the Real Self. As we make our way along our path of self-realization, these words can act like a spiritual bulldozer for the barriers we encounter in our psyche. For at some point, we will come to a crossroads. What we are now facing is a very old inner landscape that is littered with our fears: fear of death, fear of life, fear of pleasure, fear of feelings, fear of giving up control, fear of being real, and the like. Tavistock Institute. Part 117

The Ego’s Cooperation With or Obstruction of the Real Self. As we make our way along our path of self-realization, these words can act like a spiritual bulldozer for the barriers we encounter in our psyche. For at some point, we will come to a crossroads. What we are now facing is a very old inner landscape that is littered with our fears: fear of death, fear of life, fear of pleasure, fear of feelings, fear of giving up control, fear of being real, and the like. Tavistock Institute. Part 117

The Ego’s Cooperation With or Obstruction of the Real Self. As we make our way along our path of self-realization, these words can act like a spiritual bulldozer for the barriers we encounter in our psyche. For at some point, we will come to a crossroads. What we are now facing is a very old inner landscape that is littered with our fears: fear of death, fear of life, fear of pleasure, fear of feelings, fear of giving up control, fear of being real, and the like.

As we make our way along our path of self-realization, these words can act like a spiritual bulldozer for the barriers we encounter in our psyche. For at some point, we will come to a crossroads. What we are now facing is a very old inner landscape that is littered with our fears: fear of death, fear of life, fear of pleasure, fear of feelings, fear of giving up control, fear of being real, and the like. It’s already taken some genuine fortitude to come this far and see that this is what we’ve been covering up.

Such fears have been hiding all along in the darkness of our psyche. To our surprise and dismay, this is where we’re at. And now that we’re more aware of our many fears, we automatically start to feel the effect they are having on our life: What they make us do and how they make us pull back from life.

No wonder we have this vague feeling we’re missing out on life. We are. We literally fear the creative process of living and therefore we miss out on it. It’s time we find the common denominator behind all our fears so we can start unwinding the unnecessary cycles of fear, frustration and pain. If we have embarked on a path of self-discovery but haven’t yet found our fears, don’t worry, it will happen. It must.

Then, when we see how we’ve been hiding from life because of our fears, these words can be applied retroactively to smooth the way. Let them plant a seed now that will bear fruit when the whole of your being is ready to see and resolve the problems in your life. And make no mistake, coping with our (ears is the main problem we all face in life.

The nature of all our fears is that we misunderstand the function of our ego and how It relates to our Real Self. The problem we face In sorting out this relationship Is that It’s extremely subtle and therefore hard to put into words. What’s more, as with all truths in life, it’s chock full of apparent contradictions. That is, at least as long as we are steeped in duality.

Once we get over the hump of thinking and living in a dualistic way, then two opposites can become equally true. And as we’ll see, this applies to the ego and Its relationship to the Real self. For example, it’s true to say that the ego’s exaggerated strength is the biggest hurdle to living a productive life. It’s also true to say that a weak ego can’t possibly create a healthy life.

These are not opposites, people. They are both true. Before going on, It’s important we stress that humanity’s plight of being unhappy is primarily due to our Ignorance about our Real Self. Knowing it exists, as many of the more enlightened people do, is not the same as experiencing it—as living from there. If we had been educated to realize that the goal in life is to reach the place deep within—that this is infinitely better than the ego—we might explore and experiment and seek communication with our core. And voila, we would reach our Real self.

But alas, this Is not the case. Instead, we go through life becoming more and more limited in our understandings and our goals. We ignore the idea that there is more to us than our ego. And even when we do manage to acknowledge that such a thing exists, we forget during ninety-five percent of our daily lives that this being lives and moves In us, and we live and move In It. we completely forget It exists! In our ignorance, we fail to reach out for its wisdom. instead, we stake our whole lives on our limited outer ego, never opening to the truths and feelings of our deeper selves.

We blithely go about living as though there’s nothing but the conscious mind of our ego-self, with its pushy self-will and immediately available thoughts. With such an attitude, we unwittingly shortchange ourselves by a lot.

In this land of cause and effect, there are several consequences for our forgetfulness. First, there’s a question of identification.

When we only identify with our ego—or outer conscious personality—we become off-balance and our lives lack meaning. Since our ego can’t come anywhere near the resourcefulness of our Real Self, it’s inevitable that we will feel frightened and insecure. And that describes the majority of human beings.

Fear of Death

Let’s come back to those fears we mentioned. As we said, they come Into being when we remain ignorant, living with false ideas and staying separated from our Real Self. Lees look more closely at the fear of death. since this casts such a pall over everyone’s life. If were mostly identified with our ego, our fear of death makes sense.

After all, the ego does indeed die. If we haven’t yet experienced the truth of our Inner being, Just making this statement might strike a chord of fear in us. It’s frightening for the very reason that so many people’s sense of self stops at the edge of their ego. Yet, for anyone who has activated their Real Self and made it a daily reality, they are no longer afraid of death. such a person feels and knows their immortal nature. we become filled with a reality that can only be one long continuum.

That is, after all, the inherent nature of the Real Self. The limited logic of the ego is not able to explain or even comprehend this. what happens when we give the ego an undue Importance In our sense of being alive? it gets scared and sets up a vicious circle. For if we can’t conceive of a reality beyond our limited ego, hearing that our ego-faculties might end will frighten us.

It’s only when we’ve experienced the stark reality of the Real Self that we realize how insufficient the ego is. Then we’ll know perfectly well that the ego is Inferior and fleeting, and we’ll be Ane with that.

Fear of death, then, must only exist when our sense of self is attached exclusively to our ego-self. At this stage we may not yet be able to experience the truth of our Real Self. And while intellectual understanding is a good start. Just knowing of Its existence won’t do a thing to alleviate our fear. we must go further if we hope to do away with our fear of death. We will need to actualize the Real Self, and this requires passing through certain stages of personal self-development.

If we’ve attached our sense of identity to our ego, fear of life is justified. For the capacity of the ego to cope with life is dismal. In fact, the ego is downright insufficient in the area of living a productive life, leaving us feeling uncertain, insecure and highly inadequate. The Real Self, on the other hand, always has answers. This universal self is a solution-making machine, no matter the problem we’re faced with.

Any old experience then, regardless of how futile it may seem at first, can become a meaningful stepping stone that leads to expansion.

The Real Self builds on our inherent potentials, making us feel more alive, deeply fulfilled and steadily stronger. These are things that no one can say about the ego.

The ego gets easily tripped up in apparently unsolvable problems and conflicts. It’s totally adapted to the level of duality, where everything is this versus that, right versus wrong, black versus white, good versus bad. And this is a really bad way to approach most of life’s troubles.

Apart from the fact that truth cannot be found by looking at one side as black and the other as white, it leaves out a lot of other considerations.

The ego is stuck at the level of duality and can go no further, so it’s not capable of bringing into harmony the truth that lives on both ends of any opposite.

As such, the ego is horrible at finding solutions, making it feel perpetually trapped and anxious. All in all, identifying only with the ego will automatically create a pile of fear in our wake.

These teachings are rich and powerful. it’s worth taking the time to study them deeply, sentence by sentence, and meditate on them. We should consider how to make use of this material, not just by understanding it theoretically, but by also seeking out that part of ourselves that is eternal. To know this wonderful, truly adequate part of ourselves is our birthright.

And given how valuable such connection is, it makes sense that it won’t come easy or cheap. The price we must pay comes in the form of making the effort to overcome our resistance and laziness, and giving up our artificial means of escape.

The other thing we must do is explore the conditions that make it possible to connect with our Real Self. In short, our ego must become compatible with our Real Self.

We’ll need to have the courage to find our own truth, for the Real Self is not beholden to outer laws of morality. We must find our own inner compass rather than simply give our allegiance to public opinion, society or an outer authority.

The ego then is not being asked to submit, for submission happens from a cowardly place of fear and greed. And we’re also not condemning outer morality. We are only saying that outer morality is not the driver for true inner morality. The Real Self holds exacting standards of real morality that are of a far deeper nature.

How Unconscious Negativity Stops the Ego from Surrendering

We have been looking at the relationship between our ego-consciousness and universal intelligence. when we are primarily functioning from our ego, we are going to be out of balance and mired in problems. We can also turn this around and state that if we have inner problems, we will inevitably be unbalanced and enmeshed in outer conflicts. No matter which direction we come at this from, it always adds up the same:

The ego has to learn to let go of itself. A boatload of intellectual knowledge about the role the limited ego plays relative to the Real Self won’t help us much. We must find a new approach inside ourselves that makes it possible to let go In a healthy, harmonious way. Let’s shed some new light on this important topic.

When the ego operates in a vacuum, without replenishing itself at the inner source where our life force flows freely, it dries up, starves and withers. Literally, if left to handle the business of living without the benefit of support from the Real Self, the ego dies off.

This shines a new light on the process of death, looking at it from this point of view. This source of life is the universal self that dwells at the heart of every soul. When we incarnate, our spiritual being condenses into the coarse matter that this material world is made up of.

Such a condensation into matter happens because a separated part of the overall consciousness—the part we call the ego—is disconnected from the whole, from the universal self. This disconnectedness causes the ego state, which in turn results in this material life. And that is how we come to this experience of the cycles of life and death. if any of us overcomes separation, we are released from the process of dying.

When we no longer fear letting go of ourselves—from our ego—a reconnection with the universal forces becomes possible. This is not something to hope for in the hereafter. It can take place at any time, in any place, since it’s a question of our state of consciousness.

God or the Universal Self wants to express its highest potential through the human body. The main qualities of the Self are love, happiness, stillness, courage, praise, creativity, etc.; and the highest form of expression occurs through the bodies that are ready. Those that are not, are under the influence of wrong tendencies and they express the ego.

The biggest hurdle between the Self and the body is the ego. In spiritual terms, ‘ego’ means the sense of a separate identity; the sense of apparent separateness from the rest of Creation as well as the Creator. Due to presence of this primary ego, man remains deprived of the highest knowledge and expression. For the devotee, it is important that he express the qualities of the Self and not of the ego (the false ‘I’).

The devotee has to win over the ego with love and not by fighting it. This is possible only if he gives the highest priority to devotion. First of all, he will have to quiet the ego with love. It is not so easy to quiet the ego because it says, “Why am I being told to be quiet? I am important!” But when the mind realizes the pure intention and love behind this, it becomes ready to surrender the ego.

The Archons control the Matrix, and the Archons using all forms of emotion-thought based fear concepts to keep mankind enslaved and imprisoned within the Matrix, and fear of death is the strongest of them.

The Bible, God’s instruction book for humanity, tells us that all `through fear of death have been living all their lives as slaves to constant dread’ [Hebrews 2:15;]. It says every human being is a slave to the fear of death. We live in a constant dread of it.

Fear of Death and Immortality

“The Fulcrum of human fear psychology—the epicenter—is the fear of death. You have fear of death because it is an unknown process. The ego fears its discontinuity, its non-existence. The ego cannot fully accept the idea of immortality for it really does not exist outside of this illusionary reality.

The ego knows it for sure and fears death, the death of this human body, yet this fear acts as the food for its own survival till death. Eradicating the fear of death involves mastery over ‘death in every moment: A thought arises and dies out.

The ego learns to capture your attention by jumping from thought to thought, in a sea of emotions and by jumping between past and future times. Death is like a game where every thought becomes a winning point. One more thought survived.

The ego pulls out more and more of them from the subconscious, reacts to each stimulus from the external environment, pushes you to ‘work’ hard for the survival of this mind-body system and everything that is impermanent. All the fears created by the ego are illusionary. Actually it only fears the Witness, the present moment, Enlightenment and the concept of immortality!

Once you become aligned WITH any of these ideas, slowly the ego los-es its battle. The ego is deprived of its usual weapons of time, illusions, fears and death. In the death of the ego or rather the transformation of this illusionary ‘monkey ego’ to the permanent Divine Self, you over-come the basis of all fears—the fear of death, the fear of the unknown, the fear of God, the fear of Truth and the fear of fear itself!

We don’t need any symbols along our path, even if we may have used many up until now. This is because if we use symbols, we are handing over our own power to them. Often, our world is full of symbols that we consciously or unconsciously “worship.” At first we may have “worshipped” material things in the external world. We made cars, houses, people, or money our symbols and false gods.

Then we turned away from the material path and started to look inside ourselves for answers. In doing so we often exchanged material goods for intangible ones. Perhaps we worshiped sacred symbols in this way. But even such symbols are nothing more than effigies to which we hand over our power. Our ego-based mind will tell us that by ourselves, we cannot make it hack to our Buddha-nature, that we are weak and need help. But after we have made a certain amount of progress in our practice. we need neither Buddha statues, nor saints, nor alters, nor incense, nor teachers or masters. nor other effigies or symbols for our path. Even if we believe that we arc not using any symbols, our ego-based mind is still trying to cling to such old ideas.

In this way it will even cling to the concepts of emptiness and no-mind. It is only we who project traits onto symbols. Let us therefore take back our own power, let us be strong without symbols. they only needlessly prolong the path. In truth, we have all the power in us which we need for the path. We need only ourselves, our connection with the emptiness. and our own willingness to work on ourselves and deal with our deep-rooted old ideas.

Life and death We will come quite close to our Buddha-nature, but will not be able to move forward if we have not dealt profoundly, at least once, with the subject of death and dying. This concept is the very foundation on which the ego-based mind rests. If we can get to the heart of it, we will no longer fear death. I low can we overcome our fear of death?

Actually. the question is: why do we still cling to the illusion that we must die? In Zen, it is said that one must surrender oneself in order to be able to experience liberation. Erroneously. this state in Zen is traditionally called The Great Death-. The ego-based mind naturally grasps at this illusion.

Life and death are real for us so long as we cling to our ego.

Who taught us the concept of life and death?

It’s been explained to us that the price of life is death. But that’s not true. Neither life nor death exists. Let us remember what we have experienced during zazen. Have we not transcended our thoughts, feelings and bodies?

We have released everything that the ego was clinging to and overcame the ego in meditation. It has thus already died once. And nonetheless we returned from the state of no-mind back into our bodies. What have we felt outside our body and apart from our thoughts and feelings? We were already there beyond life and death, even though we were perhaps unaware of this. Neither life nor death exists, just being. In meditation, we ultimately simply were. We have felt the infinity and immortality of the emptiness.

How can we persist in clinging to the concept of We and death? There is only being, nothing else. When our learning in this world is finished, we will lay down our bodies and continue to exist We are not our bodies, nor our emotions, thoughts, or ego. We are spiritual beings who arc immortal. The concept of life and death can therefore exist only if we are under the delusion that we are our bodies.

“The concept of life and death can therefore exist only if we are under the delusion that we are our bodies.”

Its the ego who creates or feeds the concept of fear of death and its the same ego who want´s everyone to identify themselves with their body-identity

Your fear of death will be replaced with the joy of life. Awareness of your glorious perfection will undo the false concepts of egotism and pride.

Death is an illusionary concept and can only appear real in the illusionary dualistic world of separation.

The old age that is passing away is not just a period of time. It is a personality. At the foundation of this age lies a malevolent mind. In its essence, the age is personal and evil (Gal. 1:4). It is the diabolical mind of Satan, and it blankets humanity like a fog. It is a philosophical stupor that is continually projected into the thinking of men. It is a mental anesthetic by which humanity blithely conforms to the will of Satan. It creates within all people the fear of death. In the matter of Job, Satan revealed the essence of his mental venom: “Skin for skin! Yes, all that a man has he will give for his life” (Job 2:4 NASU). In Hebrews 2:14-15 we are told that the devil holds men in slavery all their lives by the fear of death. This is therefore the fundamental means by which Satan has become the God of this world. Satan is the God and king of every man controlled by fear. And of course fear is also the foundation of greed and man’s quest for power. In the new age there is no need for greed or for power as God is sovereign and his blessings enable supernatural provision for every need (Phil. 4:19).

Death … transition, form, time. survival, fear, loss. change

In the illusionary dream world of separation, an eternal life is impossible because we identify who we are with a temporary form . our body. In an illusionary world of duality the mind created everything as separate. impermanent. decaying. constantly changing. and continuously dying. When we believe we are a physical body. ego identity. or soul personality. death is a constant threat.

The constant threat of death is what makes the separation so frightening and surviving this inevitable outcome so all pervasive. When we believe that we can die. we put our faith in what will inevitably bring us hopelessness and fear … we do not live at all. When death is our enemy, we live out all our days protecting ourselves from the threat of the many forms of loss.

We are constantly protecting ourselves from the threat of death . we exist in a state of survival and fear. When we spend our days surviving the threat of death we are not fully alive. It is impossible to be fully present and fully alive and simultaneously fearful of death … the fear of death is only possible w hen the mind entersjudgment the past, and the future. All fear dissolves when we become fully present, absolutely neutral, and aware of the infinite beauty of the now moment.

To believe in death is to believe in a reality that is impermanent, that has a beginning and an end. that is fleeting, limited. that can be destroyed and threatened. Death is just a made up belief in limitation, impermanence. structure, and form.

Death is just a box the mind chooses to believe, yet has nothing to do with Truth or Reality.

The limited box we call death. is a prison that robs the mind of the choice to live a life of unlimited joy. eternal love, and permanent freedom. Death is an illusionary concept and can only appear real in the illusionary dualistic world of separation.

Death is a made up concept within the separation that tells us that something can end, die, be threatened, or lost … that life is limited to what the five senses can perceive, and if we cannot perceive it with the five senses it is not real or it is gone. In Reality you never die … who you truly are is eternally alive, who you are is Life itself. Even within the illusion your awareness continues after physical death and you live. love. experience. grow. and evolve in the illusionary etheric realm just as you did when you dwelled in the physical realm.

The concept of fear of death keeps the ego alive and at same time keeps Your real Divine Higher Self asleep.

In Christianity, the concept of the immortal soul allows for the survival of individual identity even after death. … contrary, the total loss of individuality that eliminates the fear of death.

Self-expression involves the concept of ego-preservation. In its broadest sense it includes the individual’s endeavor to seek means of gratification, self-preservation, and ways of overcoming fear, including the fear of death. Individual, yet gregarious, man has a continuing need to readapt his person, his society, and his culture to changes in nature, in society, and in self so as to achieve equilibrium sufficient to maintain life. This continuing and necessary readaptation, however, demands a fundamental conformity, a denial of self, a sacrifice through selflessness.

If you understand that love is life’s reality, and that grace is all pervasive, you will also realise that your reality is love, and that freedomexists when you are united with the giver of grace — Divine Will. The development of the ego has manufactured a defensive world, full of anxiety, compulsion, insecurity, projection, and all those neuroses that psychologists enjoy theorising about. As you seek love by practising it, these masks can be released. With them go previous definitions of pleasure. Instead of attachment to this or that, you begin to find love in more and more of the human and natural world. You begin to appreciate creation in all its forms. The practice of love creates the conditions for surrender to Truth; it frees the body’s energy, allows it to become a chalice for omnipresent love, and provides liberation to bliss. The practice of conscious surrender supports that process. It proposes:

⦁ God, not self, is the doer.
⦁ Acts are done for God, not self.
⦁ The results of actions are God’s, not self s.

The life fear and the death fear : The problem of separation is expressed specifically in the concepts of “ life fear ” and “ death fear

Who is creating and feeding all these concepts; fear of loss, fear of death, feeding body-identity, and feeding separation concepts – the answer is the EGO, EGO, EGO, EGO.

The more you are identified with ego, the greater you will fear death.

“There’s only one thing I can think of that’s worse than death: that’s living with the fear of it.”

The human ego is afraid for silence, and one the weapons the ego is using is to create a constant chattering voice or constant sounds of interference. Therefore the goal with yoga and meditation is to shut off the ego-shattering voice

It is true that on the threshold of silence we often experience fear. It is the ego that is afraid. In the panoramic attention that you devote to choiceless awareness, the ego is not allowed to occupy center stage, where it thinks it belongs, and it begins to wonder what it will be like in silence, where it won’t be present at all. This fear resembles the fear of death, because entering into silence is a temporary death for the ego. The great silence would be its permanent death. Naturally it is afraid.

Featured

It (the physical body) is necessary as a vehicle to house us while on the physical plane, but is no longer needed on our spiritual ascent. We have now lost about 29% of gross matter, When rising above the physical body consciousness, we will see that the light of our consciousness increases from about 1% to an amazing 3o%, By spreading the ever-increasing vibrations of peace, and love, our light grows in its intensity, and we begin to light our way with greater clarity of vision. We are accelerating our travel greatly with the shedding of additional matter with the result that our consciousness expands by as much as 50%. Tavistock Institute. Part 116

It (the physical body) is necessary as a vehicle to house us while on the physical plane, but is no longer needed on our spiritual ascent. We have now lost about 29% of gross matter, When rising above the physical body consciousness, we will see that the light of our consciousness increases from about 1% to an amazing 3o%, By spreading the ever-increasing vibrations of peace, and love, our light grows in its intensity, and we begin to light our way with greater clarity of vision. We are accelerating our travel greatly with the shedding of additional matter with the result that our consciousness expands by as much as 50%. Tavistock Institute. Part 116

It (the physical body) is necessary as a vehicle to house us while on the physical plane, but is no longer needed on our spiritual ascent. We have now lost about 29% of gross matter that acted like a sheet anchor to weight and hold us down against our will. Being lighter we (the soul) is somewhat freer to travel and take further ascent. When rising above the physical body consciousness, we will see that the light of our consciousness increases from about i% to an amazing 3o%.

This is just the beginning of spiritual freedom. Just as we left behind the physical body, with ever growing and intensified focused attention we now jettison the astral body in very similar fashion as we did the physical. When losing the Astral body, we lose an additional 3o% of astral or emotional matter.

When losing these emotional frequencies, we grow increasingly steady and focused in our resolve to continue our journey. Developing love for God-the-Beloved by any means will only expedite the steadiness of our navigation. Being social as well as physical beings by nature, this all-important love first develops in the flesh. With effort and grace we/it culminates in the celestial spirit, or soul.

By spreading the ever-increasing vibrations of peace, and love, our light grows in its intensity, and we begin to light our way with greater clarity of vision. We are accelerating our travel greatly with the shedding of additional matter with the result that our consciousness expands by as much as 50%.

As mentioned earlier in the book this is very critical because a i% shift either way decides in general whether the mind or mental frequencies dominate our consciousness (us) or we (spirit) dominate the mind. This is why up until this point the mind, by nature, has control of us. Unless we find a way to befriend it, we are a slave to it, with no conscious control.

At the same time we will understand that it is actually the greater light that simultaneously guides and shines our path ahead for us. This same light becomes even greater when entering the causal or mental frequencies. The light is not growing brighter – it is already as bright as it is going to be. We are invincible children of divine light.

We (our souls) shine with the light intensity of 16 outer suns, but it is the veil of several frequencies or energies of thought, emotion, and physical essences that dim our light, and send us into states of unconsciousness. We may be alive to this world but we are dead (unconscious) to the worlds within. They alone are conscious of this process who practice meditation on the light and sound vibrations, or have developed a desire through love and zeal for the power of love that guides them.

In our inner journey of ascent we are now ready to jettison our mental frequencies or causal body. This is a huge step on the way because we are leaving behind our thinking faculty. It is here that fear for some can be the greatest because the mind likens this experience to a death.

The mind is no different than any creature that will do whatever it takes to survive, even if it means not allowing us to continue forward on our spiritual journey. Illusions of the mind are greatest here and come up simply to distract and keep us in the domain of mind.

Something truly amazing happens next as we prepare to enter the forth region of ascent, leaving behind the third mental or causal body, and that is that our soul or consciousness becomes dominant for the first time! It sees or experiences itself as it truly is. We are now up to 90% consciousness, with only a very thin veil of 10% matter covering us.

We see with awesome clarity at this phase. We are so close to the completion, or conclusion of our spiritual journey, but in a sense we are still so far away. There is still one great veil of darkness we must break through.

We must still rise above the subtle veil of ego. When souls are born, the ego essence body is the first energy received; in our ascent it is the last to be discarded. To do so without a teacher is virtually impossible. In addition it is the power of love alone that enables one to pierce through this veil. This is where surrendering the ego and replacing it with humility is very important.

The precious soul is actually surrendering itself to the will of its higher power or the universal force, known by many as God. It is in part the golden preparation for our acceptance and return home.

The ego is so subtle that it cannot see or experience anything outside of itself, so consumed as it were by its own fires. So deluding is the mind that it believes itself to be an entity unto itself sustained by its own light. It has lived and associated itself for so many ages with its own energy that it forgot its light comes from God.

The mind lives a dual existence of opposites versus one of unity. This explains its perception of death instead of living a greater life within the ocean of all consciousness. We (soul) realize ourselves now for the first time as the same essence as our creator. This is the realization that I am thou, or as Jesus said, I and my Father are one.

This realization must be had in order for us to pierce the veil of ego and return to our true home, the ocean of all consciousness. In the New Golden Age we will experience this unity as uniting common threads of love, even with our enemies, even in evil, and even in the negative power.

We must see this unifying essence of love in all of creation if we are to rise above discord and chaos and live in true harmony and peace amongst ourselves. When we finally do leave off the energy of ego, there is no matter left. We can then experience merger of our true essence with that of our creator. Our soul, or consciousness, actually merges and becomes one with the ocean of all that is conscious. with all that is light, love and life.

Transformation is simply the transformation of our frequencies of ego, and selfishness, into higher, less dense vibrations of selflessness and humility. This is the main event of the New Golden Age of Love. This transformational event will be experienced by a surge, not only in quantity, but in the quality of love that we convey to one another.

In the New Golden Age we experience an increase of people taking responsibility for and being held accountable for their thoughts, words, and actions. Because we are holding ourselves accountable, and holding ourselves responsible for our ineffective behaviors, it is leading to an expression of more humility and love among us. With the onset of this event, a transformation takes place and we begin to exhibit more self- love. This is a sure sign that we have arrived in the New Golden Age of Love.

Those that make the choice to enter this land of golden love will have to do so with hard work. The transformation of frequencies of ego and anger into less course frequencies of love is not an easy one/those who choose this work will only help in speeding up the process of I – Transformation through a spiritual osmosis encouraging others to do likewise. This is the process of slowly bringing along the masses into our new era of golden consciousness.

In this dark age of Kal (the negative power) we have forgotten who and what we are. We have forgotten our original home, the almighty force, the ocean of all consciousness, from whence we came. One of the key paradigms for this new era of quickening consciousness will be the mass realization that who and what we are are not the same. Every human being within, is complete, equal, and whole unto himself. In truth, this is the essence of unity and harmony. We realize we are not different, that spiritually we are all the same. We are all perfectly imperfect. Personal transformation helps us realize this truth.

If it is practiced along with meditation, and implemented into our daily living processes, then we really accelerate our spiritual and emotional health process. It is a very powerful paradigm shift in our consciousness when we come to realize that an illusion of dualism and multi-fractured consciousness has been falsely mistaken and accepted for our reality.

The truth is that there is only one reality, only one consciousness. Anything outside of this one consciousness reality is false. Not only is it false and an illusion – it is not even conscious.

The mind is not a conscious entity. Alone it has no life, thus has no power over us. It is we who fall weak of will force and give power to the mind. Who we are is our character, and as physical beings our character goes a long way in our outer make up and expression of what we are as soul.

Our soul in actuality is not only what we are, but if we could uncover the illusionary veils that envelop our soul (us), we would see ourselves in all our pristine glory, shining with the radiant light of 16 outer suns. We would know that that light is all we are. That is the real us. The bottom line is that even our character ultimately is part of the grand illusion laid before us. The question that arises is: how do we break free from this illusion? To help give birth to the higher consciousness of the New Golden Age of Love, we will have to learn as much as possible about personal and self-development.

Most of us are aware that we have to develop spiritually. We must develop and feed the soul (us) through the practice of meditation. Through meditation we can increase our conscious contact with God the Beloved. We develop stronger willpower, greater laser focused concentration and a more heightened awareness about ourselves and our environment. If we increase the light of our consciousness, then we are no doubt developing what we are.

Saints say that if we take one step forward, they take ioo steps to meet us with help. It is said that we cannot walk around the tunnel to get to the light, but must walk through it. To attain self- realization takes real work. The power of love and the new transforming mass consciousness of the people will not allow, tolerate, or accept skirting around putting in the work. The power of love will compel many to willingly surrender their small will to a much sweeter let Thy will be done consciousness. As the change of mass consciousness is underway, the will of the creator and the will of the people slowly become the same. This process of spiritual transfusion is not done by force, but occurs through love, in the New Golden Age.

It is the unconscious essence that dissipates, or dies, not us. We are eternal entities of invincible light. We cannot die. Only the essence or ele-ments of unconscious mind stuff that we have so long grown accustomed to, and become associated with, die. The illusion is that we have done this asso-ciation so long that we have forgotten our true identities. We have allowed the Negative power, through these elements of unconsciousness, to actually perform an Identity Theft of the Soul. We have gradually slipped into dark-ness, allowing the Prince of Darkness to lure us into a state of forgetfulness.

Ultimately, human consciousness must expand and develop a different operating mode to connect with these higher spaces.

Finally, the work of transformation reveals the mystical awareness of truth. By applying principles of in conjuncdon with the combined energies of various group and individual practices, this meditation system transforms the individuals, the group, and, later, the world. Linked consciousness allows a group to focus with great clarity on personal and global spiritual work. Within mystical awareness there is no separateness, but only a true identity that shares consciousness with all life. The human being is simply a microcosm of the macrocosm. To know thyself is to follow the inner wisdom in alignment with the ultimate truth to perform the work that is given to us to do. In knowing our true identity, we are guided step-by-step, moment-by-moment, and sustained and suported by the eternal universal forces.

A matrix of pure energies and aware groups creates a new vision of the world; one that transcends egoic desires and strives for harmonious coexistence. While transfor-mative meditation provides a rich, full awareness of being in your per-sonal meditations, there is also a link to a greater spiritual work. We must learn to live in harmony with the planet, bring more mindful-ness into our world, and transform the energies to create a conscious balance in all life Our work in meditation is an invaluable tool for evolving higher consciousness.

“I die daily” and “learn to die so that you may begin to live”, he was referring to the art of rising above physical body consciousness. So as we learn to die to the physical, we begin to live in the spirit. This is the key to understanding how to spiritually progress through the veil ogf ignoranc, go beyond time and spave perception, and for pass the Archons, and t expand outside the Matrix humankind in trapped and imprisoned within.

This is the spirit of the astral or emotional consciousness. By leaving off the gross dross of the physical body made up of the five senses and its five elements of matter we, like a space shuttle or rocket, have now jettisoned one of our major boosters.

Featured

While we cannot know the whole plan. each of us can know our place in it. It is not a secret that someone else can unlock for us. We carry it inside us. The divine gene that carries our cosmic DNA includes our plan for this lifetime. All it really takes to activate it is what an anonymous fourteenth-century writer called “the lively longing for God.” The whole journey of transfommtion is really about rediscovering our true identity and will. The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it.

While we cannot know the whole plan. each of us can know our place in it. It is not a secret that someone else can unlock for us. We carry it inside us. The divine gene that carries our cosmic DNA includes our plan for this lifetime. All it really takes to activate it is what an anonymous fourteenth-century writer called “the lively longing for God.” The whole journey of transfommtion is really about rediscovering our true identity and will. The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it.

The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it.

Therefore, the abyss is the materiality of nature in which the ego emerges out of but is always immersed in: it experiences itself as drive—as a desirous subjective being, which is the formative organization and expression of unconscious agency that epigenetically be-comes the ego of consciousness. It is only in relation to itself that the ego forges a gap between itself and the abyss—which becomes the domain of all that the self refuses to identify as being identical to itself.

The ego materializes out of an abyss in which it itself remains. In this way, the unconscious ego is itself an abyss that must mediate the multiple, overdctermined, and antithetical forces that populate and besiege it.

In the ego’s determinate activity of mediation, it sets itself in opposition to other-ness that it must sublate, and this inevitably means that certain aspects of its interiority (e.g., content, images, impulses, wishes, ideation) must be com-bated and/or superceded.

It is only on the condition that the ego intuits itself that it gives itself life felt as subjective experiential immediacy. When seen from the standpoint of the ego’s mature development, the abyss becomes anything that the ego refuses to identity as belonging its own constitution. Freud (1923) tells us that “the ego is first and foremost a bodily ego” (p. 26) by the simple fact that we are embodied. But he did not fully describe this process: the ego is first and foremost an unconscious embodiment that intuits its Self within the natural immediacy in which it finds itself.

Through continual dialectical bifurcation, the ego expands its internal experiential and representational world and thus acquires additional capacities, structures, and attunement through its mediated, conscious relational contingencies and epigenetic achievements. In doing so, the ego forges an even wider and deeper abyss casting all otherness into the liar of self-externalization. Therefore the chasm between the ego and the abyss is one in which the ego creates itself.

The ego of consciousness emerges from an unconscious void that it sinks back into at any given moment, thus never truly attaining ontological distinction.

The ego first awakens as unconscious subjectivity within the feeling mode of its original being that it experiences as drive, the restless compulsion to experience.

This is why ego and drive are not ontologically differentiated; ego is merely the appearance of drive. Drive is embodied natural desire, our original being that goes through endless transformations in the contextualization and enactment of our personal individu-alities and interpersonally encountered realities. Drive is transporting, and this is what governs the dialectic.

The reason why the domain of drive and, more broadly, that of the abyss, seems so foreign to the ego is that from the standpoint of conscious self-differentiation, we our so much more than our mere biologies. We define our subjective experiences, and when they come from unintended locations as extraneous temporal encroachments—from the monstrous to the sublime—they are not identified as emanating from within or by one’s own determinate will.

Absolute Spirit is destined to be the all-encompassing, self-articulated develop-ment of pure reason as absolute self-consciousness. It is when spirit achieves its fruition as absolute knowing that its telos is satisfied, the fulfillment of self-actualization. But when spirit is confined to its dark interior and mistakes the simple universal for the absolute universal, we may say that spirit suffers.

It suffers from its own ignorance, its isolation, its loneliness; it is bound to unconsciousness not capable of effecting its exalted transition to comprehensive understanding. im-prisoned in night—the pit of its own indeterminateness—spirit is circumscribed by its simple self-certainty.

Becoming a Master or a GURU is in itself a revolutionary act with far-reaching consequences. Before you set out to trnasform “the System,” however, first remember that we made it and in our own interests. We sustain it constantly, either in agreement, with our support, or in opposition with our dissent. The opponents of the System are as much a function of the System as its defenders. The System is a ghost assembled in the minds of human beings operating within “the System.” It is a virtual parent we made to look after us. We made it very big and difficult to see in its entirety and we serve it and nourish it every day.

These mysteries have the power to move us to that other personal / universal level beyond the ego where something in us creates or discovers meaning

THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN QUOTING AND KNOWING

Sooner or later even the most materialistic person will ask. ‘What is the point ()tiny life? Why am I here going through all these changes?’ The very cry of the heart to know is an affirmation that there are answers, however veiled they may seem at any given moment. tend to believe—or at least hope—that there will be some authorities around who can answer the mystery of our changing lives. The advice given by the oracle at Delphi was “Man, know thysclr—not “seek an evert.”

A Sufi stogy warns us about experts. It seems there was a man presumed dead who suddenly began banging on his coffin. The people raised the coffin lid, and the man said. “What are you doing? I am not dead.” After a bit of silence one of the crowd said, ‘The doctors and the priests have declared that you are dead. So dead you are” And he was promptly buried!

I once read that the difference between mysticism and religion is that religion is believing in someone else’s experience of God. whereas mysticism is believing in your own. It is inspirational, encouraging, and comforting to study someone else’s journey into enlightenment.

All of us would have a much harder time stumbling around in the dark density of materialism if we didn’t have the illuminations of enlightened ones who have gone before us. Their radiance, lighting up the treacherous twists and turns of the path toward self-awareness, is a gift, for when we focus on the wisdom of an enlightened person, we have that same potential within us quickened. But it is so much easier to acquire stories about enlightened ones than it is to follow their lead.

In Song of the Bird. Anthony de Mello tells the story of an explorer who went to the Amazon. As he enjoyed the richness of the country he thought to himself. how will I ever be able to tell the people back home what it feels like to paddle the canoe over the waterfalls? How can I describe the riotous colors of the flowers, the exotic sounds. the rich fragrances?

So he decided to make them a map. When he returned home the people were thrilled by his stories. They pinned the map on the town hall. Some people memorized every turning of the river. Some became map experts. But none of them journeyed to the Amazon themselves. The teacher tells of his first meeting with the man who was to become his guru. Chitrabhanu had been traveling all over India learning to ‘talk the talk” with many wise ones, and he thought he knew a lot.

But the first thing his guru told him was “You don’t know anything. You’re just a good parrot.” He says that was the true beginning of his learning. Most of us quote a truth a long time before we own it. We talk of oneness even as we fight for ego tenitorv. We speak of God’s love at the same time that we are backing away from Grace.

The fact that a truth is recognized does not mean that the old. programmed self abdicates the crown of ego willingly. But in time, and with commitment to our search, it does.

“Seek and you shall find” is the master key. It is not just the promise to believers in any one system. nor is it a romantic notion. It is a tough. working law of energy. The dynamic of this law of energy is attraction.

The desire to understand sets in motion powerful forces, and the answers begin to come slowly, a bit at a time. The right book, the sudden intuitive knowingness, the person with a piece of the puzzle—they all seem to appear as if by magic.

What we used to think was coincidence is in fact directed by an unseen intelligence. I’ve always liked the expression “Coincidence is God’s way of staying anonymous.’ Is it supernatural? No. Naturally super? Oh. yes. The fact is. we’ve just been working it unconsciously. unaware of the powerful. unrelenting law of attraction. We have been creating our own reality all along. Now we can make it intentional.

FROM COPING TO CO-CREATING

You create your own reality” can read a bit like New Age hype that has nothing to do with the real world of money, power, politics, the homeless. AIDS, or your personal life. Not understood, such a statement seems like an empty cliche at best, often guilt producing. insulting, and totally irrelevant at worst.

Rely on appearances to evaluate existing ‘hard data” and it’s likely to seem totally chaotic, the “roll of the dice.”The trouble is that hard data are constantly changing as yesterday’s absolute truths give way to today’s absolute truths—and tomorrow’s.

It’s little wonder that intelligent people sometimes opt for skepticism. It’s a useful transitional energy.

It questions and probes for the counterfeit. but it is still open to learning. Sri Aurobindo, who was both mystic and intellectual, once said. “First of all I believed that nothing was impossible. and at the same lime I could question everything.” However. cynicism. as opposed to skepticism. is a dead end in the search for understanding. I was once told in Spirit “A cynic is someone who has attempted to make God over in his own image and failed.”

The cynic is likely to say there’s no cause, no guiding intelligence. transcendent or otherwise.

The keepers of some of our myths tell us that an anthropomorphic deity made all the decisions for us, assigning us the role we are playing.

It’s not for us to know why, it’s just the mystery. Yet down through the centuries ancient teachings from all over the world tell us that reality is not something done to us: we create it.

Perhaps the word we should be underlined, for many of the realities we experience are those we have made together. As we look at the enormous challenges of our lives and times, it is worth serious investigation into the possibility that we are indeed creators.

It might result in sane sobering confrontations with our egos on fast consideration. but just imagine the implications for creating the future.

There is danger in oversimplification when discussing how we create our own realities. But be patient while you explore that for a moment, and then we’ll look at some of the principles involved.

First of all, we didn’t just begin with this life.

The you that is beyond personality, the real you, has always existed. There never was a time you were not; there never will be a time you won’t be. If you can accept that. from some higher level of beingness. you chose to be in the life you’re experiencing because it was going to allow you maximum opportunities to grow and contribute, you will see that all those fixed realities you started with had purpose.

No matter how you think you came to be born, it was purposeful.

THE LAW OF ATTRACTION

The principle of attraction—in which we magnetically pull to ourselves what we seek—is a law of enerv.. and, like any other law, is activated through natural processes. The world was round, after all, even when we insisted it was flat. But before we discovered the truth of roundness. we created a host of demons and monsters that guarded the edge of the world.

How could something that never truly existed have the capacity to create such fear and limitation? Because our belief in them was so powerful, we breathed power into them. Such is the power of our minds. The law of attraction—like attracts like—is one of the master keys to reality creation.

“Seek and ye shall find’ is at work when attractions arc pulled in from fear magnets and the narrow demands of the ego. The law is equally at work when we seek to be aligned with our deepest spiritual self and we pull into our world all that is needed for creating from the highest in us.

We have only to look around at our world to see what we have collectively created from our blind egos—wars: dangerous pollutions: social, racial. and economic injustices: knowledge so untempered by wisdom that we teeter on the edge of self-annihilation.

We have brought ourselves collectively to planetary crisis. and we don’t have the luxury of delaying much longer. We are in a time of profound choosing. We must realize that our destiny is one with all people and all life.

Not only are we co-creators with each other, we are also in partnership with the Divine. Evolution pushes us either willingly or by means of hardship into accepting that. Each of us is a magnet that pulls into our world whatever we hold in mind.

Mind is much more than just the brain. Mind embraces our consistently. fueled intentions, thoughts, actions, words, and images. Mind establishes and sustains the fire of consciousness.

THE WILL-UNIVERSAL CREATIVE FORCE

The single most potent force you have is your will.

For most of us it is the least understood. Yet everything we see around us. from social conditions to personal relationships, has been willed into existence. As we move through the intense changes of the new decade. we are going to hear more and more about the will.

What is it really and what is the difference between God’s will and human will?

How do we know when we are in accord with God’s will?

When the image of a deity “out there” lingers in the collective mind, it’s not too far removed from the old mountain and river gods. The will of such a deity conies dread. Sooner or later we fear that “it” will demand sacrifices.

We suspect that “it” is taking notes and that any minute all our faults will be revealed and punished. How do we live so that “it” will reward us, or maybe not even notice us? Many loving and intelligent people choose to dismiss the whole idea of a transcendent divine will as wishful thinking or pure superstition. It’s little wonder, then. that they fund that the concept “God is love” simply doesn’t compute with that of “God’s will.” which seems so indifferent to human suffering. It’s never likely to compute as long as we think God’s will is done to us rather than through us.

We will have difficulty accepting that there really is a loving God behind all the chaos we see. Is there a transcendent plan, a blueprint for planet Earth? During times of intense acceleration, such as now. many people catch symbolic glimpses of m hat appears to be an unfolding plan through dreams. visions. intuition.

While we were there, someone in the group bought me a present at the souvenir counter: a paperweight with two Earths etched on it. Not two hemispheres of the Earth, but two Earths exactly alike, side by side. Many people are having similar impressions of the world that is to come out of the dark and dangerous passage we are experiencing now. The message in all of them is to hold tight to a vision of our world in ecological. racial, economic, social, and political balance. How this new world will come into being is through us.

While we cannot know the whole plan. each of us can know our place in it. It is not a secret that someone else can unlock for us. We cam’ it inside us. The divine gene that carries our cosmic DNA includes our plan for this lifetime. All it really takes to activate it is what an anonymous fourteenth-century writer called “the lively longing for God.” The whole journey of transfommtion is really about rediscovering our true identity and will.

The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it. There is no direct, permanent, or public access to the divine. Each destiny has a unique curvature and must find its own spiritual belonging and direction. Individuality is the only gateway to spiritual potential and blessing. The heavens will always speak to man on earth. For it is the established order of creation, that life and light should descend from the higher to the lower, from the interior to the external, from the inner to the outer circles of existence.

This saying by a famous Indian mystic clearly demonstrates the gap between the “ rational ” mind and the loving heart.

Healing the mind takes place in two ways : In the first , we bring attention to the content of our thoughts and learn to redirect them

“The deepest you is the nothing inside, the side which you don’t know. Don’t be afraid of nothing.” —Alan Watts

The unseen is the uneatable ones and the secluded one is the lord, the almighty, the healer for all wounds. The invisible sees and knows everything your life consists of, because the appearance is such a beautiful bliss. Nothing can separate you from it, only the secluded one can limit your days of reality.

The genuine word of eternity, where man is a desert and alien both to himself and multiplicity,” writes Meister Eckhart. If nothing works and we still survive, we have learned that there is nothing to fear ever again. “I survived without support means I have no need of my usual supports. I am my own companion sometimes. God as comrade can be I. In certain moments, I am the More.” This is access to the immanent God. We also discover a surprising paradox: our challenge is not to fill ourselves.

Being a hollow bamboo does the most to help us grow into spiritual adulthood. We embrace total disillusionment with shelters. harbors, and retreats and are thereby free from despair. Despair means no hope to hold onto. That condition is one of the givens of life. When we throw away the hope of rescue or exemption from the conditions of human existence and notice that we still survive, we are liberated from dependency and from liability to despair. We walk the path between these extremes.

Then the silence in heaven becomes what is described in a Hermetic hymn: “The angels sing in silence.” When we stay with life processes like these, a new softness happens in our hearts. As Joseph Campbell says: “The mind creates the abyss; the heart crosses it.” We become more accessible to the hardy truth of human existence, more open to the unprotected and unsupported moments in our lives.

The Void is, after all, only unconditional being. It is our experience of existence without the tassels and booties we put on it so we would never hear its thud. This unconditional being is actually our higher Self. It is what the lightened ship of light looks like once the doing, acting, and defending have been jettisoned. We try so hard to avoid ever having to face the Void.

Yet to contain and relax into our own emptiness makes room for a deeply compassionate love to emerge. Vacancy becomes spaciousness, and we open ourselves to all who suffer as we do. This is how our aloneness plays a key role in the release of our unconditional love. It may seem that the Void and all the givens of existence are negative or even punitive. Actually they are the necessary ingredients of human evolution and of true spiritual maturity.

“The modern world has called us to a maturity we are not capable of if all we have is blind faith and literalism.”

“There is no direct, permanent, or public access to the divine. Each destiny has a unique curvature and must find its own spiritual belonging and direction. Individuality is the only gateway to spiritual potential and blessing.”

This is so ironic since faith is based on imagination not on intellect. We feel a wonderful liberation when we find our own truth, free from the rigid dogmatic orthodoxy in which there can be only one correct configuration of life and its meaning. There is something in us—our heroic journey archetype—that does not want to settle into any single stall, something with an inclination to keep seeking. Our minds are meant to seek and, when we find, to seek again. We humans are not cut out to shut the door on finding more wonders, especially not the door an authority has forbidden us to open. An adult with self-respect has a full and unabashed sense of discovery, with all her powers not only intact but ever-increasing.

The sooner we come to understand ourselves, the better it will open the doors of the abyss of the mind! The black hole of emptiness, where’s there is nothing but peace and understanding that creates good or bad, with the solution to all problems! The destiny of life is a mystery unseen from every human’s dreams!

The losing sight of God and of our vital relation to the spititual world, has been the perpetual fault of philosophy for ages. If thought can originate in us, why not life as well ? If the material world acting upon our bodily senses, conveys to us the first ray of knowledge, why may it not originate our life ?

Then outward nature becomes to us God, and we plunge into the starless night of materialism. The bodily senses are only organized matter. How can the motion of their fibres create thought?

Is knowledge a material emanation? Matter, in all its forms, is in itself dead and passive. It acts only as it is acted upon. It moves only as it is moved. If the motion of matter creates thought, ii creates the mind that thinks, for thought is only state of mind. The material universe may then be supposed to be the crea-tor of the Divine Mind, and God himself becomes creature.

Here, by an easy descent, we fall into blank atheism. Thus philosophy has walked about for ages with its disciples, on the brink of a precipice. By few short logical steps they plunge into the abyss of a cheerless infidelity. And this descent to Avernus has been found by many too easy. We have spoken of knowledge received by infirm, as an emanation from one mind to another.

But we have done so only in the same wry as the chemist speaks of light and heat as radiast forces, as if particles of a luminous fluid darted off into space. This theory is abandoned, and light is proved to be only vibration. In its essence it is motion, force. One body illuminates another by communicating its motion to it, and not by pouring into it a luminous fluid.

So one mind imparts its knowledge and affections states to anothe, by causing it to vibrate in harmony with it.

The mind is like a divinely constructed stringed instrument. An angel’s intellect may communicate its motion to its harp strings, and a celestial music is the result. Thought and affection are not something that go forth from the mind that thinks end feels. They arc states, interior movements of the thinking, feeling substance. And as one vibrating string, will communicate its motion to another in tone with it, so one mind imparts its intellectual life to another.

The mind is capable of all knowledge, when it is subjected to the action of divine and celestial forces, just as a musical instrument, properly constructed, is capable of producing the most rapturous sounds, when the hand of a skillful player imparts to it the necessary motion.

One ruling mind will convert all in its pres-ence to its own modes of thought and feeling. What is called the mesmeric state, is produced by the ac-tion of the same law, only the effect is intensified. What are called the magnetic passes are not neces-sary to its production. We have thrown many persons into this state, some of them miles away, but never once made use of the prescribed passes. It is the action of mind on mind.

In the same way, those who revel in the light of a higher day, and the beams of a brighter sun, may impart to us their sublimer thoughts, and their happier affections. Revelation from the inner realm has never ceased, but will be endlessly progressive.

The heavens will always speak to man on earth. For it is the established order of creation, that life and light should descend from the higher to the lower, from the interior to the external, from the inner to the outer circles of existence.

The main dictum of the hermetic tradition as found in the Emerald Tablet in essence states “As Above, So Below” meaning that humanity will find within itself the nature of the entire universe.

⦁ Enlightment is the only way to exit the Archon Matrix Mankind is trapped within/imprisoned within

⦁ “Enlightenment is ego’s ultimate disappointment.” Buddhist Quotes

⦁ “The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it.”

⦁ “Happiness is your nature. It is not wrong to desire it. What is wrong is seeking it outside when it is inside”

⦁ “One is never afraid of the unknown; one is afraid of the known coming to an end.”

When it turns out not to match the limited view of our ego, disappointment is the result. Chogyam Trungpa put it simply when he said, “Enlightenment is ego’s ultimate disappointment.” In other words, enlightenment is the end of the ego.

The attainment of enlightenment from ego ‘ s point of view is extreme death , the death of self , the death of me and mine , the death of the watcher . It is the ultimate and final disappointment.

When entities vanish , nothing is lost , for they had no ultimate existence in the first place , being nevertheless real because not divorced from the Void . Liberation is achieved by Enlightenment , the fruit of transcending all egodelusion.

Revolution of the Heart

More and more of us are deciding to no longer be afraid, to no longer play the game. A nem game plan is being written and it speaks of a higher consciousness, noon, enlightened way of being:Atm the players will be empoweml human beings. This is creating change on every level. On one hand, more people are awakening to the possibility of a new reality, and at the same time, we are witnessing an increase in the intensity of fear in those who cling to the old ways of being as they try to maintain the disintegrating outdated construct. Rut this change cannot in’ denied. A tsunami of consciousness is sweeping the old game hoard clean, to leave the stage open for those choosing to create a new collective reality. Change is the only constant in the verse. Yet, it is the thing humans fear mast, another sign that our current paradigm goes against the flow of life. Humans are extremely resistant to change. When a company takes over another, for example, it is not unusual to terminate all the original employees. The reason behind this “cold” approach is that it is easier to train new staff than to ask the current staff to change.

If we apply this example to the current planet’s paradigm, although one might hope that every single human being will embrace a new collective reality, this is unlikely to be the case. Transition is difficult. And one of this magnitude especially so. But this transition is occurring whether we are ready to accept it or not, since it is not based on personal preference but many factors are producing this shift in collective consciousness. Unfortunately, it can be difficult to clearly identify what causes the fear that keeps us from negotiating change. This in itself can be pretty stressful. But the shift currently taking place on the planet is affecting everyone. As the collective level of consciousness changes, everyone and everything that is connected to it is being affected. But because many people are unaware of the types of changes sweeping the planet, a dissonant chord of fear and unease has also begun to permeate both the individual and collective consciousness. Humanity is at the end of its rope. As such, it is realizing that its suffering is not due to some random act of a periodically annoyed deity. Many are asking the hard questions, the ones that challenge the constructs of our current collective reality. We are awakening to our power, and when we do, the rules of the game have to change. It is a historic moment on this planet, capable of rewriting how life will be experienced from this moment on.

The state of enlightenment is also called self-realization or God-realization. It’s called “realization” because the great, enlightened beings have “realized” one fact — a fact that has implications on every element of life as they know it.

They’ve realized the omnipresence of divinity. They’ve realized that everything is one, and that knowledge and the knowing of that knowledge are inseparable. They realize that what you see is what you get, what you get is what you see, and what you see is who you are. In other words, it takes one to know one. We are the world, indeed.

Realization is not just about reading some words and being able to discuss or debate them; but rather to realize the essence behind spiritual insights such as “In the beginning was the word, and the word was God,” “Everything is one,” “The kingdom of Heaven lies within,” or “Thou art That.”

Once you realize the essence of spiritual teachings and make them an integral part of your reality, these teachings filter through and transform your entire world. Your sense of limited individuality fades like a mirage that had been blocking the bright sunlight of supreme truth. As this supreme light blasts through you unimpeded by mortal illusions of limitation and separation, you become enlightened. You emanate not only your own personal human light, but also a higher. more universal light.

Before becoming forever established in the highest realization, you may touch that enlightened space for a while and then return back to limited thinking. Even when you’re feeling limited, remembering the higher spaces you’ve touched helps to keep you moving forward toward your divine birthright of knowing who you are in the highest sense at all times.

With enlightenment, you may continue playing your role, but with the awareness that you’re the one who’s playing your role!

Enlightenment Now: Liberation Is Your True Nature

Out of Time and Into Enlightenment

THE MOST IMPORTANT MYSTERY that we encounter on our endeavor to be free in this life is that what we seek we already possess.

This statement not only goes beyond the psychological parameters of what we believe freedom to be in this life, but it also destroys the concept of how we commonly associate freedom with social success and financial security.

Yet it is a statement that cannot be uprooted, because success and security, in the socially accepted sense, are arbitrary terms, implying that you do not belong in this world and that somehow to belong you need to be accepted by standing on the shoulders of others who you falsely believe threaten your security.

The accepted notion of success is to assume that our very existence is wrong and that somehow we need to make it right. If your psychological center of gravity were corrected so you understood that ‘you existing in this world is itself a miracle, and thus already successful beyond words. then the magic and beauty of our world would unfold purely because the success we were seeking we already intrinsically owned. This clarified reality of success comes only to those who are already completely free in this life. But this raises the question, what does it mean to be completely free in this life?

The mystery that we encounter in our endeavor toward freedom in this life has nothing fundamentally to do with success and security, as these are intrinsic attributes arising out of the knowledge that one already possesses what one once searched for. But instead, that which is within our original nature is enlightenment. the completely free state.

This perception of enlightenment within the field of time poses many difficult ideas of what it means to be liberated, and these ideas themselves are obstacles to true liberation. The main difficulty to overcome is that those who strive for enlightenment unknowingly assign it the quality of a temporary state rather than everlasting.

Striving for enlightenment does ascribe to it the temporal order of the universe, because anything in the field of time is an illusionary concept of past or future, which ultimately distracts our attention from the reality of the present moment. This is known as samsara in Sanskrit, referring to the wheel of time, which is thought to be an illusion. In revealing our time-bound concept of enlightenment, it is extremely hard for most of us to swallow, for the sheer fact that enlightenment is the eternal aspect deep within our consciousness that is a reflection of the eternal universe.

We tend to try and grasp such axiomatic truths with our intellect, which is itself a time-bound instrument of discernment, and in most cases the result of time. This is not to insult the intellect, but rather it is the recognition that if our intuitive faculties have not opened up, then the intellect has little to no chance of peering into the esoteric heart of the universe that lies beyond the temporal scope.

Jesus the Christ, Gautama the Buddha, Bhagavan Krishna, and many others are examples of spiritually liberated beings. They are our way showers. Each of them provides a unique map leading to the same destination, whether it’s defined as selfrealization, enlightenment, satori, nirvana, perfect sanity, samadhi, or ecstasy. We, like them, are candidates for awakening. In fact, we have a mandate to wake up to our true nature and the nature of Reality.

This is a state of spiritual enlightenment. Spiritual liberation Release from the karmic cycle of life, death and rebirth.

Once enlightenment meant to bring the light of insight that liberates the self from suffering and death through the experience of anatta or no-self.

Liberation means freedom from the suffering of uncontrollably recurring rebirth (samsara ) and its causes, while enlightenment brings the ability to help others gain similar freedom.

The sign of progress in the meditations is that the aspiration to freedom begins to exert a steady influence upon the mind, day and night. This yearning for spiritual liberation now becomes an important propelling force.

We see that the deepest power behind cyclic life is the “ I ” – grasping ignorance , the inborn habit of identifying ourselves with something that has no basis in reality ; and we also see how this gives rise to the endless flow of mental distortion.

The ultimate goal of the living spirit is to attain liberation and join with the eternal soul. Every godly personality understands this ultimate goal. In spiritual terms, it means individual living spirits must reach or go even beyond the seventh sphere (swarloka) to establish a contact with the eternal soul. To reach even the sixth sphere, the living spirit has to be free from all external influences generated by the powers of living force.

Transcendental Phase

During the initiation phase, living beings establish contact with the eternal soul, and it starts to gain freedom from external illumination that is received through the cosmic universal system. At this stage, the living spirit becomes free of the limitations imposed by the powers of prokriti or Mother Nature.

Neutral Phase

By attaining such freedom, the living spirit attains neutrality and is no longer subject to living forces responsible for creating electromagnetic fields. The powers of causation, attraction, and repulsion—responsible for the creation of duality—diminish. The living being is able to access the eternal truth, Sot, and unveil the mystery of causation. This process of inner illumination is expressed in spiritual terms as enlightenment or nirvana.

With inner illumination, the individual is able to go beyond the sattwic guna and transcend beyond the fifth sphere.

The ability to visualize divine splendors only comes with the sixth sense.

Spiritual liberation or transcendence is only a part of our spiritual journey . … system provides the opportunity for both embodiment – feeling the spirit move in the body – and enlightenment – freeing the life of the body.

Mankind living or is caught within their frequency band and is feeding and programming this channel with information to our brains and limit our perception to the sense reality

Featured

BE AS YOU ARE

Be As You Are – The Teachings of Sri Ramana Maharshi

PART ONE – The Self


That in which all these worlds seem to exist steadily, that of which all these worlds are a possession, that from which
all these worlds rise, that for which all these exist, that by which all these worlds come into existence and that which is
indeed all these – that alone is the existing reality. Let us cherish that Self, which is the reality, in the Heart.

Chapter 1 – The nature of the Self


The essence of Sri Ramana’s teachings is conveyed in his frequent assertions that there is a single immanent reality,
directly experienced by everyone, which is simultaneously the source, the substance and the real nature of everything
that exists. He gave it number of different names, each one signifying a different aspect of the same indivisible reality.
The following classification includes all of his more common synonyms and explains the implications of the various
terms used.


1 The Self
This is the term that he used the most frequently. He defined it by saying that the real Self or real ‘I’ is, contrary to
perceptible experience, not an experience of individuality but a non-personal, all-inclusive awareness. It is not to be
confused with the individual self which he said was essentially non-existent, being a fabrication of the mind which
obscures the true experience of the real Self. He maintained that the real Self is always present and always
experienced but he emphasized that one is only consciously aware of it as it really is when the self- limiting
tendencies of the mind have ceased. Permanent and continuous Self- awareness is known as Self-realisation.
2 Sat-chit-ananda
This is a Sanskrit term which translates as being-consciousness-bliss. Sri Ramana taught that the Self is pure being, a
subjective awareness of ‘I am’ which is completely devoid of the feeling ‘I am this’ or ‘I am that’. There are no
subjects or objects in the Self, there is only an awareness of being. Because this awareness is conscious it is also
known as consciousness. The direct experience of this consciousness is, according to Sri Ramana, a state of unbroken
happiness and so the term ananda or bliss is also used to describe it. These three aspects, being, consciousness and
bliss, are experienced as a unitary whole and not as separate attributes of the Self. They are inseparable in the same
way that wetness, transparency and liquidity are inseparable properties of water.
3 God
Sri Ramana maintained that the universe is sustained by the power of the Self.
Since theists normally attribute this power to God he often used the word God as a synonym for the Self. He also used
the words Brahman, the supreme being of Hinduism, and Siva, a Hindu name for God, in the same way. Sri Ramana’s
God is not a personal God, he is the formless being which sustains the universe. He is not the creator of the universe,
the universe is merely a manifestation of his inherent power; he is inseparable from it, but he is not affected by its
appearance or its disappearance.
4 The Heart
Sri Ramana frequently used the Sanskrit word hridayam when he was talking about the Self. It is usually translated as
‘the Heart’ but a more literal translation would be ‘this is the centre’. In using this particular term he was not implying
that there was a particular location or centre for the Self, he was merely indicating that the Self was the source from
which all appearances manifested.
7
Ramana Maharshi – Be As You Are – by David Godman
5 Jnana
The experience of the Self is sometimes called jnana or knowledge. This term should not be taken to mean that there
is a person who has knowledge of the Self, because in the state of Self-awareness there is no localised knower and
there is nothing that is separate from the Self that can be known. True knowledge, or jnana, is not an object of
experience, nor is it an understanding of a state which is different and apart from the subject knower; it is a direct and
knowing awareness of the one reality in which subjects and objects have ceased to exist. One who is established in
this state is known as a jnani.
6 Turiya and turyatita
Hindu philosophy postulates three alternating levels of relative consciousness – waking, dream and deep sleep. Sri
Ramana stated that the Self was the underlying reality which supported the appearance of the other three temporary
states.
Because of this he sometimes called the Self turiya avastha or the fourth state. He also occasionally used the word
turiyatita, meaning ‘transcending the fourth’, to indicate that there are not really four states but only one real
transcendental state,
7 Other terms
Three other terms for the Self are worth noting. Sri Ramana often emphasized that the Self was one’s real and natural
state of being, and for this reason, he occasionally employed the terms sahaja sthiti, meaning the natural state, and
swarupa, meaning real form or real nature. He also used the word ‘silence’ to indicate that the Self was a silent
thought-free state of undisturbed peace and total stillness.
Q: What is reality?
A: Reality must be always real. It is not with forms and names. That which underlies these is the reality. It underlies
limitations, being itself limitless. It is not bound. It underlies unrealities, itself being real. Reality is that which is. It is
as it is. It transcends speech. It is beyond the expressions ‘existence, non-existence’, etc.
The reality which is the mere consciousness that remains when ignorance is destroyed along with knowledge of
objects, alone is the Self [atma]. In that Brahma-swarupa [real form of Brahman], which is abundant Self-awareness,
there is not the least ignorance.
The reality which shines fully, without misery and without a body, not only when the world is known but also when
the world is not known, is your real form [nija-swarupa].
The radiance of consciousness-bliss, in the form of one awareness shining equally within and without, is the supreme
and blissful primal reality. Its form is silence and it is declared by jnanis to be the final and unobstructable state of true
knowledge [jnana].
Know that jnana alone is non-attachment; jnana alone is purity; jnana is the attainment of God; jnana which is devoid
of forgetfulness of Self alone is immortality; jnana alone is everything.
Q: What is this awareness and how can one obtain and cultivate it?
A: You are awareness. Awareness is another name for you.
Since you are awareness there is no need to attain or cultivate it. All that you have to do is to give up being aware of
other things, that is of the not-Self. If one gives up being aware of them then pure awareness alone remains, and that is
the Self.
Q: If the Self is itself aware, why am I not aware of it even now?
A: There is no duality. Your present knowledge is due to the ego and is only relative. Relative knowledge requires a
subject and an object, whereas the awareness of the Self is absolute and requires no object.
Remembrance also is similarly relative, requiring an object to be remembered and a subject to remember. When there
8
Ramana Maharshi – Be As You Are – by David Godman
is no duality, who is to remember whom? The Self is ever-present. Each one wants to know the Self. What kind of
help does one require to know oneself? People want to see the Self as something new. But it is eternal and remains the
same all along. They desire to see it as a blazing light etc. How can it be so? It is not light, not darkness. It is only as it
is. It cannot be defined. The best definition is ‘I am that I am’. The srutis [scriptures] speak of the Self as being the
size of one’s thumb, the tip of the hair, an electric spark, vast, subtler than the subtlest, etc. They have no foundation
in fact. It is only being, but different from the real and the unreal; it is knowledge, but different from knowledge and
ignorance. How can it be defined at all? It is simply being.
Q: When a man realises the Self, what will he see?
A: There is no seeing. Seeing is only being. The state of Self-realisation, as we call it, is not attaining something new
or reaching some goal which is far away, but simply being that which you always are and which you always have
been. All that is needed is that you give up your realisation of the not-true as true. All of us are regarding as real that
which is not real. We have only to give up this practice on our part. Then we shall realise the Self as the Self; in other
words, ‘Be the Self. At one stage you will laugh at yourself for trying to discover the Self which is so self-evident. So,
what can we say to this question?
That stage transcends the seer and the seen. There is no seer there to see anything. The seer who is seeing all this now
ceases to exist and the Self alone remains.
Q: How to know this by direct experience?
A: If we talk of knowing the Self, there must be two selves, one a knowing self, another the self which is known, and
the process of knowing. The state we call realisation is simply being oneself, not knowing anything or becoming
anything. If one has realised, one is that which alone is and which alone has always been. One cannot describe that
state. One can only be that. Of course, we loosely talk of Self-realisation, for want of a better term. How to ‘realise’ or
make real that which alone is real?
Q: You sometimes say the Self is silence. Why is this?
A: For those who live in Self as the beauty devoid of thought, there is nothing which should be thought of. That which
should be adhered to is only the experience of silence, because in that supreme state nothing exists to be attained other
than oneself.
Q: What is mouna [silence]?
A: That state which transcends speech and thought is mouna. That which is, is mouna. How can mouna be explained
in words?
Sages say that the state in which the thought ‘I’ [the ego] does not rise even in the least, alone is Self [swarupa] which
is silence [mouna]. That silent Self alone is God; Self alone is the jiva [individual soul]. Self alone is this ancient
world.
All other knowledges are only petty and trivial knowledges; the experience of silence alone is the real and perfect
knowledge. Know that the many objective differences are not real but are mere superimpositions on Self, which is the
form of true knowledge.
Q: As the bodies and the selves animating them are everywhere actually observed to be innumerable how can it be
said that the Self is only one?
A: If the idea ‘I am the body’ is accepted, the selves are multiple. The state in which this idea vanishes is the Self
since in that state there are no other objects. It is for this reason that the Self is regarded as one only.
Since the body itself does not exist in the natural outlook of the real Self, but only in the extroverted outlook of the
mind which is deluded by the power of illusion, to call Self, the space of consciousness, dehi [the possessor of the
body] is wrong.
The world does not exist without the body, the body never exists without the mind, the mind never exists without
consciousness and consciousness never exists without the reality.
9
Ramana Maharshi – Be As You Are – by David Godman
For the wise one who has known Self by diving within himself, there is nothing other than Self to be known. Why?
Because since the ego which identifies the form of a body as ‘I’ has perished, he [the wise one] is the formless
existence-consciousness.
The jnani [one who has realised the Self] knows he is the Self and that nothing, neither his body nor anything else,
exists but the Self. To such a one what difference could the presence or absence of a body make?
It is false to speak of realisation. What is there to realise? The real is as it is always. We are not creating anything new
or achieving something which we did not have before. The illustration given in books is this. We dig a well and create
a huge pit. The space in the pit or well has not been created by us. We have just removed the earth which was filling
the space there. The space was there then and is also there now. Similarly we have simply to throw out all the agelong samskaras [innate tendencies] which are inside us. When all of them have been given up, the Self will shine
alone.
Q: But how to do this and attain liberation?
A: Liberation is our very nature. We are that. The very fact that we wish for liberation shows that freedom from all
bondage is our real nature. It is not to be freshly acquired. All that is necessary is to get rid of the false notion that we
are bound. When we achieve that, there will be no desire or thought of any sort. So long as one desires liberation, so
long, you may take it, one is in bondage.
Q: For one who has realized his Self, it is said that he will not have the three states of wakefulness, dream and deep
sleep. Is that a fact?
A: What makes you say that they do not have the three states? In saying ‘I had a dream; I was in deep sleep; I am
awake’, you must admit that you were there in all the three states. That makes it clear that you were there all the time.
If you remain as you are now, you are in the wakeful state; this becomes hidden in the dream state; and the dream
state disappears when you are in deep sleep.
You were there then, you are there now, and you are there at all times. The three states come and go, but you are
always there. It is like a cinema. The screen is always there but several types of pictures appear on the screen and then
disappear. Nothing sticks to the screen, it remains a screen.
Similarly, you remain your own Self in all the three states. If you know that, the three states will not trouble you, just
as the pictures which appear on the screen do not stick to it. On the screen, you sometimes see a huge ocean with
endless waves; that disappears. Another time, you see fire spreading all around; that too disappears. The screen is
there on both occasions. Did the screen get wet with the water or did it get burned by the fire? Nothing affected the
screen. In the same way, the things that happen during the wakeful, dream and sleep states do not affect you at all; you
remain your own Self.
Q: Does that mean that, although people have all three states, wakefulness, dream and deep sleep, these do not affect
them?
A: Yes, that is it. All these states come and go. The Self is not bothered; it has only one state.
Q: Does that mean that such a person will be in this world merely as a witness?
A: That is so; for this very thing, Vidyaranya, in the tenth chapter of the Panchadasi, gives as example the light that is
kept on the stage of a theatre. When a drama is being played, the light is there, which illuminates, without any
distinction, all the actors, whether they be kings or servants or dancers, and also all the audience. That light will be
there before the drama begins, during the performance and also after the performance is over. Similarly, the light
within, that is, the Self, gives light to the ego, the intellect, the memory and the mind without itself being subject to
processes of growth and decay. Although during deep sleep and other states there is no feeling of the ego, that Self
remains attributeless, and continues to shine of itself.
Actually, the idea of the Self being the witness is only in the mind; it is not the absolute truth of the Self. Witnessing
is relative to objects witnessed. Both the witness and his object are mental creations.
10
Ramana Maharshi – Be As You Are – by David Godman
Q: How are the three states of consciousness inferior in degree of reality to the fourth [turiya]? What is the actual
relation between these three states and the fourth?
A: There is only one state, that of consciousness or awareness or existence. The three states of waking, dream and
sleep cannot be real. They simply come and go. The real will always exist. The ‘I’ or existence that alone persists in
all the three states is real. The other three are not real and so it is not possible to say they have such and such a degree
of reality. We may roughly put it like this.
Existence or consciousness is the only reality. Consciousness plus waking, we call waking.
Consciousness plus sleep, we call sleep. Consciousness plus dream, we call dream. Consciousness is the screen on
which all the pictures come and go. The screen is real, the pictures are mere shadows on it. Because by long habit we
have been regarding these three states as real, we call the state of mere awareness or consciousness the fourth. There is
however no fourth state, but only one state.
There is no difference between dream and the waking state except that the dream is short and the waking long. Both
are the result of the mind. Because the waking state is long, we imagine that it is our real state. But, as a matter of fact,
our real state is turiya or the fourth state which is always as it is and knows nothing of the three states of waking,
dream or sleep. Because we call these three avasthas [states] we call the fourth state also turiya avastha. But is it not
an avastha, but the real and natural state of the Self. When this is realised, we know it is not a turiya or fourth state, for
a fourth state is only relative, but turiyatita, the transcendent state.
Q: But why should these three states come and go on the real state or the screen of the Self?
A: Who puts this question? Does the Self say these states come and go? It is the seer who says these come and go.
The seer and the seen together constitute the mind. See if there is such a thing as the mind. Then, the mind merges in
the Self, and there is neither the seer nor the seen. So the real answer to your question is, ‘They neither come nor go.’
The Self alone remains as it ever is. The three states owe their existence to non-enquiry and enquiry puts an end to
them. However much one may explain, the fact will not become clear till one attains Self-realisation and wonders how
one was blind to the self-evident and only existence so long.
Q: What is the difference between the mind and the Self?
A: There is no difference. The mind turned inwards is the Self; turned outwards, it becomes the ego and all the world.
Cotton made into various clothes we call by various names. Gold made into various ornaments, we call by various
names. But all the clothes are cotton and all the ornaments gold. The one is real, the many are mere names and forms.
But the mind does not exist apart from the Self, that is, it has no independent existence. The Self exists without the
mind, never the mind without the Self.
Q: Brahman is said to be sat-chit-ananda. What does that mean?
A: Yes. That is so. That which is, is only sat. That is called Brahman. The lustre of sat is chit and its nature is ananda.
These are not different from sat. All the three together are known as sat- chit-ananda.
Q: As the Self is existence [sat] and consciousness [chit] what is the reason for describing it as different from the
existent and the non-existent, the sentient and the insentient?
A: Although the Self is real, as it comprises everything, it does not give room for questions involving duality about its
reality or unreality. Therefore it is said to be different from the real and the unreal. Similarly, even though it is
consciousness, since there is nothing for it to know or to make itself known to, it is said to be different from the
sentient and the insentient.
Sat-chit-ananda is said to indicate that the supreme is not asat [different from being], not achit [different from
consciousness] and not an anananda [different from happiness]. Because we are in the phenomenal world we speak of
the Self as sat-chit-ananda.
Q: In what sense is happiness or bliss [ananda] our real nature?
11
Ramana Maharshi – Be As You Are – by David Godman
A: Perfect bliss is Brahman. Perfect peace is of the Self. That alone exists and is consciousness.
That which is called happiness is only the nature of Self; Self is not other than perfect happiness.
That which is called happiness alone exists. Knowing that fact and abiding in the state of Self, enjoy bliss eternally.
If a man thinks that his happiness is due to external causes and his possessions, it is reasonable to conclude that his
happiness must increase with the increase of possessions and diminish in proportion to their diminution. Therefore if
he is devoid of possessions, his happiness should be nil.
What is the real experience of man? Does it conform to this view? In deep sleep man is devoid of possessions,
including his own body. Instead of being unhappy he is quite happy. Everyone desires to sleep soundly. The
conclusion is that happiness is inherent in man and is not due to external causes. One must realise the Self in order to
open the store of unalloyed happiness.
Q: Sri Bhagavan speaks of the Heart as the seat of consciousness and as identical with the Self.
What does the Heart exactly signify?
A: Call it by any name, God, Self, the Heart or the seat of consciousness, it is all the same. The point to be grasped is
this, that Heart means the very core of one’s being, the centre, without which there is nothing whatever. The Heart is
not physical, it is spiritual. Hridayam equals hrit plus ayam; it means ‘this is the centre’. It is that from which thoughts
arise, on which they subsist and where they are resolved. The thoughts are the content of the mind and they shape the
universe. The Heart is the centre of all. That from which beings come into existence is said to be Brahman in the
Upanishads. That is the Heart. Brahman is the Heart.
Q: How to realise the Heart?
A: There is no one who even for a moment fails to experience the Self. For no one admits that he ever stands apart
from the Self. He is the Self. The Self is the Heart.
The Heart is the centre from which everything springs. Because you see the world, the body and so on, it is said that
there is a centre for these, which is called the Heart. When you are in the Heart, the Heart is known to be neither the
centre nor the circumference. There is nothing else apart from it.
The consciousness which is the real existence and which does not go out to know those things which are other than
Self, alone is the Heart. Since the truth of Self is known only to that consciousness, which is devoid of activity, that
consciousness which always remains attending to Self alone is the shining of clear knowledge.

THE WHOLE BOOK CAN BE DOWNLOADED FROM PDFDRIVE.COM

Featured

Awakening the Third Eye

Awakening the Third Eye

This book can be downloaded from PDFDRIVE.COM

Introduction
A systematic method
The light of the body is the eye: if therefore thine
eye be single, thy whole body shall be full of light.
6:22
This book describes a systematic process to open the third eye.
It has been written for those who cannot be satisfied with only an
intellectual understanding of spiritual realities and who wish to
gain access to direct experience.
The development of spiritual vision requires the patient building
of some new ‘organs’ of energy, of which the third eye is an
essential member. These new structures are not physical,
nevertheless they are very real and tangible. Once fully developed,
the perceptions coming through them appear clearer, sharper and
far more substantial than those coming from the physical senses.
A number of techniques will be described which aim at a
methodical cultivation of this new form of perception.
Our approach always emphasizes the superiority of experience over
mental concepts, of first-hand knowledge over belief. Truly, it is
not what you presume or accept as true that will bring about a
spiritual regeneration but what you experience directly. Therefore,
the reader is not asked to believe what is written here but to
practise the exercises.
No former spiritual training or background is expected before
starting the practices. I suggest that you temporarily forget all
you know so that you can engage in the techniques with fresh
awareness. Having shared this knowledge with hundreds of
students in the courses run by the Clairvision School in Sydney, I
know that it is not always those who have meditated for years
who enter the field of perception most easily. To some, spiritual
knowledge gives wings and provides keys to open all the doors; but
to others it is more like chains preventing them from absorbing
anything new. The more you are able to drop any preconceived
ideas, the easier it will be to ‘see’.
It should be clearly understood that our aim is not to develop the
blurry atavistic clairvoyance of trance-medium psychics but to
10
step towards the vision of the Self. Even though several extrasensory perceptions will arise as you practise the techniques, the
purpose is clearly to find the Self and to learn to see the world
from the Self instead of seeing it from your usual mental
consciousness.
This book should be taken as an introduction, a first thread,
towards a completely different mode of perception and thinking.
It has been written to serve the vast number of human beings who
are presently ready to connect with spiritual realities and to step
into a new form of consciousness. The techniques it offers are
designed for people who are part of the world. They do not invite
you to withdraw from your daily activities but to start
performing them with a different awareness and a new vision,
thereby implementing the line of Proverbs 3:6: “In all your ways
know Him”, said by the Talmud to contain the entire essence of
the Torah.
After saying these words it may be important to state that the
Clairvision School is not a ‘New Age’ organisation. Its methods and
techniques are based on quite different principles from those
usually found in the New Age movement. In particular at no time
do the Clairvision techniques use any channelling, creative
imagination or positive affirmations. No hypnosis or
autosuggestion is used either. The techniques of the Clairvision
School are based on a direct awakening of the body of energy, and
the philosophy and background of the school are to be found in
the western tradition of esoteric knowledge. If you happen to
experience intense openings and realisations while putting our
techniques into practice, it is quite possible that you too have a
connection with this tradition. In particular it is expected that
many will have clear awakenings in the third eye while reading
the book.
Awakening the Third Eye is one of the introductory books to the
Clairvision Corpus, the body of knowledge which is the
background of the Clairvision School. The Clairvision Corpus
contains both experiential and theoretical knowledge in the field
of consciousness and the mysteries of human nature, with a special
focus on transformation and inner alchemy. Alchemy can be
defined as the art of raising the level of vibration of matter.
Inner alchemy therefore refers to a form of spiritual development
in which the ultimate purpose is not to abandon any connection
Introduction
11
with the manifested creation and dissolve oneself, but to build up
a vehicle in which the fullness of the Self can be experienced
permanently, even while living in the physical world. This body of
immortality corresponds to what the Christian tradition has called
the glorious body and to the paramam vapuḥ of the Upanishads. It
is similar in many ways, if not identical, to the lapis
philosophorum or philosophers’ stone of the alchemists, and to the
Grail, heart of the western esoteric tradition.
Awakening the Third Eye lays the foundations for an experiential
approach to a work of inner alchemy. Many of the techniques
given in the beginning are not to be regarded as ‘alchemical’ in a
strict sense, but as a necessary preparation without which the
more advanced phases of the work would not make any sense.
Rather than first developing theoretical aspects at length,
indications will gradually be given throughout this book and the
following ones to clarify the purposes and principles of a work of
inner alchemy. The nature of our topic will also provide ample
opportunities to develop various aspects related to subtle bodies.

Chapter 1 – Principles and Method of the Work


1.1 Do not force, do not concentrate, just be aware
Any authentic spiritual work has finding the Self as a primary
aim, and the Clairvision techniques are no exception. The essential
purpose of the process is to ‘be more’. It is common to hear that
human beings are only using a small fraction of their potential.
Their lives are confined within a limited range of thoughts,
emotions, sensations and other modalities of conscious existence,
and yet in most cases they remain completely unaware of these
limitations. Plato’s myth of the cave, even though formulated 24
centuries ago, remains perfectly relevant: if you have always lived
inside a dark cellar, to you this cellar is not a cellar, it is the
whole universe. You can’t even conceive of the wonder waiting for
you if you were to step out and walk in the real world. The work
suggested in this book is all about stepping out of the cellar and
starting to behold the magnificence of the world as seen from the
third eye.
In India, the coconut is considered to be of deep symbolic
significance and is used in fire rituals (yajñās) because it has ‘three
eyes’. Two of these are ‘blind’, meaning they can’t be pierced to
reach the milk, while the third one, in the middle, opens to the
inside of the fruit. Similarly, the third eye is fundamentally the
gate that leads to the inner worlds. Therefore this eye allows you
to know yourself to a depth that surpasses all conventional
methods of psychotherapy or any method based on analysing with
the discursive mind.
Developing the third eye is a direct way of expanding your
conscious universe and discovering your essential values, so that
you may fathom your own mystery. Moreover, it is simple. Simple
does not necessarily mean easy, but this work does not require
complicated theories or lengthy discussions. Its direction is
essentially experiential, for the purpose is clearly to be more. And
being is the most simple thing in the world. A constant
preoccupation while writing this manual was to relate theory to
experience and to give techniques and keys to enable you to
perceive for yourself.
13
The first three chapters are devoted to getting into the main
aspects of the practice. The remaining chapters are more or less
independent of each other, so that it is quite possible to read them
in the order that feels most natural to you.
Before starting the first technique let us give some basic advice
regarding the principles and method of the work.
You should not be confused by the fact that our purpose is a new
clairvoyance, or vision of the Self. Truly, the Self is already there,
waiting for you in the background of yourself. You are not going
to ‘build’ the Self and its vision, you are going to reveal them or
rather allow them to reveal themselves. Spiritual development is
certainly a fight, but the main weapon in this fight is letting go.
In this perspective of opening it is not appropriate to concentrate,
to try hard or to force. If you were to do so, what would happen?
You would operate from your ordinary mind, meaning that
fraction of yourself with which you presently think – the
discursive mind that goes on talking in your head all the time. You
have been conditioned from an early age to do everything from
the mind. Therefore if you try to ‘do’ the perception business, you
are likely to remain caught in your talking mind – a layer which
is notoriously unfit for any form of spiritual perception.
Stop doing. Be fully aware, but just aware. Allow what is hidden in
the depths to come through and be revealed to your consciousness.
Don’t do anything, let things happen. Flow with what comes.
In the physical world when you want something you have to strive
for it. But in the spiritual worlds everything is reversed, as on the
other side of a mirror. If you want something you have to let it
come to you. It is a new skill which has to be developed. It could be
called ‘active letting go’ or ‘creative letting go’. It is the capacity to
be transparent and to let states of consciousness be revealed
through you.
Just be aware, and everything will happen.
1.2 No creative visualisation, no imagination, just
awareness
In the context of the Clairvision techniques it is advised that you
never try to visualise or imagine anything. If images, lights,
spiritual beings or anything else comes to your vision, that is fine.
But don’t make them up, don’t try to induce them. Do not actively
visualise any pattern into your field of consciousness.
Chapter 1 – Principles and Method of the Work
14
One of the reasons is: suppose an angel comes to you, truly. If you
have been trying to visualise angels every morning for a few
months how will you know whether it is a true angel or one that
you have made up.
The problem is not to get into the perception of images or lights.
If you put the techniques into practice, visions will come. The real
problem is, once these visions come to you, how to discern what is
real from what is a fancy of the mind. So the advice is: be
spontaneous! Never plan or try to attract a vision. Just practise
the techniques and then see what comes. This will make it much
easier to reach the stage where you can rely on your vision.
This approach should not be understood as a criticism of the paths
that use creative visualisation or imagination. There are many
ways. What is true in the context of one particular system of
development does not necessarily apply to others. In the Clairvision
style of work the motto is “just awareness”.

Grasping is the nature of the mind


What is the part of yourself that retracts when you do the
exercise indicated above (section 5.9)? It is the layer of ordinary
mental consciousness, which corresponds to the astral body of
Clairvision language (and of Steiner’s language), and to the manas
of the Indian tradition. It is a layer that functions through
reaction. The Tibetan masters use an excellent word to describe
this: grasping. Watch how your mind usually operates. A thought
comes to your mind, about your fridge, for instance. Immediately
the mind grasps the thought and chains another to it. It is like a
reaction to the previous thought. You think, “I have to go to the
supermarket, to fill up the fridge.” And then another grasping
takes place, another thought is linked to the former one: “I also
have to go to the bank”… and so on. A chain of thoughts is woven,
taking you far from the original thought.
During eye contact, your own experience will confirm how
relevant the word ‘grasping’ is, to describe this quick little
reaction that makes you lose your perception of the blurry image,
and projects you back into the sharp physical image. When this
happens, you definitely feel a kind of little contraction – not a
physical one, but a grasping of the mind.
Subtle perception requires letting go, and that is exactly what the
ordinary mental consciousness, the manas-mind, cannot cope with.
The mind has to grasp, that is its very nature. The manas-mind
grasps you back into the physical image, just as a muscle of the
physical body becomes tense in a situation of emotional stress.

Chapter 5 – Seeing

It is essential that you keep watching this process carefully. Go
back into the focus in the third eye and into the seeingness, let
the image become altered again… and suddenly, another grasping
of the mind takes place, and all the perceptions disappear. When a
master like Sri Aurobindo says that a silent mind is a prerequisite
for higher yogic experience, nothing else is meant than an
eradication of those graspings. The more you watch the graspings,
the more they will appear to you as something superimposed on
your natural perception.


5.11 Which state of perception is the altered one?


Let us develop this last point, because it has immense repercussions
on the way we see the world.
When people start working on themselves, they usually have an
implicit preconception: They consider that the world, the way
they see it every day through their mind, is the ‘real one’. And
they infer that auras and spiritual beings can be superimposed on
this vision of the physical reality, through some sort of additional
perception.
Now this exercise (5.9) demonstrates exactly the opposite. It is the
sharply outlined mental image that appears as an artificially
constructed reality. As soon as you let go of the graspings of the
mind, the image explodes into a fluid multitude of astral colours.
It is not when you see auras, spiritual beings, etc. that something
is added – it is when you see through the mind! The mind
contracts and adds a facade of rigid contours on top of the fluid
reality. The more you get to see the functioning of your mind,
the more you realize that it is a kind of cramp. Release the cramp
and the sharp physical reality disappears: the non-physical worlds
open to you.
All this is a gradual process of course, it is not going to happen
overnight. The mind is tenacious, it is not going to let go of you
too quickly. Nevertheless, when you do the work, a new perception
slowly develops. From time to time, you find yourself just ‘being’.
It is a very simple and innocent state of consciousness. And in this
simplicity, auras and other worlds are perceived.
Most of the time you are caught in the usual functioning of the
mind. But as you advance, the mind appears more and more like a
crust on top of your being. It becomes obvious that the mind is
something added, superimposed. It is only by clinging and grasping
that it can operate. So you automatically start to regard the sharp
Chapter 5 – Seeing

images as something artificially constructed by the mind, and the
fluid level of lights and colours as the reality behind it. You begin
to be more and more interested in seeing the world the way it is,
and not the way your mind makes it up.
One of the reasons I insist on this point is that it is not a
philosophical theory but something you can observe easily in
yourself, through the practice. As you keep on working with
exercise 5.9, the graspings of the mind will become more and more
obvious to you.

The work on the etheric body


Before resuming our exercises on the channels of the etheric body,
let us dwell on some of the aims of this part of the work. You
must have noticed, and there is nothing surprising about this, that
a strong awareness of the third eye tends to reinforce the
vibration along the channels. The more you are in the eye, the
more you feel the vibration in the meridians. This is very logical
since the eye is the main switch of the body of energy. By
operating the switch, you activate circulations of vibration all over
the body.
But the opposite is also true! When you awaken a strong vibration
in the meridians, you can feel the vibration in your eye better.
Often, just by rubbing your hands and stimulating the tingling
energy in them, an immediate boost can be felt in your eye. The
eye appears more tangible, denser, more ‘crystallised’ and more
active.
There is a profound mechanism behind this simple finding. The
etheric layer is not a bunch of disassociated patches, it is a
coherent layer. It has a unity. All its parts are much more directly
interconnected than the different parts of the physical body.
Because of the fluid nature of the etheric body, any wave of
vibration in one of its parts will resonate with the whole layer. So
when you shake or rub your hands and awaken a strong vibration
in them, the whole of the etheric layer is stimulated and,
therefore, so is the etheric part of your third eye. One of the
results will be a boost to your clairvoyance.
The third eye is made of different parts. One of its parts belongs
to the astral layer, another to the etheric layer. It is only when all
the parts are fully built and communicating with each other that
your clairvoyance becomes reliable. Imagine a one metre long pipe.
If even one millimetre of this pipe is blocked, then neither water
nor air can flow through. You can’t even see through the pipe.
This is why, in order to develop your vision of non-physical
realms, it is so valuable to proceed in this work of developing the
etheric body. While implementing the practices on ‘seeing’
84
(Chapters 5 and 7), it is a good idea to do a few channel releases at
the beginning and in the middle of the sessions.
Later on, in the process of building the body of immortality,
channel release will be resumed on a higher mode. The purpose will
then be to infuse the consciousness of the Higher Self into the
etheric layer, in quest of the Life-Spirit or trans-substantiated
etheric body, one of the cornerstones of the glorious body. The
present phase of channel release, even though humble, has a value
in preparing for these summits to come, by initiating a connection
between the etheric and your conscious self.

The whole book can be downloaded from PDFDRIVE.COM

Table of Contents
Introduction
A systematic method
Chapter 1 – Principles and Method of the Work
1.1 Do not force, do not concentrate, just be aware
1.2 No creative visualisation, no imagination, just awareness
1.3 Trust your experience
1.4 Don’t analyse during an experience
1.5 Psychic protection
1.6 Practise, practise, practise…
1.7 Why delay?
1.8 Play with the techniques
1.9 Remain relative
Chapter 2 – The Mysteries of the Larynx
2.1 Throat friction
2.2 Purposes and effects of the throat friction
2.3 The mysteries of the larynx
2.4 Humming sound and the magic of bees
Chapter 3 – Awakening the Third Eye
3.1 What is the third eye?
3.2 First opening
3.3 Various experiences
3.4 Experiential references
3.5 If you are not feeling any vibration at all
3.6 More about the third eye
3.7 Third eye meditation
3.8 More humming/buzzing
3.9 How to organize your practice
3.10 The mysteries of the space
Chapter 4 – Channel Release: Let It Flow!
4.1 Channel release
4.2 Connected shaking
4.3 Connected rubbing
4.4 Vibration = etheric
4.5 General advice concerning the work on the meridians
4.6 Shou jue yin, ‘Heart Constrictor Meridian’
4.7 Shou shao yin, ‘Heart Meridian’
4.8 Shou tai yin, ‘Lung Meridian’
4.9 More details on the paths of the meridians
4.10 The different levels of perception of energy circulations
4.11 Practice
4.12 Releasing negative energies
Chapter 5 – Seeing
5.1 The path of the seers
5.2 Concerning the practices of eye contact
5.3 Reconnection with the space
5.4 Eye contact with focus in the eye and ‘seeingness’
5.5 To end any practice of eye contact
5.6 To blink or not to blink
5.7 A few common experiences while practising eye contact
5.8 What to do with your experiences
5.9 Watching the graspings of the mind
5.10 Grasping is the nature of the mind
5.11 Which state of perception is the altered one?
5.12 Atlantean climax
5.13 Eye contact, full technique: the triple process of vision,
including the vision of the heart
Chapter 6 – Channel Release 2
6.1 The work on the etheric body
6.2 Zu shao yang, ‘Gallbladder’ Meridian
6.3 The full technique of channel release on a meridian
6.4 Variation without rubbing
6.5 The sound of the vibration
6.6 Zu tai yang, ‘Urinary Bladder’ Meridian
6.7 The cosmos in your hands
6.8 Gestures of energy
6.9 The energy between your hands
6.10 Cosmic antenna
6.11 Ribcage practice
6.12 Zu yang ming, ‘Stomach’ Meridian
Table of Contents
6.13 Jnāna-mudrā and the energy in the lungs
Chapter 7 – Seeing (2)
7.1 The use of darkness
7.2 Use more candles and oil lamps, less electricity
7.3 In quest of the ultimate wall rendering
7.4 The white shawl
7.5 The basic technique for seeing an aura
7.6 Where exactly should you look while doing eye contact?
7.7 Channel release from time to time
7.8 Working on auras
7.9 Aura testing
7.10 Vata, pitta, kapha
7.11 Trans-verbal communication
7.12 More about seeingness
7.13 Intermezzo: which eye are you?
7.14 The yes/yes technique
Chapter 8 – Practices on the Etheric Body
8.1 The etheric layer as a whole
8.2 The life ether
8.3 Exploring different qualities of the etheric
8.4 Exploring the limits
8.5 Exploring the circulations of the etheric
8.6 The etheric vibration outside your body
8.7 Vibration meals
8.8 The vibration in your bath
8.9 Etheric excretion at the end of a bath
8.10 Loo practice
8.11 Releasing into the earth
8.12 Tree hugging
8.13 Crying
8.14 Sucking the citrus
8.15 Yawning
8.16 The right side of the ring
8.17 A note about wrist watches
Chapter 9 – Awareness
9.1 Centredness through vigilance in the eye
9.2 Inner alchemy
Table of Contents
9.3 Permanence in the eye
9.4 The harvest of permanence
9.5 Practice
9.6 Practice
9.7 Practice
9.8 Test
9.9 Intermezzo: changes in vision
9.10 The eye-heart awareness
9.11 When to start?
Chapter 10 – A Few Experiences on the Way
10.1 Tingling in various body parts
10.2 Let things come and go
10.3 If a meditation experience becomes too intense…
10.4 Feeling vibration higher up than between the eyebrows
10.5 Feeling heat
10.6 The breath stops
10.7 The pressure in the eye becomes uncomfortable
10.8 Controlling headaches
10.9 Other possible causes of headaches
10.10 Dizziness
10.11 Getting fed-up or emotional
10.12 Hearing sounds
10.13 When there is no energy, the energy is somewhere else!
10.14 After sattva: tamas. To fight tamas: rajas.
Chapter 11 – The Art of Tuning In
11.1 Tuning in
11.2 Drinking colours
11.3 Flowers, plants and elemental beings
11.4 Fighting mental rigidity
11.5 Trees
11.6 Practice
11.7 Sexually-related feelings
11.8 You are what you eat
11.9 A few suggestions on how to communicate with angels
Chapter 12 – Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells
12.1 The first reflex whenever you hear cancer
12.2 Commonly observed facts about the lines
Table of Contents
12.3 Ley lines and earth lines
12.4 What are these lines?
12.5 Energy wells
12.6 Lines and spiritual practice
12.7 Dowsing the lines: the gear
12.8 Learning the eye-belly attitude for dowsing
12.9 Dowsing technique
12.10 Dowsing the lines: do’s and don’ts
12.11 The belly signal
12.12 Feeling the lines without rods
12.13 Seeing the lines
12.14 The aura of the dowser
12.15 Diagnosing geopathic stress
12.16 Finding energy wells
12.17 Can one neutralise noxious earth lines?
12.18 A geography of enlightenment
Chapter 13 – Night Practice 1: Theoretical Aspects
13.1 Critical times
13.2 Initiatory death and the mystery of the threshold
13.3 Sleep and subtle bodies
13.4 Angels and the chiselling of the organs of clairvoyance
13.5 Night practice and the etheric body
13.6 Night practice and awareness in the eye (1)
13.7 Third eye flaring – a possible experience
13.8 Night practice and awareness in the eye (2)
13.9 Allow enough normal sleep
Chapter 14 – Night Practice 2: Instructions for the
Technique
14.1 If you are reading the instructions for friends
14.2 If you do not have much time
Chapter 15 – Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of
the Technique
15.1 Preparation
15.2 Phase 1: exhaling
15.3 Phase 2a: circulating in the body parts
15.4 Phase 2b: awareness and seeingness of the organs
15.5 Phase 3: awareness of the breath and countdowns
Table of Contents
15.6 Phase 3c: vibration in the nose while inhaling
15.7 Phase 4
15.8 Phase 5: recalling the images of the day
15.9 Phase 6: spontaneous images
15.10 Experiences during night practice
15.11 Taking the night at both ends
15.12 Morning sharing
15.13 A symbol used as a bridge
15.14 Keep recalling your dreams across the buffer zone
15.15 Use the memory of the third eye
15.16 If you can never remember anything
15.17 Variation for acupuncturists
Chapter 16 – Complementary Techniques
16.1 Neti
16.2 The use of rhythms
16.3 Fasting for openings
16.4 Proper management of sexual energies
16.5 Vaccinations
16.6 Telephone
16.7 Moxas on bai hui (Governor 20)
16.8 Pony tail
16.9 Blind walking
Chapter 17 – Protection
Protection level 1: Reinforcing the structure
17.1 Simple things first
17.2 Get enough sleep and rest
17.3 The right diet
17.4 The right physical exercise
17.5 Be happy!
17.6 Alcohol and spiritual work – a dangerous mixture
Protection level 2: Correct management of energies
17.7 Choose your colours
17.8 Find your spot
17.9 How to purify a room
17.10 Work in harmony with the Moon cycle
17.11 Frequent use of running water
17.12 Releasing energies into the elements
Table of Contents
Chapter 18 – Protection: Sealing the Aura (1)
18.1 The fight or flight reaction
18.2 Sealing the aura: why and when
18.3 Opening and closing the aura, introductory practice
18.4 Protection through being in the eye
18.5 The will centre
18.6 Practice
18.7 Eye-belly awareness
18.8 Walking from the belly
18.9 Stimulating the fire
Chapter 19 – Baby Work
19.1 The aura of a pregnant woman
19.2 The aura of a newborn baby
19.3 Babies are very aware in their eye
19.4 Watching baby fall asleep
19.5 Your baby as a meditation teacher
19.6 A few words to the travellers
19.7 How long does it last?
19.8 The fabulous babies
Chapter 20 – Protection: Sealing the Aura (2)
20.1 Where are you speaking from?
20.2 Speaking from different levels
20.3 What if you have to display authority?
20.4 The eye-belly power
20.5 Inhaling/exhaling
20.6 Closing the aura through deep exhalation
20.7 Drawing energy in and out
20.8 Exhaling when facing a crowd
20.9 The same protection using normal breathing
20.10 Sealing the aura
20.11 Practice
20.12 What if nothing works?
20.13 Permanent awareness in the will centre
20.14 Continual abdominal breathing
20.15 Stambhāsana
20.16 Practice
Chapter 21 – There Is No Real Protection But the Power
of Truth
Table of Contents
21.1 Power of Truth
Chapter 22 – Glimpses of What Comes Next
22.1 ISIS, the Clairvision techniques of regression
22.2 The vision of thought forms
22.3 The transformation of thinking
22.4 The quest for the Grail

Featured

The Power of Now. A Guide to SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT

The Power of Now. A Guide to SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT

This book can be downloaded from this link below or visit pdfdrive.com and search for The Power of Now. A Guide to SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT

  1. YOU ARE NOT YOUR MIND
  2. The Greatest Obstacle to Enlightenment
    Enlightenment – what is that?
    A beggar had been sitting by the side of a road for over thirty years. One day a
    stranger walked by. “Spare some change?” mumbled the beggar, mechanically
    holding out his old baseball cap. “I have nothing to give you,” said the stranger. Then
    he asked: “What’s that you are sitting on?” “Nothing,” replied the beggar. “Just an old
    box. I have been sitting on it for as long as I can remember.” “Ever looked inside?”
    asked the stranger. “No,” said the beggar. “What’s the point? There’s nothing in
    there.” “Have a look inside,” insisted the stranger. The beggar managed to pry open
    the lid. With astonishment, disbelief, and elation, he saw that the box was filled with
    gold.
    I am that stranger who has nothing to give you and who is telling you to look
    inside. Not inside any box, as in the parable, but somewhere even closer: inside
    yourself.
    “But I am not a beggar,” I can hear you say.
    Those who have not found their true wealth, which is the radiant joy of Being
    and the deep, unshakable peace that comes with it, are beggars, even if they have
    great material wealth. They are looking outside for scraps of pleasure or fulfillment,
    for validation, security, or love, while they have a treasure within that not only
    includes all those things but is infinitely greater than anything the world can offer.
    The word enlightenment conjures up the idea of some super-human
    accomplishment, and the ego likes to keep it that way, but it is simply your natural
    state of felt oneness with Being. It is a state of connectedness with something
    immeasurable and indestructible, something that, almost paradoxically, is essentially
    you and yet is much greater than you. It is finding your true nature beyond name and
    form. The inability to feel this connectedness gives rise to the illusion of separation,
    from yourself and from the world around you. You then perceive yourself,
    consciously or unconsciously, as an isolated fragment. Fear arises, and conflict within
    and without becomes the norm.
    I love the Buddha’s simple definition of enlightenment as “the end of suffering.”
    There is nothing superhuman in that, is there? Of course, as a definition, it is
    13
    incomplete. It only tells you what enlightenment is not: no suffering. But what’s left
    when there is no more suffering? The Buddha is silent on that, and his silence implies
    that you’ll have to find out for yourself. He uses a negative definition so that the mind
    cannot make it into something to believe in or into a superhuman accomplishment, a
    goal that is impossible for you to attain. Despite this precaution, the majority of
    Buddhists still believe that enlightenment is for the Buddha, not for them, at least not
    in this lifetime. You used the word Being. Can you explain what you mean by that?
    Being is the eternal, ever-present One Life beyond the myriad forms of life that
    are subject to birth and death. However, Being is not only beyond but also deep
    within every form as its innermost invisible and indestructible essence. This means
    that it is accessible to you now as your own deepest self, your true nature. But don’t
    seek to grasp it with your mind. Don’t try to understand it. You can know it only
    when the mind is still. When you are present, when your attention is fully and
    intensely in the Now, Being can be felt, but it can never be understood mentally. To
    regain awareness of Being and to abide in that state of “feeling-realization” is
    enlightenment. When you say Being, are you talking about God? If you are, then why don’t you
    say it?
    The word God has become empty of meaning through thousands of years of
    misuse. I use it sometimes, but I do so sparingly. By misuse, I mean that people who
    have never even glimpsed the realm of the sacred, the infinite vastness behind that
    word, use it with great conviction, as if they knew what they are talking about. Or
    they argue against it, as if they knew what it is that they are denying. This misuse
    gives rise to absurd beliefs, assertions, and egoic delusions, such as “My or our God
    is the only true God, and your God is false,” or Nietzsche’s famous statement “God is
    dead.”
    The word God has become a closed concept. The moment the word is uttered, a
    mental image is created, no longer, perhaps, of an old man with a white beard, but
    still a mental representation of someone or something outside you, and, yes, almost
    inevitably a male someone or something.
    Neither God nor Being nor any other word can define or explain the ineffable
    reality behind the word, so the only important question is whether the word is a help
    or a hindrance in enabling you to experience That toward which it points. Does it
    14
    point beyond itself to that transcendental reality, or does it lend itself too easily to
    becoming no more than an idea in your head that you believe in, a mental idol?
    The word Being explains nothing, but nor does God. Being, however, has the
    advantage that it is an open concept. It does not reduce the infinite invisible to a finite
    entity. It is impossible to form a mental image of it. Nobody can claim exclusive
    possession of Being. It is your very essence, and it is immediately accessible to you
    as the feeling of your own presence, the realization I am that is prior to I am this or I
    am that. So it is only a small step from the word Being to the experience of Being.
  3. What is the greatest obstacle to experiencing this reality?
    Identification with your mind, which causes thought to become compulsive. Not
    to be able to stop thinking is a dreadful affliction, but we don’t realize this because
    almost everybody is suffering from it, so it is considered normal. This incessant
    mental noise prevents you from finding that realm of inner stillness that is inseparable
    from Being. It also creates a false mind-made self that casts a shadow of fear and
    suffering. We will look at all that in more detail later.
    The philosopher Descartes believed that he had found the most fundamental
    truth when he made his famous statement: “I think, therefore I am.” He had, in fact,
    given expression to the most basic error: to equate thinking with Being and identity
    with thinking. The compulsive thinker, which means almost everyone, lives in a state
    of apparent separateness, in an insanely complex world of continuous problems and
    conflict, a world that reflects the ever-increasing fragmentation of the mind.
    Enlightenment is a state of wholeness, of being “at one” and therefore at peace. At
    one with life in its manifested aspect, the world, as well as with your deepest self and
    life unmanifested – at one with Being. Enlightenment is not only the end of suffering
    and of continuous conflict within and without, but also the end of the dreadful
    enslavement to incessant thinking. What an incredible liberation this is!
    Identification with your mind creates an opaque screen of concepts, labels,
    images, words, judgments, and definitions that blocks all true relationship. It comes
    between you and yourself, between you and your fellow man and woman, between
    you and nature, between you and God. It is this screen of thought that creates the
    illusion of separateness, the illusion that there is you and a totally separate “other.”
    You then forget the essential fact that, underneath the level of physical appearances
    and separate forms, you are one with all that is. By “forget,” I mean that you can no
    longer feel this oneness as self-evident reality. You may believe it to be true, but you
    no longer know it to be true. A belief may be comforting. Only through your own
    experience, however, does it become liberating.
    15
    Thinking has become a disease. Disease happens when things get out of balance.
    For example, there is nothing wrong with cells dividing and multiplying in the body,
    but when this process continues in disregard of the total organism, cells proliferate
    and we have disease.
    Note: The mind is a superb instrument if used rightly. Used wrongly, however, it
    becomes very destructive. To put it more accurately, it is not so much that you use
    your mind wrongly – you usually don’t use it at all. It uses you. This is the disease.
    You believe that you are your mind. This is the delusion. The instrument has taken
    you over. I don’t quite agree. It is true that I do a lot of aimless thinking, like most people,
    but I can still choose to use my mind to get and accomplish things, and I do that all
    the time.
    Just because you can solve a crossword puzzle or build an atom bomb doesn’t
    mean that you use your mind. Just as dogs love to chew bones, the mind loves to get
    its teeth into problems. That’s why it does crossword puzzles and builds atom bombs.
    You have no interest in either. Let me ask you this: can you be free of your mind
    whenever you want to? Have you found the “off” button? You mean stop thinking altogether?
  4. No, I can’t, except maybe for a moment or
    two.
    Then the mind is using you. You are unconsciously identified with it, so you
    don’t even know that you are its slave. It’s almost as if you were possessed without
    knowing it, and so you take the possessing entity to be yourself. The beginning of
    freedom is the realization that you are not the possessing entity – the thinker.
    Knowing this enables you to observe the entity. The moment you start watching the
    thinker, a higher level of consciousness becomes activated. You then begin to realize
    that there is a vast realm of intelligence beyond thought, that thought is only a tiny
    aspect of that intelligence. You also realize that all the things that truly matter –
    beauty, love, creativity, joy, inner peace – arise from beyond the mind. You begin to
    awaken.
    Freeing yourself from your mind
    What exactly do you mean by “watching the thinker”?
    When someone goes to the doctor and says, “I hear a voice in my head,” he or she
    will most likely be sent to a psychiatrist. The fact is that, in a very similar way,
    16
    virtually everyone hears a voice, or several voices, in their head all the time: the
    involuntary thought processes that you don’t realize you have the power to stop.
    Continuous monologues or dialogues.
    You have probably come across “mad” people in the street incessantly talking or
    muttering to themselves. Well, that’s not much different from what you and all other
    “normal” people do, except that you don’t do it out loud. The voice comments,
    speculates, judges, compares, complains, likes, dislikes, and so on. The voice isn’t
    necessarily relevant to the situation you find yourself in at the time; it may be
    reviving the recent or distant past or rehearsing or imagining possible future
    situations. Here it often imagines things going wrong and negative outcomes; this is
    called worry. Sometimes this soundtrack is accompanied by visual images or “mental
    movies.” Even if the voice is relevant to the situation at hand, it will interpret it in
    terms of the past. This is because the voice belongs to your conditioned mind, which
    is the result of all your past history as well as of the collective cultural mind-set you
    inherited. So you see and judge the present through the eyes of the past and get a
    totally distorted view of it. It is not uncommon for the voice to be a person’s own
    worst enemy. Many people live with a tormentor in their head that continuously
    attacks and punishes them and drains them of vital energy. It is the cause of untold
    misery and unhappiness, as well as of disease.
    The good news is that you can free yourself from your mind. This is the only
    true liberation. You can take the first step right now. Start listening to the voice in
    your head as often as you can. Pay particular attention to any repetitive thought
    patterns, those old gramophone records that have been playing in your head perhaps
    for many years. This is what I mean by “watching the thinker,” which is another way
    of saying: listen to the voice in your head, be there as the witnessing presence.
    When you listen to that voice, listen to it impartially. That is to say, do not
    judge. Do not judge or condemn what you hear, for doing so would mean that the
    same voice has come in again through the back door. You’ll soon realize: there is the
    voice, and here I am listening to it, watching it. This I am realization, this sense of
    your own presence, is not a thought. It arises from beyond the mind. So when you listen to a thought, you are aware not only of the thought but also
    of yourself as the witness of the thought. A new dimension of consciousness has
    come in. As you listen to the thought, you feel a conscious presence – your deeper
    self – behind or underneath the thought, as it were. The thought then loses its power
    over you and quickly subsides, because you are no longer energizing the mind
    through identification with it. This is the beginning of the end of involuntary and
    17
    compulsive thinking. When a thought subsides, you experience a discontinuity in the
    mental stream – a gap of “no-mind.” At first, the gaps will be short, a few seconds
    perhaps, but gradually they will become longer. When these gaps occur, you feel a
    certain stillness and peace inside you. This is the beginning of your natural state of
    felt oneness with Being, which is usually obscured by the mind. With practice, the
    sense of stillness and peace will deepen. In fact, there is no end to its depth. You will
    also feel a subtle emanation of joy arising from deep within: the joy of Being.
    It is not a trancelike state. Not at all. There is no loss of consciousness here. The
    opposite is the case. If the price of peace were a lowering of your consciousness, and
    the price of stillness a lack of vitality and alertness, then they would not be worth
    having. In this state of inner connectedness, you are much more alert, more awake
    than in the mind-identified state. You are fully present. It also raises the vibrational
    frequency of the energy field that gives life to the physical body.
    As you go more deeply into this realm of no-mind, as it is sometimes called in
    the East, you realize the state of pure consciousness. In that state, you feel your own
    presence with such intensity and such joy that all thinking, all emotions, your
    physical body, as well as the whole external world become relatively insignificant in
    comparison to it. And yet this is not a selfish but a selfless state. It takes you beyond
    what you previously thought of as “your self.” That presence is essentially you and at
    the same time inconceivably greater than you. What I am trying to convey here may
    sound paradoxical or even contradictory, but there is no other way that I can express
    it.
    Instead of “watching the thinker,” you can also create a gap in the mind stream
    simply by directing the focus of your attention into the Now. Just become intensely
    conscious of the present moment. This is a deeply satisfying thing to do. In this way,
    you draw consciousness away from mind activity and create a gap of no-mind in
    which you are highly alert and aware but not thinking. This is the essence of
    meditation. In your everyday life, you can practice this by taking any routine activity
    that normally is only a means to an end and giving it your fullest attention, so that it
    becomes an end in itself. For example, every time you walk up and down the stairs in
    your house or place of work, pay close attention to every step, every movement, even
    your breathing. Be totally present. Or when you wash your hands, pay attention to all
    the sense perceptions associated with the activity: the sound and feel of the water, the
    movement of your hands, the scent of the soap, and so on. Or when you get into your
    car, after you close the door, pause for a few seconds and observe the flow of your
    breath. Become aware of a silent but powerful sense of presence. There is one certain
    18
    criterion by which you can measure your success in this practice: the degree of peace
    that you feel within.
    So the single most vital step on your journey toward enlightenment is this: learn
    to disidentify from your mind. Every time you create a gap in the stream of mind, the
    light of your consciousness grows stronger. One day you may catch yourself smiling
    at the voice in your head, as you would smile at the antics of a child. This means that
    you no longer take the content of your mind all that seriously, as your sense of self
    does not depend on it.
    Enlightenment: Rising above Thought
    Isn’t thinking essential in order to survive in this world?
    Your mind is an instrument, a tool. It is there to be used for a specific task, and when
    the task is completed, you lay it down. As it is, I would say about 80 to 90 percent of
    most people’s thinking is not only repetitive and useless, but because of its
    dysfunctional and often negative nature, much of it is also harmful. Observe your
    mind and you will find this to be true. It causes a serious leakage of vital energy.
    This kind of compulsive thinking is actually an addiction. What characterizes an
    addiction? Quite simply this: you no longer feel that you have the choice to stop. It
    seems stronger than you. It also gives you a false sense of pleasure, pleasure that
    invariably turns into pain.

Why should we be addicted to thinking?
Because you are identified with it, which means that you derive your sense of self
from the content and activity of your mind.
Because you believe that you would cease to be if you stopped thinking. As you
grow up, you form a mental image of who you are, based on your personal and
cultural conditioning. We may call this phantom self the ego. It consists of mind
activity and can only be kept going through constant thinking. The term ego means
different things to different people, but when I use it here it means a false self, created
by unconscious identification with the mind.
To the ego, the present moment hardly exists. Only past and future are
considered important. This total reversal of the truth accounts for the fact that in the
ego mode the mind is so dysfunctional. It is always concerned with keeping the past
alive, because without it – who are you? It constantly projects itself into the future to
ensure its continued survival and to seek some kind of release or fulfillment there. It
says: “One day, when this, that, or the other happens, I am going to be okay, happy, at
19
peace.” Even when the ego seems to be concerned with the present, it is not the
present that it sees: It misperceives it completely because it looks at it through the
eyes of the past. Or it reduces the present to a means to an end, an end that always
lies in the mind-projected future. Observe your mind and you’ll see that this is how it
works.
The present moment holds the key to liberation. But you cannot find the present
moment as long as you are your mind.

I don’t want to lose my ability to analyze and discriminate. I wouldn’t mind learning
to think more clearly, in a more focused way, but I don’t want to lose my mind. The
gift of thought is the most precious thing we have. Without it, we would just be
another species of animal.
The predominance of mind is no more than a stage in the evolution of consciousness.
We need to go on to the next stage now as a matter of urgency; otherwise, we will be
destroyed by the mind, which has grown into a monster. I will talk about this in more
detail later. Thinking and consciousness are not synonymous. Thinking is only a
small aspect of consciousness. Thought cannot exist without consciousness, but
consciousness does not need thought.
Enlightenment means rising above thought, not falling back to a level below
thought, the level of an animal or a plant. In the enlightened state, you still use your
thinking mind when needed, but in a much more focused and effective way than
before. You use it mostly for practical purposes, but you are free of the involuntary
internal dialogue, and there is inner stillness. When you do use your mind, and
particularly when a creative solution is needed, you oscillate every few minutes or so
between thought and stillness, between mind and no-mind. No-mind is consciousness
without thought. Only in that way is it possible to think creatively, because only in
that way does thought have any real power. Thought alone, when it is no longer
connected with the much vaster realm of consciousness, quickly becomes barren,
insane, destructive.
The mind is essentially a survival machine. Attack and defense against other
minds, gathering, storing, and analyzing information – this is what it is good at, but it
is not at all creative. All true artists, whether they know it or not, create from a place
of no-mind, from inner stillness. The mind then gives form to the creative impulse or
insight. Even the great scientists have reported that their creative breakthroughs came
at a time of mental quietude. The surprising result of a nation-wide inquiry among
America’s most eminent mathematicians, including Einstein, to find out their working
methods, was that thinking “plays only a subordinate part in the brief, decisive phase
20
of the creative act itself.”1 So I would say that the simple reason why the majority of
scientists are not creative is not because they don’t know how to think but because
they don’t know how to stop thinking!
It wasn’t through the mind, through thinking, that the miracle that is life on earth
or your body were created and are being sustained. There is clearly an intelligence at
work that is far greater than the mind. How can a single human cell measuring
1/1,000 of an inch across contain instructions within its DNA that would fill 1,000
books of 600 pages each? The more we learn about the workings of the body, the
more we realize just how vast is the intelligence at work within it and how little we
know. When the mind reconnects with that, it becomes a most wonderful tool. It then
serves something greater than itself.

You can download the whole book from pdfdrive.com and continue to read and learn more about spiritual growth, raising higher awareness

Featured

A NEW EARTH. Awakening to Your Life`s Purpose

A NEW EARTH. Awakening to Your Life`s Purpose

This book can be downloaded from the link below or visit pdfdrive.com and search for “A NEW EARTH. Awakening to Your Life`s Purpose”

THE PURPOSE OF THIS BOOK


Is humanity ready for a transformation of consciousness, an inner
flowering so radical and profound that compared to it the flowering of
plants, no matter how beautiful, is only a pale reflection? Can human beings
lose the density of their conditioned mind structures and become like
crystals or precious stones, so to speak, transparent to the light of
consciousness? Can they defy the gravitational pull of materialism and
materiality and rise above identification with form that keeps the ego in
place and condemns them to imprisonment within their own personality?
The possibility of such a transformation has been the central message
of the great wisdom teachings of humankind. The messengers – Buddha,
Jesus, and others, not all of them known – were humanity’s early flowers.
They were precursors, rare and precious beings. A widespread flowering was
not yet possible at that time, and their message became largely
misunderstood and often greatly distorted. It certainly did not transform
human behavior, except in a small minority of people.
Is humanity more ready now than at the time of those early teachers?
Why should this be so? What can you do, if anything, to bring about or
accelerate this inner shift? What is it that characterizes the old egoic state of
consciousness, and by what signs is the new emerging consciousness
recognized? These and other essential questions will be addressed in this
book. More important, this book itself is a transformational device that has
come out of the arising new consciousness. The ideas and concepts
presented here may be important, but they are secondary. They are no more
than signposts pointing toward awakening. As you read, a shift takes place
within you.


This book’s main purpose is not to add new information or beliefs to
your mind or to try to convince you of anything, but to bring about a shift in
consciousness; that is to say, to awaken. In that sense, this book is not
“interesting”. Interesting means you can keep your distance, play around
with ideas and concepts in your mind, agree or disagree. This book is about
you. It will change your state of consciousness or it will be meaningless. It
can only awaken those who are ready. Not everyone is ready yet, but many
are, and with each person who awakens, the momentum in the collective
consciousness grows, and it becomes easier for others. If you don’t know
what awakening means, read on. Only by awakening can you know the true
meaning of that word. A glimpse is enough to initiate the awakening process,
which is irreversible. For some, that glimpse will come while reading this
book. For many others who may not even have realized it, the process has
already begun. This book will help them recognize it. For some, it may have
begun through loss or suffering; for others, through coming into contact with
a spiritual teacher or teaching, through reading The Power of Now or some
other spiritually alive and therefore transformational book – or any
combination of the above. If the awakening process has begun in you , the
reading of this book will accelerate and intensify it.


An essential part of the awakening is the recognition of the
unawakened you, the ego as it thinks, speaks and acts, as well as the
recognition of the collectively conditioned mental processes that perpetuate
the unawakened state. That is why this book shows the main aspects of the
ego and how they operate in the individual as well as in the collective. This
is important for two related reasons: The first is that unless you know the
basic mechanics behind the workings of the ego, you won’t recognize it, and
it will trick you into identifying with it again and again. This means it takes
you over, an impostor pretending to be you. The second reason is that the act
of recognition itself is one of the ways in which awakening happens. When
you recognize the unconsciousness in you, that which makes the recognition
possible is the arising consciousness, is awakening. You cannot fight against
the ego and win, just as you cannot fight against darkness. The light of
consciousness is all that is necessary. You are that light.

OUR INHERITED DYSFUNCTION
If we look more deeply into humanity’s ancient religions and spiritual
traditions, we will find that underneath the many surface differences there
are two core insights that most of them agree on. The words they use to
describe those insights differ, yet they all point to a twofold fundamental
truth. The first part of this truth is the realization that the “normal” state of
mind of most human beings contains a strong element of what we might call
dysfunction or even madness. Certain teachings at the heart of Hinduism
perhaps come closest to seeing this dysfunction as a form of collective
mental illness. They call it maya, the veil of delusion. Ramana Maharshi,
one of the greatest Indian sages, bluntly states: “The mind is maya.”
Buddhism uses different terms. According to the Buddha, the human
mind in its normal state generates dukkha, which can be translated as
suffering, unsatisfactoriness, or just plain misery. He sees it as a
characteristic of the human condition. Wherever you go, whatever you do,
says the Buddha, you will encounter dukkha, and it will manifest in every
situation sooner or later.


According to Christian teachings, the normal collective state of
humanity is one of “original sin.” Sin is a word that has been greatly
misunderstood and misinterpreted. Literally translated from the ancient
Greek in which the New Testament was written, to sin means to miss the
mark, as an archer who misses the target, so to sin means to miss the point of
human existence. It means to live unskillfully, blindly, and thus to suffer and
cause suffering. Again, the term, stripped of its cultural baggage and
misinterpretations, points to the dysfunction inherent in the human
condition.


The achievements of humanity are impressive and undeniable. We
have created sublime works of music, literature, painting, architecture, and
sculpture. More recently, science and technology have brought about radical
changes in the way we live and have enabled us to do and create things that
would have been considered miraculous even two hundred years ago. No
doubt: The human mind is highly intelligent. Yet its very intelligence is
tainted by madness. Science and technology have magnified the destructive
impact that the dysfunction of the human mind has upon the planet, other
life­forms, and upon humans themselves. That is why the history of the
twentieth century is where that dysfunction, that collective insanity, can be
most clearly recognized. A further factor is that this dysfunction is actually
intensifying and accelerating.

This book can be downloaded from the link below or visit pdfdrive.com and search for “A NEW EARTH. Awakening to Your Life`s Purpose

When you don’t cover up the world with words and labels, a sense of
the miraculous returns to your life that was lost a long time ago when
humanity, instead of using thought, became possessed by thought. A depth
returns to your life. Things regain their newness, their freshness. And the
greatest miracle is the experiencing of your essential self as prior to any
words, thoughts, mental labels, and images. For this to happen, you need to
disentangle your sense of I, of Beingness, from all the things it has become
mixed up with, that is to say, identified with. That disentanglement is what
this book is about.


The quicker you are in attaching verbal or mental labels to things,
people, or situations, the more shallow and lifeless your reality becomes, and
the more deadened you become to reality, the miracle of life that
continuously unfolds within and around you. In this way, cleverness may be
gained, but wisdom is lost, and so are joy, love, creativity, and aliveness.
They are concealed in the still gap between the perception and the
interpretation. Of course we have to use words and thoughts. They have their
own beauty – but do we need to become imprisoned in them?
Words reduce reality to something the human mind can grasp, which
isn’t very much. Language consists of five basic sounds produced by the
vocal cords. They are the vowels a, e, i, o, u. The other sounds are
consonants produced by air pressure: s, f, g, and so forth. Do you believe
some combination of such basic sounds could ever explain who you are, or
the ultimate purpose of the universe, or even what a tree or stone is in its
depth?


THE ILLUSORY SELF


The word “I” embodies the greatest error and the deepest truth, depending
on how it is used. In conventional usage, it is not only one of the most
frequently used words in the language (together with the related words:
“me,” “my,” “mine,” and “myself”) but also one of the most misleading. In
normal everyday usage, “I” embodies the primordial error, a misperception
of who you are, an illusory sense of identity. This is the ego. This illusory
sense of self is what Albert Einstein, who had deep insights not only in to
the reality of space and time but also into human nature, referred to as “an
optical illusion of consciousness.” That illusory self then becomes the basis
for all further interpretations, or rather misinterpretations of reality, all
thought processes, interactions, and relationships. Your reality becomes a
reflection of the original illusion.


The good news is: If you can recognize illusion as illusion, it
dissolves. The recognition of illusion is also its ending. Its survival depends
on your mistaking it for reality. In the seeing of who you are not, the reality
of who you are emerges by itself. This is what happens as you slowly and
carefully read this and the next chapter, which are about the mechanics of the
false self we call the ego. So what is the nature of this illusory self?
What you usually refer to when you say “I” is not who you are. By a
monstrous act of reductionism, the infinite depth of who you are is confused
with a sound produced by the vocal cords or the thought of “I” in your mind
and whatever the “I” has identified with. So what do the usual “I” and the
related “me,” “my,” or “mine” refer to?

Featured

The time lapse between an internally sensed occurrence and the ego’s claim to authorship is about1/10,000th of a second. Once this gap is discovered, the ego loses its dominance. Few people know what it is to live without fear. But beyond fear lies joy, as the meaning and purpose of existence become transparent. Once this realization occurs, life becomes effortless, and the sources of suffering dissolve; suffering is only the price we pay for our attachments. A major deterrent to spiritual evolution and transcending identification of the self with one’s mind is the processing of data, symbols, and words via random mentalization, which is presumed to be“thinking.”One has the illusion that one couldn’t get through life unless one thinks. Tavistock Institute. Part 115

The time lapse between an internally sensed occurrence and the ego’s claim to authorship is about1/10,000th of a second. Once this gap is discovered, the ego loses its dominance. Few people know what it is to live without fear. But beyond fear lies joy, as the meaning and purpose of existence become transparent. Once this realization occurs, life becomes effortless, and the sources of suffering dissolve; suffering is only the price we pay for our attachments. A major deterrent to spiritual evolution and transcending identification of the self with one’s mind is the processing of data, symbols, and words via random mentalization, which is presumed to be“thinking.”One has the illusion that one couldn’t get through life unless one thinks. Tavistock Institute. Part 115

The “pathway of mind,” also called the “pathway of no mind,” is the pursuit of Truth via knowledge— through a thorough examination of the illusionary nature of ego and mind and their various programs. Enlightenment, then, occurs through a letting go of these false programs, whereby oneexperiences a realization of what is. In these contemplations, Dr. Hawkins provides the spiritualaspirant with clear direction to navigate out of the ego’s “house of mirrors. suffering. To let go of positionalities is to silence opinions, and to silence opinions is to let go ofpositionalities.Basic to the ego’s continuance and capacity to dominate is its claim to authorship of all subjectiveexperience.

The “I thought” is extremely quick in interjecting itself as the supposed cause of allaspects of one’s life. This is difficult to detect except by intense focus of attention during meditationon the origination of the thought stream.

The time lapse between an internally sensed occurrence and the ego’s claim to authorship is about1/10,000th of a second. Once this gap is discovered, the ego loses its dominance. It becomes obvious that one is the witness of phenomena and not the cause or doer of them. The self, then, becomesidentified as that which is being witnessed rather than as the witness or experiencer…. In summation,it can be said that the ego is a compilation of positionalities held together by vanity and fear. It isundone by radical humility, which undermines its propagation.To undo the dominance of mental content, it is necessary to remove the illusion that thoughts arepersonal; that they are valuable; or that they belong to, or originate from, one’s own self.

Like thebody, the mind and its contents are really a product of the world.The thought I know precludes the ultimate awareness of the real “I am.” The word know is dualisticand assumes a dichotomy between a separate subject—the “knower”—and something external to beknown.Reality becomes self-evident when the obstructions of perception and mental activity are removed,including all belief systems.It is not really necessary to subdue the ego, but merely to stop identifying with it.Cease to identify with the body/emotions/ mind as “me.” Be truthful and admit that they are yoursbut not you.

This may seem artificial, strange, foreign, and unnatural in the beginning; yet the basicreality is that it is a truth of higher order, which makes it a very powerful and formidable tool. Themind will try to deny this reality as well as truth (that’s what it is “supposed to do”) because Truth isintuited as its nemesis.Whereas ordinary information is “acquired” by effort, in spiritual endeavor the emphasis is onrelinquishing, letting go, and surrendering. The “work” involves identifying positionalities and thentranscending the ego’s resistances and relinquishing its illusory control or sovereignty. Thus, the coreof spiritual work is aligned with the undoing and unloading of the mind rather than its enrichment.

Complexity is a perception of the ego/mind. One sharp knife can cut through hundreds of differentobjects; there is only the necessity of one simple action. Analogously, there is only one simple keyconcept necessary to disengage from all the ego’s encumbrances: it has only one addiction, which issubjective pleasure/gain. That is the secret payoff of all desires, projected values, and attractions. This is exaggerated by projected value, worth, glamour, or specialness.

There is only one gain, and this same gain is merely superimposed on everything that is desired and therefore attracts attachment. Thepleasure is associated with derived happiness; thus, the ego has only one goal. That discernmentenables escape from all attractions. This solitary motive is merely projected onto multiple diverseobjects, persons, qualities, events, or circumstances.

The clever ego can extract the juice/payoff of secret gratification and pleasure from anything it arbitrarily selects. Actually, it is always just the same goal over and over again. The “what” that isdesired is actually irrelevant. The locus is imagined to be “out there” but is actually “in here,” for thepleasure gained is subjective and internal. The relinquishment of this single, solitary goal unveils theReality of the Self—which is the innate prime source of all happiness—and its Realization terminatesall wants and desires.

The locus of happiness is always solely from within. Pleasure is transitory; joyand happiness are from within.The key to transcending the inherent limitations of the ego/mind is humility, without which themind is hopelessly trapped in its illusory house of mirrors.Once the evolutionary structure and function of the ego are understood, its disassembly isfacilitated by the inner decision to pursue that which is real and eternal rather than that which istemporal, transitory, and ephemeral.

The human mind is like a ship at sea that is unable to correct its direction without a compass or anexternal source of reference, such as the stars. It is important to realize that a system is onlycorrectible when it has access to an external point of reference (like a global positioning system) thatserves as the Absolute by which all other data are compared.To transcend the mind is to see that the many and the one are the same. Without the contrastingmental dualistic terms of many or one, neither would be said to exist. Instead, there could only be thisrealization: “All Is.”All opinions are vanities with no intrinsic value, and are actually the result of naïveté.Whereas ordinary mental functioning could be typified as a constant effort to “get” something,spiritual realization is totally effortless, passive, and spontaneous. It is received rather than obtained.

By analogy, when sound stops, the silence reveals itself. One cannot get it by effort or endeavor. With mental activity, there is a capacity to control; with revelation, there is no control at all. No control ispossible where there is nothing to control and there is no means to apply control, even if it werepossible.

That which is formless cannot be manipulated.From thinking that we are our minds, we begin to see that we have minds—and that it is the mindthat has thoughts, beliefs, feelings, and opinions. Eventually we may arrive at the insight that all ourthoughts are merely borrowed from the great database of consciousness and were never really ourown. Prevailing thought systems are received, absorbed, and identified with; in due time, they arereplaced by new ideas that have become fashionable with us. As we place less value on such passingnotions, they lose their capacity to dominate us. We experience progressive freedom of, as well asfrom, the mind.

This in turn ripens into a new source of pleasure; fittingly, the pleasure of existenceitself matures as one ascends the Map of Consciousness.Identification solely with the content of consciousness accounts for the experience of self aslimited. In contrast, to identify with consciousness itself is to know that one’s actual Self is unlimited.When such circumscribed selfidentifications have been surmounted so that the sense of self isidentified as consciousness itself, we become “Enlightened.”The mind, in its identity with the ego, cannot, by definition, comprehend reality; if it could, itwould instantly dissolve itself upon the recognition of its own illusory nature.

It is only beyond the paradox of mind transcending ego that that which Is stands forth self-evident and dazzling in its infinite Absoluteness. And then all these words are useless.At all times, remain aware that the real you is not the ego. Refuse to identify with it.By introspection, one can see that there is that which changes and that which is changeless. Thatwhich changes thereby identifies itself as illusion.The mind can only “know about,” rather than truly comprehend, essence—which is a nonverbalrealization in which consciousness and essence are united as Oneness.It is a relief to let the mind become silent and just “be” with surroundings.The well-disciplined mind should only speak when requested to perform a task. Untrained, the mindbecomes an unruly “onstage” performer and a nuisance. The self needs to learn respect for the Selfand the silence of the Presence. By observing the mind, it becomes apparent that the self representsthe disruptive, unruly child who constantly seeks attention.

It is usually fruitless to try to block thought, or to force the mind to be still without removing itsmotivation and payoff. Its motivational roots can be identified and surrendered. It is then surprisinglypossible to make a decision: Just do not think about anything. This is made possible by aligning withthe infinite silence out of which thinkingness arises. It is located not between, but just before, theemergence of thoughts.

The undoing of domination by the mind can be accomplished by one single step—humility— whichis reinforced by simply recognizing that the mind is not sovereign, omniscient, or even capable oftelling truth from falsehood.Q: How can one silence the mind?A: One cannot. It stops of its own accord when the energy of interest is removed. It is of greaterservice to merely disown it and stop identifying with it as “my mind.” Thoughts are the automaticconsequence of a specific calibrated level of consciousness plus personalization, by which they gainvalue. With relinquishment of the activation of memory, one lives in the emergent instant rather thanhanging on to the past or anticipating the future.The mind stops when it is no longer narcissistically energized. Thinkingness is intrinsically avanity.

Survival is spontaneous and autonomous, an automatic karmic consequence. Even when themind becomes totally silent, the body goes about its business like a karmic windup toy.Q: What replaces the mind when it disappears?A: Divine wisdom unfolds. Consciousness/ awareness remains, but it is an autonomous quality orcondition. Loss of mind does not result in “nothingness”; on the contrary, it is replaced by Allness.The leaf is not the tree.It is safe to abandon any identification with what one thinks or believes one is, for none of it is real,and “nothingness” is purely an imagination.All thinking, from a spiritual viewpoint, is merely vanity, illusion, and pomposity. The less onethinks, the more delightful life becomes. Thinkingness eventually becomes replaced by knowingness.That one “is” does not really need any thought at all. It is helpful, therefore, to make a decision to stopmental conversation and useless babbling.To refuse memory, which is the vast storehouse of illusions, leads to a clear approach to self-inquiry. It leads to the discovery that there is no actual “who”; there is only awareness. You’re not a“who” but a “what.”

To a highly aware person, most people seem to walk about as if they are in some kind of a dreamstate, unconscious and unaware of themselves. Self-observation leads to awakening, which then motivates the desire to learn, grow, mature, and evolve. Self-inquiry leads to discovery and theunfolding of the layers that obscure the Self. With self-inquiry, one examines the basis for faith andbeliefs—and by instituting spiritual techniques and criteria, one proceeds to discover the innervalidation of spiritual truths for oneself. Thus, the field of inquiry is the function ofconsciousness/awareness and the manner in which it contextualizes the inner experience of self,others, and Divinity.The inner process is primarily one of deenergizing illusions rather than one of acquiring newinformation.

The “experiencer” is the perceptual edge of consciousness/awareness that is independent of thenature of the data being processed. It is this quality that one identifies with as “me” or “I.” Withobservation, it will be recognized that this function is autonomous and impersonal, although the selfclaims it is identity. The experiencer is not a “who” but an “it.” It is an autonomous functionality. It iscomparable to a multifunctional processing-probe faculty.

The ego/self thrives on that “experiencer”quality and is actually addicted to it.By attention and volition, the seductive attraction of the experiencer can be refused. Succumbing toits entertainment is only a habit. It is not a “you,” but only an activity with which the self becomesidentified. The mind thinks that it will “go blank” and become void without the constant linear inputof information and focus on “what’s going on.” Yet at night, sleep is a welcome relief from theexperiencer’s endless chatter. Thus, the mind thinks there are only three possibilities:

(1)experiencing;

(2) sleep (oblivion); or, perhaps, (3) sleep with dreaming. But relatively unknown to theordinary mind is a fourth state, which is one of awareness itself, and independent of content orexperiencing—or even participating, analyzing, or recording. The underlying quality is effortless,peaceful, and compatible with a contemplative lifestyle. It leads to the state classically termed assamadhi.

Once thoughts, like objects, are depersonalized, they become devalued and lose their attraction.Thoughts and feelings arise from desire, and the mind desires what it values.To clear the mind, merely note that nothing at all is of special or unique “value” or “worth” exceptby invested, superimposed, and projected belief. Therefore, withdraw value, worth, importance, andinterest.The major transitions occur when conceptual thought is abandoned along with interest in“experiencing” or identification with the experiencer “edge” of the ego/self and its processingfunctions.With practice, one can stay focused on the quality of consciousness as a process without actuallygetting involved in the “what” that is being processed or experienced.

Through observation, it can be seen that beneath the images and words themselves, there is adriving energy—a desire to think, to stay mentally active, to keep busy with any input the mind canfind to fill in the gaps. One can detect a drive to “thinkingness,” which is impersonal. Withobservation, one can detect that there is no “I” thinking the thoughts at all. In fact, the “I” rarelyintervenes.Spiritual reality is a greater source of pleasure and satisfaction than the world can supply. It isendless and always available in the present instead of the future. It is actually more exciting becauseone learns to live on the crest of the current moment, instead of on the back of the wave (the past) oron the front of the wave (the future).

There is greater freedom from living on the knife edge of the moment than being a prisoner of the past or having expectations of the future.If the goal of life is to do the very best one can do at each unfolding moment of existence, thenthrough spiritual work, one has already escaped the primary cause of suffering. In the stopframe of theradical present, there is no life story to react to or edit. With this “one-pointedness” of mind, it soonbecomes obvious that everything merely “is as it is,” without comment or adjectives.When the mind stops talking, one is aware that one is life. One is immersed in it rather than beingon the surface, talking about it. Paradoxically, this enables full participation.

With diminution of egocentricity, the joy of freedom and the sheer flow of life sweep one into total surrender. One then stops reacting to life so that it can be enjoyed with serenity.Spiritual progress is possible because the mind, through understanding, is able to recontextualize the contents of the ego and discern its very mechanism. Once this occurs, one is no longer blindly “at the mercy” of the ego. As the payoffs of the ego are refused and surrendered, its grip on the psyche lessens, and spiritualexperience progresses as the residues of doubt are progressively relinquished. As a consequence,belief is replaced by experiential knowledge, and the depth and intensity of devotion increase and mayeventually supersede and eclipse all other worldly activities and interests.Eventually, it is recognized that form is constituted by the formless and that they are one and thesame—but until that realization occurs, form itself is a distraction and a delay that is best avoided.Q: How can one facilitate progress?

A: That is a natural curiosity. Choice results in proclivities that become habitual mind-sets ofattention. Within each moment are all the necessary elements for realization. Look for essence ratherthan just appearance. Everything is perfect if seen as it really is. Everything is exactly the way it is“supposed to be,” whether it is shiny and new or rusty and dusty.Avoid adjectives, for they are all projected, mentalized qualifications. Later, one can even dropverbs and adverbs for nothing is actually “doing” anything; it just innately is. Transition is aphenomenon that stems from within the observer who sees sequence as a verb. If seen in less than1/10,000th of a second, everything appears to be stationary.Error occurs when we cling to the belief that I am “that.” Truth is unveiled when we see that one has“that” or does “that,” instead of is “that.”There is great freedom in the realization that I “have” a body and a mind, rather than that I “am” mymind or body. Once the fear of death is transcended, life becomes a transformed experience becausethat particular fear underlies all others. ‘

Few people know what it is to live without fear. But beyond fear lies joy, as the meaning and purpose of existence become transparent. Once this realization occurs, life becomes effortless, and the sources of suffering dissolve; suffering is only the price we pay for our attachments. A major deterrent to spiritual evolution and transcending identification of the self with one’s mindis the processing of data, symbols, and words via random mentalization, which is presumed to be“thinking.”One has the illusion that one couldn’t get through life unless one thinks.

No such thing happens. Itis not necessary for any individual to be there. It is not necessary to think that there is an “I” that isresponsible for one’s actions. Everything is doing itself. It is the vanity of the ego that says, “I didthis; I thought that; I decided that.” There is no such “I” at all. All these things are decidingthemselves and doing themselves, all by themselves (autonomous). There is no necessity for an “I.”There is no “doer”; all is “doing itself” spontaneously. There is no separate person doing anything;action occurs of itself. Objectification stops.

Experience shifts from successive states to process itself,from linear to nonlinear; and objective and subjective are all one.The ego/mind is afraid that if it doesn’t think, it will (1) get bored, and (2) cease to exist. Theproblem of boredom is relatively easy to transcend simply by seeing that boredom is just thefrustration of not being amused by “interesting” thoughts. To transcend the thinkingness, interestshould really be refocused on searching for the substrate out of which thinkingness arises.By understanding and accepting the nature of the ego, it is transcended and finally collapses anddisappears when all of its positionalities and their resultant dualities have been surrendered. The egodoes not become enlightened, but instead disappears and collapses. It is then replaced by aTranscendental Reality as described by the Buddha; that is, the Buddha Nature. Just as the sun shines forth when the clouds disappear, the Reality of the Self shines forth of its own as Revelation,Realization, and Enlightenment

There is the objective world—the world perceived “out there”—existing in form, governed by timeand space. Then there is the subjective experience—an internal state of being. How do you know thatyou are? That you exist? Dr. Hawkins points the student inward to the impersonal quality ofconsciousness and the field of awareness itself, which generally goes unnoticed because the ego/mindis focused on the content of phenomena being processed through perception.

The way out is simple: Direct one’s focus inward to the absolute subjectivity of all experiencing.Examine the nature of the sense of subjectivity that accompanies every expression of life. Withoutlabeling, note that at all times—in every instant, in every moment, in every circumstance—there isalways present the ultimately irreducible, underlying substrate of subjectivity. It never changes. Theessence of experiencing, in all its forms (thinking, feeling, seeing, knowing, and so on), is thepresence of this subjective quality. Then look further to find out what this subjective experiencing isthat is ever present.

Without it, there would not be the possibility of knowing that one exists.Ask, “How am I aware or even know that I exist?” That question is the best that can be acted upon,for it leads directly and nonverbally to the ever-present Reality. Identify with that quality, capacity, orcondition of ever-present subjectivity, which is experienced as an underlying awareness. It isconsciousness itself. Identify with that consciousness instead of with the “what” it is conscious about.

That is the direct route to the Self. It is actually the only practice that leads directly through thedoorway. There is nothing to know, to learn, or to remember. It is merely necessary to focus, fixate,meditate, contemplate, and look at—and to realize that the source and substrate of existence is theradical subjectivity of the Presence of God as the Light of Consciousness.

To accept the inner core of one’s existence as a self-existent reality requires letting go of anydefinitions of oneself as a “who,” and instead see oneself as a “what.”Simply put, realization or enlightenment is the condition where the sense of self moves from thelimited linear material to the nonlinear infinite and formless.

The “me” moves from the visible to theinvisible. This occurs as a shift of awareness and identification from perception of form as objectiveand real to the realization of the purely subjective as the Ultimate Reality.The realization eventually occurs that the “I” is not the content or the data, but an impersonal fieldseveral steps removed from the content of the programs. One then realizes that one is the audience,rather than the participant or subject.To “know about” means that although the information itself is familiar, its reality and truth remainto be confirmed experientially. In the final stage of achieving certainty, to really know means to “be,”and thus both subject and knower are unified. To know “about” is mental; to know experientially isaccepted as confirmatory.The field of conscious awareness is not timetracked. It is silent, autonomous, effortless, peaceful,all-encompassing, and unprogrammed; it is free, unbound, spontaneous, tranquil, and not subject tobirth or death. Discovery of this field is simple, easy, and relaxed. The realization is a consequence of“allowing” rather than “trying.” It is surrendered to rather than acquired. As the desire for, and theego’s obsession with, control are relinquished, the field presents itself for recognition.
Q: What is beyond mind?A: Subjective awareness devoid of content, such as thoughts, feelings, or images—silent, still,unmoving,

All-Present, All-Inclusive.Curiosity can be shifted from the form and content of thoughts in order to become aware of thesilent nascent field of consciousness/awareness itself. Silence is of the Self; thoughts are of the self.The ego/mind is attracted to novelty and therefore searches frantically for interesting form andsensation. This can be refused and replaced by interest in the silent, formless substrate that is alwayspresent and merely has to be noticed. It is comparable to the silent background without which soundcould not be discerned.Peace can be the consequence of surrender to the inevitabilities of life.

The religious/spiritualskeptic can look within and observe that the inner fundamental and irreducible quality of life is thecapacity of awareness, consciousness, and the substrate of subjectivity. Without consciousness, theindividual would not “know”—or even “know” if he or she “knows”—so consciousness is a prioriawareness of existence, irrespective of the content of that existence.

Thus, consciousness itself can beaccepted as an obvious reality, without the elaboration of being Divine (as recommended by theBuddha). To “be” is one thing; to know that one “is” obviously requires a more transcendent quality.What gives the sense of “I” its subjective quality of reality is the radiance of the true Self, which isthe source of the Reality that emanates as the Presence.

To clarify the pursuit, it is helpful to searchfor the innate quality that accords the subjective experiential sense of identity itself. It may be morefruitful to search for the source of the quality of subjectivity, which is not a “who” but an innatequality of sentient life (a “what”).Is reality subjective or objective? At some point, the introspective mind ponders the truth of itsqualities, that is: How do I know? How do I know that I know? How do I know that which I presume tobe truth is actually true? In addition: Whence arose life, and what is its source?

This subjective stateis nonlinear, primordial, and a priori. Out of this impersonal field arises the very personal sense of “I-ness” as a primary quality of content. This basic subjective sense of “I” is capable of reflexive self-knowing, whereas, in contrast, the mind merely thinks.The undoing of the identification of the ego/ self is the primary focus of spiritual evolution and isthe enigma that has baffled even the most erudite minds of history. The crux of the problem ismisidentification with qualities of the ego/mind’s processing function, which is already identifiedwith the linearity of the localization of phenomena. This is a natural consequence associated with thephysical reality of the experience of life as a body. The primary problem is misidentification of theactual source of subjectivity and the presumption that it is local rather than nonlocal.

In the process of spiritual discovery, one looks to discover what it is that is aware of—and has theauthority to sense the existence of— “I-ness” or the quality of “I-ness,” rather than a specific orcircumscribed “me” as the “I.”All mental approaches to a definition of truth are eventually confronted by the necessity of makinga paradigm jump from the abstract to the experiential, and from the supposedly objective to theradically subjective. Thus, the statement “Only the objective is real” is a purely subjective premise.Therefore, the mechanistic reductionist actually lives in an intrapsychic, subjective reality, the sameas everyone else.

The resolution of the dilemma of a description and knowingness of absolute truth requires the leapinto the field of research of consciousness itself—which makes it clear that the only actual, verifiablereality of knowingness is by the virtue of “being” (that is, all intellectualizations are “about”something). This requires that the observer be extraneous in order to be the witness of the thing to beexamined. For example, a human observer can “know about” a cat, but only a cat really knows what itis to be a cat by virtue of the quality of being a cat.

Featured

THE MAGIC IN YOUR MIND

THE MAGIC IN YOUR MIND

FOREWORD


This book reveals a mental magic that assures success, that absolutely guarantees increased achievement, whether your profession
is in the arts or business, in science or sales, in sports, war, or politics. Here you will learn the secret way in which your mind is tied
to the source of all power; you will learn how you are capable of
becoming anything and doing anything you can visualize.
Every man’s consciousness is constantly changing, is trapped at
the knife-edge overlap of past and future, reacts rather than acts, is
incomplete and partial, eternally seeks itself, for since the mere
state of being throws no light on that state, consciousness learns of
itself through reaction to outside stimuli. If a man comes to believe
he is unsuccessful, it is because he carries the impression he has
been unsuccessful, and this conclusion, once adopted, inescapably
molds him into the shape of the thing he believes, locks him in a
prison of his own making.

The magic by which a man becomes free is imagination. By training himself to cast up mental pictures of the thing he desires, by resisting sensual stimuli, even envisaging the exact opposite, he
tends to assume a factual position in accordance with his vision,
for his vision then becomes his experience, rather than the sensual
stimuli that moved him before. Consciousness always assumes a
form to suit its knowledge of itself, and where such knowledge
breaks beyond the limits imposed by sensory experience, man begins to grow into the image of the Secret Self.

There is only one mind in all creation; that mind is in everyone, is
in its true state of being not confined to anyone, not confined to the
body. It is a central, knowing consciousness in which everything
dwells, which dwells in everything. In a bodily-confined state it assumes the limitations imposed upon it by the knowledge of itself
which it receives through the senses, but when bondage to those
4 senses is broken by development of an inner power to perceive and
know directly, then slavery to its embodiment is at an end.
Perfect action and perfect works stem from an inner conviction of
the mental cause behind all things. A man changes the state of his
outer world by first changing the state of his inner world. Everything that comes to him from outside is the result of his own consciousness. When he changes that consciousness he alters his perception and thus the world he sees. By coming to a clear understanding of the process and effect of mental imagery he is led irrevocably along the correct path to his goal.

By working with this cause of all things—his own consciousness—he achieves infallibility in works, for inasmuch as his mental imagery propels him into
action, that action is always true to the picture in his mind and will
deliver him its material counterpart certainly.
In this book you will find a program for training the image power
of the mind, so that a scene or situation cast up in consciousness
will arrive in three dimensions, with color and sound, pulsing with
life, as real for you as the outside world. Haven’t you ever dreamed
such dreams? Haven’t you sometimes in sleep become immersed
in a mental and spiritual world with such solidity and dimension
that you were certain it was real and the material world a delusion?
If ever you have known the overwhelming power of mental imagery to influence your attitude and perception, then you will
quickly see that the salvation of each of us is to train his image
power to obey him. In this manner it is possible to become free
from the promptings and urgings of nature, from death and disease
and destruction, from ineffectuality and frustration. For the man
whose inner power of vision transcends the constantly distracting
stimuli of the outer world has taken charge of his own life, is truly
master of his fate.

I give you the end of a golden string:
Only wind it into a ball,—
It will lead you in at Heaven’s gate,
Built in Jerusalem’s wall. (WILLIAM BLAKE)


Chapter 1


THE HIDDEN CAUSE OF ALL THINGS


SHAKESPEARE’S Hamlet in his famed soliloquy pondered,
“To be or not to be,” and thus faced squarely the primary challenge of life. Most people only exist, never truly are at all. They
exist as predictable equations, reacting rather than acting, walking
compendiums of aphorisms and taboos, reflexes and syndromes.
Surely the gods must chuckle at the ironic spectacle of robots fancying themselves free, but still, when finally the embodied consciousness rises above the pain-pleasure principle of nature, then the true meaning of freedom is made apparent at last.

ACTION VERSUS REACTION
We exist in order that we may become something more than we
are, not through favorable circumstance or auspicious occurrence,
but through an inner search for increased awareness. To be, to become, these are the commandments of evolving life, which is going somewhere, aspires to some unsealed heights, and the awakened soul answers the call, seeks, grows, expands. To do less is to
sink into the reactive prison of the ego, with all its pain, suffering,
limitation, decay, and death. The man who lives through reaction
to the world about him is the victim of every change in his environment, now happy, now sad, now victorious, now defeated, affected but never affecting. He may live many years in this manner, rapt with sensory perception and the ups and downs of his surface
self, but one day pain so outweighs pleasure that he suddenly perceives his ego is illusory, a product of outside circumstances only.
Then he either sinks into complete animal lethargy or, turning
away from the senses, seeks inner awareness and self-mastery.
Then he is on the road to really living, truly becoming; then he begins to uncover his real potential; then he discovers the miracle of
his own consciousness, the magic in his mind.

Mastery over life is not attained by dominion over material things,
but by mental perception of their true cause and nature. The wise
man does not attempt to bend the world to fit his way or to coerce
events into a replica of his desires, but instead strives for a higher
consciousness that enables him to perceive the secret cause behind
all things. Thus he finds a prominent place in events; by his utter
harmony with them he actually appears to be molding them. He
moves effortlessly through the most strenuous action, the most perilous times, because his attunement with the mental force that controls the universe guides him to perform the work that needs to be done.


ELECTRO-MAGNETIC MIND


This mental force that controls the universe may be called anything
you like and visualized any way you choose. The important thing
is to understand that it exists, to know something about how it
works, what your relationship to it is. It might, for instance, be likened to an enormous electromagnetic field. All conscious forms of
life then would be tiny electro-magnetic fields within the universal
field and finding positions within it, each according to the kind and
quality of its field. Where each individual field would wind up
within the main field then would be a matter of inexorable law and
absolutely unavoidable, as is illustrated by the millions of people
who perform the same tasks over and over with absolutely the
same results, almost as if following ritual. Perhaps they are always
sick, always defeated, “just barely misers,” perhaps always broke,
always out of a job. If we give just the slightest reflection to our
own lives we cannot help but be startled by how we seem dogged
by the same situation in all things, year after year, time after time.
This deadly recurrence is the source of most frustration and mental
illness, is the bottom root of all failure.


Yet it is avoidable. And the way by which it is avoidable brings
complete emancipation of the mind and spirit. For the tiny electro-
magnetic field has inherent within it the ability to change the kind
and quality of its field, so that it will be moved about within the
main field with all the power and sureness of the main field until it
arrives at the position its new quality of consciousness demands.
The important thing to remember about this illustration is that the
tiny electro-magnetic field does not move itself. It is moved by the
large field. And behind its movement lies all the power of the large
field. Any attempt by it to move itself is obviously futile since it is
held in place by a power infinitely greater than itself. And it is held
where it is because of what it is. The moment a change occurs
within itself, it is moved by a power outside itself to a new position
in the field, one in keeping with its new potential.

This whole book can be downloaded from pdfdrive.com.

Search for THE MAGIC IN YOUR MIND and continue read the rest of the book

FOREWORD

  1. THE HIDDEN CAUSE OF ALL THINGS 7
  2. DISCOVERING THE SECRET SELF 34
  3. THE GREATEST MAGIC OF ALL 60
  4. SELF-MASTERY 83
  5. MIND OVER MATTER 105
  6. MENTAL IMAGERY 127
  7. THE POWER OF CHOICE 148
  8. OVERCOMING OPPOSITION 168
  9. DEVELOPING SKILLS 190
  10. CREATING YOUR OWN TALENT 209
  11. HOW TO USE YOUR SIXTH SENSE 230
  12. THE MENTAL ATTITUDE THAT
    NEVER FAILS 245
Featured

The Alchemy of Bliss. Tavistock Institute. Part 114

The Alchemy of Bliss. Tavistock Institute. Part 114

As you’ve definitely figured out by now, if we want to activate any given key, we can begin to do so by consciously infusing our lives with the alchemical associations and prop-erties of that key. And, no matter what key we are focusing on, one might say that our alchemical undertaking is a func-tion of the creativity key. After all, the alchemy of bliss is a method of transforming the entire process of life into one giant art project: something with an endless supply of possibilities something magical, playful, and fun.

The process of changing a lower level metal such as copper or iron into gold is called alchemy. The greatest alchemy is inner alchemy. Let´s us open, our being the change that collective consciousness can bring.

Our personal alchemy springs from within. Our inner transformation is directed from within. Our spiritual growth is an inner calling. When our being is ready, willing, waiting, and ripe, we are filled with Love. This powerful force will certainly lead us to the ultimate state: nithyanancla – eternal bliss.

There are no miracles in life. In our mind, we classify everythin6 we cannot comprehend as a miracle.

To be in the present is to be in bliss.

We all live and express nine dimensions of consciousness throughout our lives, yet most of us seem to be aware of the existence of only the sec-ond, third, and fourth dimensions. The second dimension is below Earth’s surface, the third is our solid world, and the fourth is the realm of our collective mind. The first dimension located in the center of Earth is the source of grounding ourselves, and the higher five dimensions are where the transcendent parts of our essence exist. These five higher lev-els have been mostly screened out of the fast-moving, technological world we live in, yet without reaching these levels, we cannot find the Divine and know bliss.

The alchemy of divine direction is at work within you like the leaven which the “woman took and hid in three measures of meal till the whole was leavened.”‘ Even so, the alchemy begins at the fiery core of being in the center of your heart flame; and it works hour by hour, day by day, from the within to the without. As you give the mantra and the meditation, you are planting seeds of your own cosmic consciousness at conscious and subconscious levels of being. These seeds will germinate and push through to the surface by the light of your own I AM Presence and by the watering of the living word of your own Christ Self.

If you would find the path of freedom, if you would be sure that when you find it you will know it. if you would be certain that in knowing it you will take it and not be deterred by the persuasions of the world. then take my advice: Pursue the Flaming One. The disc of the central sun Of your own cosmic consciousness! Pursue with diligence the teacher, The Great Divine Director. And the flame of divine direction he adores!

Pursue the innermost light of being And the clarity of right seeing.
Pursue the preparation For the coming of the new day.
For preparation is all In choosing and finding the way.
Freedom calls and freedom answers
Yes. freedom’s light and freedom’s goal.
I AM the way, the open door Of opportunity to every soul.
Now I will tarry with my readers
To train and retrain the consciousness In right choices for new-age leaden.
I am come to clear the way For divine direction,
That those idling in indecision May see and know and choose All right decision.
I am in the cleansing fires Of transmutation’s ray The Master of the Seventh Ray.

In the moment when conceiving stops—espe-cially self-conceiving—we are freed from the selfish hungers, because we are freed from the constructed self-concept that sustains them. In this moment we are freed from what practitioners of Ordinary Mind Zen call “the self-centered dream.” This freedom is possible. Indeed, if we are at-tentive, we will notice that freedom visits us each time the mind relaxes out of self-sustaining tensions. These specks of liberation multiply and link together as understanding grows. This is the alchemy of nonclinging. Sometimes, too, there is an ava-lanche of awakening, which may be sustained by the steadiness of mind engendered by meditation. In the moment of liberation, we cease to cling to an imagined stability or security in what is always changing. We cease our quest for pleasure in what is painful and for an enduring identity in the flux of personal and social fabrications. In the absence of clinging, something wonderful is possible.

Beyond the hungers and ignorance is a very high happiness. The self is no longer birthed, in this life or in others. More simply, we cease to believe in the dream of “me” that the mind continually weaves. In this joy, rapture and equanimity conjoin. Wisdom vanquishes constructed identities, which liberates generosity and love from the anchors of self. There is ac-ceptance without greed, discernment without rejection, and stability with-out the illusion of permanence.

Unbinding is a process of transformation. While there may be a state of being unbound, it is the process of unbinding that is most obviously relevant to our lives. Interpersonally, the stilling of the conditioned in-cludes, but is not limited to, the quieting of relational desire and fear.

Personal and relational desire and fear naturally diminish in tandem, because the personal and social self are intertwined. When we are no longer concerned with upholding self-identity, there can be no concern for the death of any given social identity. This cooling is why it is sorrowless—but there is more to it than that.

When we are with others and not constructing a self, the heart is poised and balanced. Because there is no reaching out or retreating inward, it is not surprising or frightening that conditioned, fabricated boundaries of the self have vanished. The natural wisdom of the heart-mind is realized. This interpersonal wisdom is compassion. It is sympathetic joy. We dwell in the paradox of selfless intimacy. We are the sea and the sky, shar-ing blueness and a horizon, partaking of the same empty spaciousness. It does not bother us that this state is impermanent. The next moment, like this one, is met with equanimity.

Featured

Kundalini lies dormant but, like a tiny seed when the conditions are right, can awaken and grow into a mighty tree. In the same way an electrical cable connects a computer to the mains, the awakened kundalini connects human awareness to the all-pervasive power of divine love. Kundalini, then, is the divine power in man which when liberated becomes the causal factor in all higher experiences of the yogin. Tavistock Institute. Part 113

Kundalini lies dormant but, like a tiny seed when the conditions are right, can awaken and grow into a mighty tree. In the same way an electrical cable connects a computer to the mains, the awakened kundalini connects human awareness to the all-pervasive power of divine love. Kundalini, then, is the divine power in man which when liberated becomes the causal factor in all higher experiences of the yogin. Tavistock Institute. Part 113

Divine sparks became separated and trapped in matter , and some human beings received the divine spark and others did not .

the redemption of the sparks is not simply “the enthusiasm for the concrete,” but rather an act that gives a new direction to the world with its materiality, enabling it to overcome the distance between the spheres of the secular and the holy, between matter and spirit.

The disciples asked, “Whaa the secret of this Saiyashasira (factual science) behind the Kundalini Shakhty, Gurujir ‘

Assume your vertebral column as the tube to be magnetized and the meditation as the strong magnet. Meditating is as good as rubbing and arranging the spine inside the vertebral column. As soon as the Sushumna gets a spark by rubbing the spine by the spiritual magnet, the first wheel of spirituality starts cranking.

The first cranks the second … The second cranks the third … The third cranks the fourth … The fourth cranks the fifth …The fifth cranks the sixth …The sixth cranks the seventh … All the movements of all these seven stages of the lotus heart will electrify or charge the Kundalini.

That electrification of your body produces the magnetic field around you and it further develops into a halo. “That’s why a saint has a halo around his head. And he is said to be godhead. That’s why he becomes supernatural. He can do miracles. Physics fails before him. But to obtain this mystical power one has to absorb all the voltage in the entire universe like a spiritual transformer comprising contemplative coils. One has to accumulate all the light, heat and energy in the entire cosmos as Sun.

One has to preserve all the waters of the earth within him. One has to inhale all the air in the atmosphere. One has to comprise in him all the ether above the earth. “Yet the most prominent and paramount factor is that he shall not use all these physical matters! lie possesses all these physical properties, yet he lives without enjoying them. That’s the secret of a saint. When Ile walks on fire, he uses the ocean as water concealed in him to extinguish the fire.

That’s why God has made all the substance on earth as flammable and water as non-flammable. When a yogi is submerged in water, he uses the air concealed in him as Pranavayu (life-saving gas). When Ile remains on the icy mountain as a hermit, he uses the fire (heat) in him to withstand the cold. When he passes through the dark, he makes use of the light within him. When he resides underground without food, he makes use of all the energy within him.

All these actions or processes are counter-balanced. That’s the artha seuhya or fact behind it. “To gain these powers through yoga and meditation, one should be the owner of a pure body, pure heart, pure mind, pure soul and pure spirit. If you allow any atom of impurity to enter, the rivet shakes. The power goes off. Hence, you go back to the state of an ordinary man.

“With the awakening of Kundalini, your inner eye will be opened.”

To avoid conflicts, some alchemists deliberately concealed their work in Christian terminology. For instance, the word “Christ” was often used to refer to the Philosopher’s Stone, the spark of life concealed in the darkness of matter

Finally, gold will gain the upper hand and combine the entirely with itself, such that they can never again be separated from one another by the power of fire, water or air. With this, the first step in the process is complete, but we are still nowhere near creating the Philosopher’s Stone, having only prepared Philosopher’s, whose sole Philosopher’s . purpose it is to awaken the dead gold and enrich it, and especially its seed. And so, if we apply this to gold and add in Philosopher’s , and cook it all for seven to nine A months as we described earlier, we will produce the Philosopher’s Stone in the true seed of the gold, which will have a millionfold potency for reproduction. Let us now look at the field in which the seed is sown.

“This will make your life natural and peaceful, free from nervous exhaustion and worry, because it will enable you to keep your vital force of life ever renewed and reinforced. It will enable you to charge your battery, to electrify it every day. Today you resemble a small boat tossing on the waves of a stormy life without oars, at the mercy of wind and wave, always in danger of rocks and shoals. Practice Pranayama and you will plough thru the vast sea of life like a giant dreadnought. “Learn Pranayama practice Pranayama, and be master of yourself and your circumstances.” Excerpt from the Author’s Pranayama—Lessons Three and Four.

“The Alchemy of Bliss” is for those who have reached a certain point in their spiritual practice and yet find the experience and connection with the Kundalini spinal and bodily currents (especially the Bliss vibration) elusive.

It is customary in religious traditions, particularly in mystical or metaphysical sub-traditions, to posit human bodies as manifestations of cosmic energies, the body electric at times transformed into pure consciousness. Could we then see improvising, perhaps especially as practiced in and through these metaphysics, as a kind of yogic form of becoming immense, of unleashing energies and potentials, practicing and sensing a mode of selfhood that is beyond the limits of selfhood? These different architectures of meaning, then, provide the sonic, interactive cues by which participants become responsive to the religiosity that the systems themselves posit was there all along, was the only thing that could possibly bring such music into being, could summon—instrumentally, spiritually—such altered states of energy from the vastness of the all. The self becomes part of the sound, which is a part of these metaphysics, which are part of divine creation itself, however improvised, however understood. The entire universe is electrified, magnified, ascended in vibratory flux. As with Spiritualism’s engagement with cosmic frequencies, the yogic attention to the kundalini energy opening the “portal of cosmic being.

One praying in this fashion is not aware that he or she is a temple of divine energy, a temple of the Holy Spirit, or that the presence of the divine energy that raised Jesus from the dead is lying dormant within, awaiting resurrection. That divine energy that lies within us, similar to what Indian adepts call the Kundalini energy that lies dormant at the base of the spine, I prefer to call “resurrection current.” This current is spiritual electricity that causes people who have a loving connection with God to do what Jesus told his disciples to do, that is, to have their life, being, and movement in the Holy Spirit. The early followers of Jesus reached out to people, allowing the energy of God in that res-urrection current to use them as channels for healing the sick and producing miracles, electrifying the very atmosphere around them.

Awakening of this divine energy (divya takti) is kundalini. Please know that this divine energy gets awakened only by divine grace. And the divine grace is something which one cannot dream of.

Yoga texts mention the awakening of this divine energy. HahaYoga says that one has to put in all efforts to awaken the sleeping or dormant energy. The prakrti has to be brought to the realm of the soul. In reality, only true saints have their kupdalin awakened by divine grace.

Please understand that kupdalin is a power of pure intelligence. If one has got that pure power, know that the divine grace has dawned on him.

Once ‘kundalini awakening’ has taken place and is established through meditation, the kundalini is said to purify the subtle body automatically, thus dispelling all mental, physical, and spiritual diseases.

To achieve the real state of meditation, one needs to awaken the kundalini energy within. With the support of kundalini, meditation becomes effortless and natural. Kundalini is the mothering energy lying dormant at the base of the spine in the sacrum bone. This energy is awakened by a process called enlightenment (self-realization) to connect us to the divine and begin the work of healing and balancing our chakras.

Kundalini lies dormant but, like a tiny seed when the conditions are right, can awaken and grow into a mighty tree. In the same way an electrical cable connects a computer to the mains, the awakened kundalini connects human awareness to the all-pervasive power of divine love.

Kundalini, then, is the divine power in man which when liberated becomes the causal factor in all higher experiences of the yogin.

This energy is latent in all beings. Because of his ability to manifest this divine, boundless Cosmic energy, man is described as a manifestation of the Divine. Humanness consists in the manifestation of what is hidden and invisible in man.

“With this power of sight, man is able to see the entire creation. There is no greater power than this. Thus, man is endowed with all powers. But this boundless power is being recognized and exercised by each one according to the level of his development. The same electrical energy is used for a variety of purposes: for heating, lighting, operating a fan, etc. Likewise, the divine Cosmic energy in human beings is used by different persons for varied purposes. This energy is latent in all beings. Because of his ability to manifest this divine, boundless Cosmic energy, man is described as a manifestation of the Divine. Humanness consists in the manifestation of what is hidden and invisible in man.

“The manifestation of Divine Power must not be interpreted in terms of magic. Remember there is nothing that Divine Power cannot accomplish. It can transmute earth into sky and sky into earth.

All the powers in the world are within you. The outside world is a reflection of your inner being. Students should recognize this truth. Various scientists are being praised. But all powers are within you, electrical power, magnetic power, the power of light and fire and radiation. Every human being is a computer. Every individual is a mini-generator. Every person is a lamp and a radio station.” SS June 1995 P 153

Another way to see or understand these powers is that the GURU or MASTER can chose to awake others to enlightment.

Tracing the original wound of woman, brings us back to a time when the male and female energies were separated, and their backs turned on each other. They stopped working together, and their power was suppressed and forgotten. This disconnection was intentionally encouraged and then carefully managed. Fear was a way of creating control and as the world evolved, a way of creating power. A very false sense of power however. Not one of true authentic power. The secrets to higher consciousness were stolen and hidden away, allowed only to a select few, initiated into silence and sworn to secrecy because the power of that knowledge could change everything.

Ego is one of the main programs trying to stop you from reconnecting with the God within, it can be broken. It’s a distraction and is one of the main emotions you must master in order to see the illusion of separation for what it is, an illusion. Ego divides, which is what they want, the Archons (The Lower Light). Ego is the reason for the tower of Babel which led to the separation of Humanity and led to Humanity losing the oneness and not understanding each other. Ego is the reason why they (The Archons) manufactured and in a smart way, got the go ahead by the masses for royalty and a social structure. Tavistock Institute. Part 112

Ego is one of the main programs trying to stop you from reconnecting with the God within, it can be broken. It’s a distraction and …

Featured

The average person may think that kundalini belongs only to those whose spiritual practice elevates them into a ratified atmosphere of consciousness, but this is not so. Kundalini is universal, available to all. Anyone who prays or meditates regularly is likely at some point to feel the power of kundalini. Gateway to higher consciousness. Tavistock Institute. Part 111

The average person may think that kundalini belongs only to those whose spiritual practice elevates them into a ratified atmosphere of consciousness, but this is not so. Kundalini is universal, available to all. Anyone who prays or meditates regularly is likely at some point to feel the power of kundalini. Gateway to higher consciousness. Tavistock Institute. Part 111

When we remain absolutely still we experience the exquisiteness of the breath as transformer of the subtle body as the Kundalini is activated. The wakening of the Kundalini is not simply the arousal of a dormant force within us, as Gopi Krishna explains: The arousal of kundalini, in its true sense, does not simply imply the ac-tivity of a hitherto sleeping force, but actually the start of a new activity by changing the whole system to adapt it to a new pattern of conscious-ness through changing the composition of the bioenergy or subtle life force permeating the whole body.

When Kundalini awakens. She spiritualizes the body and mind as if the divine influence of God has descended on the physical plane. Such influence varies in intensity with different persons and in particular individuals too its flow of intensity fluctuates from time to time.
As a minute spark of fire may burn heaps of straw in no time and the ensuing big conflagration is not different from the original spark, so the divine spark of the awakened Kundalini is the Lord Himself. When the whole heap of straw has been consumed, the fire extinguishes into voidness. Burning of straw is but the manifestation of heat lying involved in it through the involutionary process. All the fire that appeared from combustion was simply lying hidden in the form of straws, as if the fire itself had assumed the form of straws. Ignition once started soon uncoils the whole amount of heat stored up there and sends the whole heap into flames. Similarly when a master throws sparks of divine fire, it ignites and sets the involved Kundalini to flames, which soon takes up the form of a big fire—the Lord on the physical plane. A Yogi calls Him the self of his self, but when all straws have been burnt, like the extinguished fire, the Kundalini power also merges into the Absolute. One has simply to raise one’s self to the ignition point. All other preparations in the form of piety, virtuous deeds, devotion to God, and prayers or other methods of invoking God, improve our combustibility in that respect that the slightest touch
or contact with spiritual persons may light in us the divine fire instantaneously.

When Kundalini lies in dormant condition, spiritual consciousness remains clouded with the physical forces and Atman appears in bondage, but when She is aroused shining with the dawn of spiritual consciousness, she assumes the role of Guru.

And the seventh angel sounded; and there were great voices in the sky (activation of the Seventh Sense Power), saying, The Kingdoms of this world are become the kingdoms are of lord (Real Man); and he shall reign for ever and ever (Rev. 11:15).

This is the Super-conscious Department of Mind, so potent that no one is able to measure it, with a vibratory rate beyond the rate of vibration capable of being registered by any mechanical instrument so far produced by science, and which psychologists say never forgets, and even contains all the wisdom of past ages.

“There should be Time no longer” means that in the Sevenfold Hind Power man rises above the illusion of Time (Rev. 10:6).

And the seventh angel poured out his vial into the air; and there came a great voice from the temple, from the throne (brain), saying “He is born.” (Rev. 16:17).

This is the birth of the Redeemed Man, with the Sevenfold Mind Power. This is the Resurrection of the World Within, the Kingdom of Heaven within; the Resurrection of the god (Pineal Gland).

At this point, the church fathers also falsified their translation, making it read “It is done” (Rev. 16:17). They changed “He” to “it,” and “born” to “done.” “He is born” becomes “It is done”

Revelation in this Forbidden Field was carefully guarded. What little the Masters wrote about it was always so heavily veiled in symbol and fable that only the most advanced Occultists could decode it.

Neither should we relate the secrets of this Forbidden Field in any but the most general terms. Only a few can comprehend what we say, and fever still can be constrained to believe it.

Science knows not that the Pineal is the organ of the Seventh Sense. It is the organ of memory, of expectation and anticipation. It is the organ that never forgets and even contains all the wisdom of past ages.

Man would know nothing of past or future without the function of the Pineal. Many have poor memory, some have little, others almost none, because the Pineal is dormant, semi-dormant, sluggish.

It seems that the conscious phase of mind depends on the Pituitary and Pineal glands. The weaker their function, the weaker the conscious phase of mind. By increased action of these glands, man’s knowledge of himself, of his environment, and of the universe is increased.

Some increase in the action of these glands may be produced by concentration of thought. Also, brain power to perceive situations is thus improved.

Kundalini is also known, is a catalyst which leads to enlightenment and transcendental consciousness

Kundalini awakening and the subsequent changes in the physical and mental bodies is not a psychosomatic or unnatural event. Instead Kundalini awakening is a very scientific and biological event in the body. Today research done in the mind and consciousness seem to be coming closer to this understanding. They can see that there are marked physical differences in those men and women who have consistently practiced meditation.

After the crown has fully opened, the feminine and masculine energies of the body can move permanently into wholeness. Once this has occurred, the now undifferentiated force can flow back downward, opening the spiritual heart and completing the process of enlightenment. Some choose to postpone achieving full enliqhtenment in „ order to be of service to their fellow humans, to be a catalyst, or assistant for the evolution of humankind.

The fear of death dissolves. A drastic reorganization process occurs in which we no longer focus on the sort of commotion and projections emerging out of trauma and blind emotive reaction, nor identify with the human form as the dominant force and concern in our existence.

The key points for understanding kundalini from a Thomist perspective are the nature of the human soul as a spiritual being in potency which needs to be united to the material universe in the body in order to activate itself, and how the human soul contains and animates these lower levels of material being. What is kundalini? It is a fundamental energy of the soul that activates all the levels of the soul, from lowest to highest, fitting it for enlightenment

If kundalini is such a fundamental, energy why don’t more people experience it?

We have to distinguish between this energy in a general sense which all of us have and which is operative in our development, from kundalini in a dramatic and manifest form which is limited to a few people. This fundamental process moving us toward enlightenment can take place even if we are not consciously aware of it, but kundalini in its manifest form gives us an invaluable picture of what is at stake.

When the Kundalini reaches the Sahasrara, it means the person is on the first step towards what Krishna calls moksha and Buddha calls nirvana or liberation Depending on the person, it may take lives for awakening the Kundalini, and it may take many lives again for the Kundalini to reach the Sahasrar, and again, many lives to attain liberation.

You can remain locked up and limited in the conscious ego’s physical motivation and walls of protection or you can free yourself and go beyond time.

The Kundalini Deep inside the body lies a treasure, Of which humanity is ignorant, Only a few have discovered it, The perfume of which is fragrant. Vast is this treasure, Beyond timeless measure, Available to but only, The saintly and the austere. It hath no directions, no map for it,

To fall into the hands of the unholy and the impure. This treasure in its grace reveals itself, To the holy one who dives deep within himself.

The Kundalini Book of Living and Dying is such a significant work; it explains the nature of kundalini, why it is important, and how any person can bring its benefits into his or her life. In the process of enlightening our-selves, we contribute mightily to the enlightenment of the soul of global humanity.

Our ability to evolve as human beings and as souls, our ability to unite with God, our ability to leave behind forever hate, war, and ter-rorism will be facilitated—even determined—by kundalini.

This energy of enlightenment resides within each and every one of us, often dormant until we make the choice to seek unity with God. In our ensuing spiritual study and practice, we awaken the sleeping power within, and we are profoundly changed—physically, mentally, and spiritually. The hallmarks of kundalini are phenomena such as surges of electricity in the body, detachment from the body, intense heat and fire, buzzing sounds, a feeling of being in the presence of God, and awareness of spiritual presences such as angels.

More important, however, are the benefits that lie beyond the phenomena: creativity, genius, enhanced well-being, longevity, and, most significant of all, enlightenment. Experiences of kundalini have been recorded around the world since ancient times. Kundalini is the divine fire of God and the gods, the samadhi of adepts, the raptures of saints, the healing power that floods through the hands of healers, the inspiration of invention, the intense happiness of a peak experience.

The average person may think that kundalini belongs only to those whose spiritual practice elevates them into a ratified atmosphere of consciousness, but this is not so. Kundalini is universal, available to all. Anyone who prays or meditates regularly is likely at some point to feel the power of kundalini.

By means of this sacrifice, this individual incarnates the Christ, thereby embodying the supreme source of wisdom and compassion. This is the entrance to the Direct Path to complete liberation from the ego, a route that only very few take, due to the fact that one must pay the entirety of one’s karma in one life.

Featured

Be Here Now: Open Your Mind to Spirituality

Be Here Now: Open Your Mind to Spirituality

Download this book from pdfdrive.com.

Just search for Be Here Now: Open Your Mind to Spirituality

This is a different written book, easy to read and illustrated in a new way. A must to read for the spiritual seeker. It will surprise everyone who reads it. Here is some examples how the whole book is written

Download “Be Here Now: Open Your Mind to Spirituality” and read the whoke book. Just visit PDFDRIVE.COM and find thousneds of other books

When our Planetary Logos was invaded and corrupted by the Archons, the planet and our race were impacted dramatically. It meant that we were no longer free to create and evolve as per the original blueprint of our intended creation, and we had no memory of what had happened to us. We were recycled through continual reincarnations through the Astral Plane with no memory of our past lives, who we really are, where we are going, or what our real relationship is to God and what humanity’s “purpose” actually is. Over time most of us lost our feeling connection to our Soul Matrix and we became numb to the pain in order to survive in anti-human based structures. What has happened to our planet is not human, it is “alien” to the true nature of humanity. This is the Archontic Deception Strategy. Tavistock Institute. Part 110

When our Planetary Logos was invaded and corrupted by the Archons, the planet and our race were impacted dramatically. It meant that we were no …

Enlightment is the only way to exit the Archon Matrix. Enlightenment is ego’s ultimate disappointment. The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it. Happiness is your nature. It is not wrong to desire it. What is wrong is seeking it outside when it is inside. One is never afraid of the unknown; one is afraid of the known coming to an end.

The main dictum of the hermetic tradition as found in the Emerald Tablet in essence states “As Above, So Below” meaning that humanity will find …

The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it. There is no direct, permanent, or public access to the divine. Each destiny has a unique curvature and must find its own spiritual belonging and direction. Individuality is the only gateway to spiritual potential and blessing. The heavens will always speak to man on earth. For it is the established order of creation, that life and light should descend from the higher to the lower, from the interior to the external, from the inner to the outer circles of existence.

The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it. There is no direct, permanent, or public access to the divine. Each destiny has a unique …

The dualistic proclivity of the mind prevents the realization of the Oneness of Reality or the occurrence of Self-realization

NATURE OF “MIND” – How does one traverse the spiritual landscape to move beyond suffering to experience the peace and love of God Often used …

God is omnipotent. He has all power. When we run out of our natural strength and power, we are only at the beginning of His power. God is omniscient. He has all wisdom. When we run out of our natural mental ability to understand and create, we have barely tapped God’s wisdom and creativity. God is omnipresent. He is both eternal and ever-present in every moment. When we run out of time in any given day or at the end of our lives, we have yet to experience a nanosecond of God’s eternity. When we become frustrated at our inability to be in two places at once or to give our full time to any given pursuit, we are only at the beginning of God’s ability to be present with us always. Tavistock Institute. Part 109

God is omnipotent. He has all power. When we run out of our natural strength and power, we are only at the beginning of His …

The self identifies not only with the mind, but also with its content—which becomes “my” memory, “my” senses, “my” thoughts, “my” emotions, “my” property, “my” success, “my” failure, “my” expectations, “my” feelings, and so on. Identification presumes ownership and author-ship; thus, the ego sees and believes itself to be a personal, separate causal agent and the inferred source of its own existence. Dissolving the Ego, Realizing the Self. Tavistock Institute. Part 106

The self identifies not only with the mind, but also with its content—which becomes “my” memory, “my” senses, “my” thoughts, “my” emotions, “my” property, “my” …

Enlightenment will not come just because we have meditated; it is essential that we develop true self-knowledge lest we lose our Being in the illusion of “good intentions”, which in fact stem directly from the unconscious part of our ego. Tavistock Institute. Part 108

The breaking of the veil on Christ ‘ s death which gave man sight and led him to the knowledge of God . Any experience …

Yet even if man can understand his potential, even in the clearest terms, this would not be enough to move even one step toward its realization. Realizing that potential entails feeling an all-consuming desire for freedom, and being ready to risk everything in order to achieve freedom. If we wish to embark on a process of introspection, we need to be driven by a free and ardent desire. A Map of Consciousness. Tavistock Institute. Part 107

Yet even if man can understand his potential, even in the clearest terms, this would not be enough to move even one step toward its …

The inner Self is stronger; fear has weakened. Once the fountain of love is unlocked in our hearts, we see the magnificence of our existence. Enlightenment is ego’s ultimate disappointment. The mind creates the abyss, the heart crosses it. Our secret hurt is not our fundamental limitation. We must look much deeper for the source of our discontent, the relief of which illumines our purpose. To come into full ownership of our rightful heritage we must remember to practice seeing the world as the Self, listening to the inner inspiration, and using the full power of will to sustain the highest state. Tavistock Institute Part 105

The inner Self is stronger; fear has weakened. Once the fountain of love is unlocked in our hearts, we see the magnificence of our existence. …

Archons try with all their might to keep these sparks imprisoned on earth and in humans, so as to prevent them from ascending to the divinity, of which they were originally a part. The divine spark or inner person is asleep, but must awaken and be liberated by means of knowledge (gnosis) both concerning God and humanity and its world. This knowledge is gained when an envoy from the world of light manages to get past the Archons to wake up the inner person and give him or her gnosis, by means of which he can ascend and force the Archons to let him through. Tavistock Institute. Part 104

Archons try with all their might to keep these sparks imprisoned on earth and in humans, so as to prevent them from ascending to the …

If we truly want God, if we truly want to achieve the ultimate goal of life, we must explore what this journey called life is all about. We must understand what the ego is doing and how with the mind, it creates the illusion of ME that makes us crave till we reach our grave. We need to overcome the ignorance and realize we are not the body. When we proceed on the journey of life and realize we are not the mind, then the ego faces the question, ‘Who am I?’ If we are amongst those who don’t believe in the Divine, if we are non-believers and don’t believe in the existence of the God that created us and this beautiful earth, then we will just die only to be born again and again. However, if we believe in God, and we want to achieve our ultimate goal. Tavistock Institute. Part 103

If we truly want God, if we truly want to achieve the ultimate goal of life, we must explore what this journey called life is …

The Archons try with all their might to keep these sparks imprisoned on earth and in humans, so as to prevent them from ascending to the divinity (Oneness), of which they were originally a part. With the dissolution of the Matrix, a new reality is happening for your people, and that is reincarnation but on a natural path of ascension as is enjoyed by every other in your universe, and this of course, is the natural cycle of choice by the soul. When you fear, you allow yourself to remain stuck in the Matrix system. Yes. You allow yourself to support the Matrix system, to energize it, and to remain deluded into this falseness as you always have been. Tavistock Institute. Part 102

The Archons try with all their might to keep these sparks imprisoned on earth and in humans, so as to prevent them from ascending to …

Featured

For self-mastery to work, you must work on yourself, in time that will project outside of you and manifest in the reality it is directed to manifest in. All you can do is work on yourself, over time the collective will do the same. As more do it, it contributes to more becoming Masters easier, though when unbounded, you are all Masters. You just have to realise that when in the Human body, you can be a master to. It’s up to you.

Ego is one of the main programs trying to stop you from reconnecting with the God within, it can be broken. It’s a distraction and is one of the main emotions you must master in order to see the illusion of separation for what it is, an illusion. Ego divides, which is what they want, the Archons (The Lower Light).

Ego is the reason for the tower of Babel which led to the separation of Humanity and led to Humanity losing the oneness and not understanding each other. Ego is the reason why they (The Archons) manufactured and in a smart way, got the go ahead by the masses for royalty and a social structure, which did and does contribute to the Lower Lights power, which is a front like the Reptilians being the ones in control of the manipulation, when it is really the Archons. Ego is the root to all this, but it was engineered that way.

What most don’t realise, is that being here you must walk in two worlds, it’s part of the self-mastery Human experience, and that is one of the hardest things to do while here.

When one starts to awaken, they realise the illusion and see the manipulation for what is, at which time they think they have it all worked out, only to find how deep the rabbit holes goes, then they try to project their reality on others which is worse than what those who are controlled by the Archons (The Lower Light) do, as they have an idea of the real reality, where those manipulated do not.

With awakening, what also happens with the lesson of self-mastery is learning to let things go, and to judge yourself, not others, and then later on to not even judge yourself. All this starts with you.

You see the more you know, the more you recognise. You see the real reality slowly for what it is, it is a process. One is not fully enlightened till they have done their walk and are connected fully back with Source. That being the case, what needs to be mainly recognised at this time with one’s self, is that of being in both worlds at the same time, and having a balance of both worlds.

Yes the Human mind over time, as it has been conditioned, has be conditioned to give you doubt, that is part of the Reptilian trait which was also given to the Human body computer, this is distraction. Anything with distraction and hierarchy is an illusion and is not coming from a place of love and serviced, it is a distraction.

Many races embrace what they are good at, compared to how most Humans on Earth do not, as they are programmed from an early age to help strengthen and contribute energy to the energy grid created by the Archons (The Lower Light). This is breaking down though.

For self-mastery to work, you must work on yourself, in time that will project outside of you and manifest in the reality it is directed to manifest in. All you can do is work on yourself, over time the collective will do the same. As more do it, it contributes to more becoming Masters easier, though when unbounded, you are all Masters. You just have to realise that when in the Human body, you can be a master to. It’s up to you.

The Savior’s role involves creating a cohesive force that can break the stranglehold that the Demiurge and archons have on the human consciousness.

Failing to accomplish their ends and fearing the power of the earthly couple , the archons try another approach.

Wisdom is associated with physical death (mortal ego), because only when one lets go of the physical body, the vessel in which ego – consciousness is held, can wisdom be freed from the shackles of the flesh.

There is deep doctrine in the legend of the Fall; it is the expression of a dim presentiment that the emancipation of ego consciousness was a Luciferian deed. Man’s whole history from the beginning is a conflict between his inferiority and his arrogance (Jung, CW (9i), para. 420).

In contrast to the Stoics, the Gnostics taught that only a handful of human beings — the elect — can pierce the veil of ignorance obscuring our true nature, and the only law of nature in this fallen world is a malignant will to power.

In Buddhist and Gnostic traditions alike, the purpose of illuminist discipline is to “get behind the veil to find reality and become free.

To see the Real for what it is requires being able to discern error, which is the unintentional mistaking of the Real, as well as deception, which is the intentional use of error, or imposition of error.

Error imposed by intention becomes drugh, the Lie. These nuances, excruciating as they may be, are essential to a sound grasp of the Gnostic theory of error, and bear directly on the issue of alien intrusion in the human mind. In short, there is a web of deception around the essential error that enmeshes us in “co-emergent ignorance” with the Archons.

The archons are envious of Adam because of the spark concealed within him , the spark they wish to grasp and keep for their own. But in their ignorance , they do not know that the divine cannot be taken by force , and so the earthly powers fail when they try to take possession of the spiritual powers.

“The body moved and gained strength, and it was luminous. “And in that moment the rest of the powers became jealous, because he had come into being through all of them and they had given their power to the man, and his intelligence was greater than that of those who had made him, and greater than that of the chief archon. And when they recognized that he was luminous, and that he could think better than they, and that he was free from wickedness, they took him and threw him into the lowest region of all matter.

These things they knew , for they wanted to take the free man and make him a slave to them forever (The Matrix). Mankind is held enslaved/imprisoned within their Lower Ego-Matrix. Because the Spirit is asleep they dont understand they living within their Matrix.

Ego is the greatest hurdle to spiritual development. A divided brain that unites all parts creates a communication network that renders an individual unique: good, wise, brilliant. The call to full wakefulness and keen alertness teaches us the importance of a partnership with the divine to learn moral lessons. The soul guides humanity to goodness. The spirit carves out individual genius. Her womb is where rejuvenation occurs. The sacrifice fixes the broken brain and releases its hidden light. The exclusive focus on objective knowledge that the ego controls broke connections to subjective wisdom that are outside egoic control. Tavistock Institute. Part 101

Ego is the greatest hurdle to spiritual development. A divided brain that unites all parts creates a communication network that renders an individual unique: good, …

The warlike mentality of the collective ego is based on winners and losers. The greatest hurdle for growth is the Ego Cage of the I and the Me”. Ego is the greatest hurdle to spiritual development. Ego is a condition of the mind, manifested through the five physical senses. The future Fifth Level of Evolution leads to the all – embracing consciousness ” — supermind and spirit striving towards ” Divine Reality. The frontier mentality creates a low – synergy society. It is not about creation but de-creation, dismantling reality and corrupting truth. The intent to destroy inner life was accomplished by disconnecting thought from it. The gatekeeper of self-delusion tags truth as a security risk. Tavitsock Institute. Part 100.

The warlike mentality of the collective ego is based on winners and losers. The greatest hurdle for growth is the Ego Cage of the I …

THE OUTER MAN BEING LIMITED IN STRENGTH. Christ lives in your inward man. Before the outer man is broken, the inner man and the outer man stand in opposition to one another. Tavistock Institute. Part 99

THE OUTER MAN BEING LIMITED IN STRENGTH. Christ lives in your inward man. Before the outer man is broken, the inner man and the outer …

The Breaking of the Outer Man and the Release of the Spirit. THE OUTER MAN AND THE INNER MAN. BREAKING AND TIMING. THE MEANING OF THE CROSS. BEFORE AND AFTER THE BREAKING. The Breaking and Release. Tavistock Institute. Part 98

The Breaking of the Outer Man and the Release of the Spirit. THE OUTER MAN AND THE INNER MAN. BREAKING AND TIMING. THE MEANING OF …

Instead of thinking for ourselves, we have been trained to follow the headlines, and week to week our opinions change like the wind. We think about, and believe, whatever information is being projected. There is always some distraction to be found as the center of social discourse. Talk about being in the dark, today’s people are worshiping shadows projected into a shadowbox. We are still in Plato’s cave. The whole capitalist/materialist game is what keeps us participating in this pyramid scheme. It is the perfect and most true model for the system of the beast. Mankind is now presently, fully consumed and enamored with the trappings of this scheme. Tavistock Insitutute. Part 97

Instead of thinking for ourselves, we have been trained to follow the headlines, and week to week our opinions change like the wind. We think …

Ego is the greatest hurdle to spiritual development. Beyond this, what is said is only what needs to be said. By spending more time in Essence, we learn to speak from Essence rather than from the ego. Essence won’t shout at you like the mind does. It won’t try to convince you, scare you, or bully you to come to it like the egoic mind does. Tavistock Institute. Part 96

Ego is the greatest hurdle to spiritual development. Beyond this, what is said is only what needs to be said. By spending more time in …

The matrix functions as a simulacrum of choice—it creates the illusion that you are in control of your own life. If you acknowledge (discover) that the matrix and not yourself is in control, then you are in control. Thus, the logic is that of Catch 22: ‘If you think you know your own freedom, you are not free’; and ‘If you think know your unfreedom, you are free’. But either way, you are ‘not free’. Tavistock Institute. Part 95

The matrix functions as a simulacrum of choice—it creates the illusion that you are in control of your own life. If you acknowledge (discover) that …

We have lost our ability to decode reality and all higher levels of energies and frequencies. Anything beyond this visible universe is beyond our ability to visualise and thus understand today. This is beyond normal human abilities. The five senses has not the ability to decode energy-information outside the Earths 3rd dimesional world and reality. Tavistock Institute. Part 94

We have lost our ability to decode reality and all higher levels of energies and frequencies. Anything beyond this visible universe is beyond our ability …

Earthly Man, but not Spiritual Man, is like a shadow, created by the Archons. Unfortunately, many of our institutions and cultural set, and ways of doing things, have become ossified and show no imperative in adjusting to the new energies. Governments, large corporations, charities, and a host of lesser bodies, governmental, NGO or private, are stuck in the old energies. Fear is also a huge factor in the suppression of our vibrational state. Governments use fear as a tactic to keep people in line. As long as we allow the archon-controlled governments and religions to suppress our vibration using fear tactics, we will have great difficulty progressing as a people. Fear is a sure fire way to shut down our vortex of creation and turn us into impotent spirits that can be easily manipulated in mass. Tavistock Institute. Part 93

Earthly Man, but not Spiritual Man, is like a shadow, created by the Archons. Unfortunately, many of our institutions and cultural set, and ways of …

If what we call humans originate from a single source the program could easily have been implanted that would infiltrate every subsequent member of the “species” (software). Only by becoming Conscious beyond mind – body can we override the program. The “software program” is running in every human mind – body computer and it has been encoded for eons. This means opening our minds to consciousness which is not subject to the manipulation of the Matrix or the DNA program. It operates outside of “space” and “time” and beyond the vibrational walls of the Matrix. Tavistock Institute. Part 92

If what we call humans originate from a single source the program could easily have been implanted that would infiltrate every subsequent member of the …

The Archons reside in seven concentric spheres ( taken from Babylonian cosmology ) that imprison the innermost dungeon , the Earth. Through the human body and soul , each person is tied to the world and subject to the rule of Fate — the physical laws … The divine essence is unconscious of itself – ignorant – until awakened and freed by Gnostic knowledge. The revelatory experience of ‘gnosis’ — of both knowing and being known — was immediate, compelling and numinous. The ‘rulers’ of this world, the archons, seduced and bound man to and within the created systems and powers to prevent him from ‘waking up’ and remembering his original ‘home’ and the true God. ‘Gnosis’ frees man from his thraldom to these powers and systems. Salvation depends on ” awakening ” to a revealed knowledge of the soul ‘ s identity with a heavenly realm of light. Through the body and soul man is subjected to the power of the Archons; only the spirit can be awakened by knowledge. Tavistock Institute. Part 91

The Archons reside in seven concentric spheres ( taken from Babylonian cosmology ) that imprison the innermost dungeon , the Earth. Through the human body …

The human ego is that aspect of our consciousness which experiences itself as an archon – a pm-existing subject, agent or `cause’ of action, whose identity remains unchanged by its actions. The psychoanalyst Carl Jung saw in gnostic mythology a symbolic representation of the complex relationship between man’s ego (the arrogant god Ialdaboath), its source in a deeper feminine level of the soul or psyche (the aeon known as Sophia) and the pleroma itself. Whilst acknowledging and identifying with the psychological insights of the gnostics, in particular their understanding of the way the ego denied its own source in man’s inner knowing and inner being, he recognised no truly transhuman or trans-physical dimension to the inner human being. For Jung the pleroma was simply a symbol of the human unconscious, the aeons and archons of the gnostics a symbol of psychological archetypes belonging to that unconscious – ego and self, anima and animus, persona and shadow. Tavistock Institute. Part 90

The human ego is that aspect of our consciousness which experiences itself as an archon – a pm-existing subject, agent or `cause’ of action, whose …

Mind control is the main technique for imposing the false value systems that corrupted the original Planetary Logos and replaced the original planetary brain, thus substituting an artificial planetary brain. These alterations are imposed and enforced by the Power Elite, sometimes known as the Illuminati, who were originally empowered by the Archons. The Power Elite, at the highest level, operates through the three main pillars of society: the religious, financial, and academic institutions. Tavistock Institute. Part 89

Mind control is the main technique for imposing the false value systems that corrupted the original Planetary Logos and replaced the original planetary brain, thus …

The Archons sought to compel humanity to believe in them, and to deny the existence of a true reality that we can only find through our personal efforts. In the Gnostic Gospels, Christ says, ‘Open the door for yourself, so you will know what is.’ But as Christianity merged with the Roman Empire, it enforced faith and obedience, rather than self-knowledge. According to Lash, the Gnostics recognized the rise of Christianity as a deviation from spiritual truth. They believed it was devised by the Archons, who wanted to maintain control of humanity. Tavistock Insititute. Part 88

The Archons sought to compel humanity to believe in them, and to deny the existence of a true reality that we can only find through …

Salvation was destroyed through this process of introducing Occult based science into the world. This Occult based science is our current Modern Science which I call Scientism. The significant thing to understand here as these occult Freemasonic secret societies fabricated the Fake Evolutionary Theory using our Freemasonic educational system to push it. But the ultimate aim all along was to later push a Metaphysical New Age Spiritual Evolutionary Doctrine. In order to increase the believability of Evolutionary Theory, The Freemasons needed to create a long succession of deceptions. Tavistock Institutet. Part 87

Salvation was destroyed through this process of introducing Occult based science into the world. This Occult based science is our current Modern Science which I …

THE ARCHON NETWORK – Unfortunately, we are not free. We haven’t been free for many millennia. We have overlords, trans-dimensional beings who have invaded Earth many thousands of years ago, and still remain. In the ancient legends, they are known as the gods. They keep us as their herd, just as we keep farm animals. We are their food. We have been in their grip for thousands of years. We have been mind-controlled, brainwashed and hypnotized to believe these illusions to be reality. Tavistock Institute. Part 86

THE ARCHON NETWORK – Unfortunately, we are not free. We haven’t been free for many millennia. We have overlords, trans-dimensional beings who have invaded Earth …

A colossal spiritual force is put into him that is able to transform him into a Real Human, in an essence much higher than this world. Freeing from deceit, a man becomes stronger and smarter. The more clever, spiritually free people are, the harder it is for the Archons to implement their plans, and the weaker their influence on people becomes. Tavistock Institute. Part 85

A colossal spiritual force is put into him that is able to transform him into a Real Human, in an essence much higher than this …

There is none bound, none fired, none seeking to be free, — for always That is a perfect freedom. It is so free that It is not even bound by Its liberty. It can play at being bound without Incurring a real bondage. Its chain Is a self-imposed convention, Its limitation In the ego a transitional device that It uses In order to repeat Its transcendence and universality In the scheme of the Individual Ego. The Transcendent, the Supracosmic is absolute and free in Itself beyond Time and Space and beyond the conceptual opposites of finite and infinite. But in cosmos It uses Its liberty of self-formation, Its Maya, to make a scheme of Itself in the complementary terms of unity and multiplicity, and this multiple unity It establishes in the three conditions of the subconscient, the conscient and the superconscient. Tavistock Institute. Part 84

There is none bound, none fired, none seeking to be free, — for always That is a perfect freedom. It is so free that It …

While many sages, saints, mystics, and masters have moved into the next stage of super consciousness, most of us have had only limited glimpses of what awaits us. The super conscious level is where your soul awakens to its true nature and your pseudo-soul has been dealt with. It is the domain of the transpersonal, beyond the individual self. When the subtler and higher mind is expressed in the form of superconscious visions and Revelations , attention has reached into the superconscious dimension of mind , beyond the gross body and its world . Tavistock Institute. Part 83

While many sages, saints, mystics, and masters have moved into the next stage of super consciousness, most of us have had only limited glimpses of …

Ego is the reason the Archons manufactured royalty and a social structure and, in a smart way, they got the go ahead by the masses. This did and still does contribute to the power of the Lower Lights. It’s a front, like the Reptilians being in control of the manipulation when it is really the Archons. Ego is the root of human difficulties, but it was engineered this way. Ego divides countries, states, towns, and people. Tavistock Institute. Part 82

Ego is the reason the Archons manufactured royalty and a social structure and, in a smart way, they got the go ahead by the masses. …

Chemistry vs Alchemy: Chemistry is a science that deals with the composition of properties and substances. Alchemy is the science of converting the non-physical into the material, and transmuting the material back into the non-physical Alchemy is NOT magic. It is the science of vibrations. Tavistock Institute. Part 81

Chemistry vs Alchemy: Chemistry is a science that deals with the composition of properties and substances. Alchemy is the science of converting the non-physical into …

To understand life directly, we are going to undertake a journey from fragmentation to homogeneity, from partialness to Wholeness, from the movement of knowing to the action of understanding, from the slumber of knowledge and experience to the state of being Awake or Awareness. When the higher stage bombards the lower stage, it dissipates the lower stage which goes to abeyance. The higher illuminates the lower. and not vice verso – this lays foundation of a creative principle. Tavistock Institute. Part 80

To understand life directly, we are going to undertake a journey from fragmentation to homogeneity, from partialness to Wholeness, from the movement of knowing to …

There are higher dimensions beyond Earth. The ego acknowledges itself. The ego understands it is separate from other people. It understands it will die and one day no longer exist as it does right now. The ego is tied to temporary experience, consciousness is not. When we push beyond the awareness of one’s ego, one expands in infinite consciousness. Tavistock Institute. Part 79

There are higher dimensions beyond Earth. The ego acknowledges itself. The ego understands it is separate from other people. It understands it will die and …

Since all it wants is the infinite, but since it is terrified of accepting the necessary death, it goes about seeking infinity in ways that prevent it. Since the ripple wants release and is afraid of it at the same time it arranges compromise and a substitute. Instead of finding actual Godhead, the ripple pretends itself to be god, cosmocentric, heroic, all-sufficient, immortal. This is not only the beginning of narcissism and the battle of life against death, it is a reduced or restricted version of consciousness, because no longer is the ripple one with the ocean, it is trying itself to be the ocean. Tavistock Institute. Part 78

Since all it wants is the infinite, but since it is terrified of accepting the necessary death, it goes about seeking infinity in ways that …

Before we can lift the veil, we have to arrive at some kind of concept of what is behind the veil. We have spent so many centuries approaching life either objectively or subjectively, dealing with either cause or with effect, that lifting the veil is no easy matter. Behind the veil is a completely different reality, a reality we cannot imagine until we have experienced it. Ascension consciousness is a kind of divine Gestalt where the whole is not only more than the parts, but when they come together they become different from the sum of the parts. Tavistock Institute. Part 77

Before we can lift the veil, we have to arrive at some kind of concept of what is behind the veil. We have spent so …

Find the root of everything, look for the origin of everything. We just use a fraction of our divine power. Grasping the Root of Divine Power. Find the root of everything, look for the origin of everything. This was the true essence of cultivation. All powers have their origins, their birthplace. To tread the ancient path meant to search for the origin, to search for the path that led to the everyonés Higher Divine Self. A sacred space is a focused portal and spiritual gateway to worlds beyond our own. Tavistock Institute. Part 76

Find the root of everything, look for the origin of everything. We just use a fraction of our divine power. Grasping the Root of Divine …

Scientists tell us that currently, we only use approximately ten percent of our mental, or brain capacity. Ask yourself this question, if we were only meant to use a fraction of our brains capacity, then why would it have been created to utilize only ten percent of its capacity in the first place? Why would God give us such an unlimited resource to create from, if we were only to access just a limited fraction of it? If that were truly the case, then why wouldn’t our brains have been created just big enough for what we are currently using? Tavistock Institute. Part 75

Scientists tell us that currently, we only use approximately ten percent of our mental, or brain capacity. Ask yourself this question, if we were only …

Superconsciousness takes human awareness outside the brain. We may say even that the brain is only a filter for superconsciousness. It can serve as a window onto superconsciousness, much as windows themselves reveal the scenery lying beyond them, but the brain can no more produce superconsciousness than a window can produce scenery. That is why scientists encounter so much frustration in their efforts to subject higher levels of awareness to testing by the scientific method. The conscious mind cannot oblige to do its bidding. Tavistock Institute. Part 74

Superconsciousness takes human awareness outside the brain. We may say even that the brain is only a filter for superconsciousness. It can serve as a …

The infinite power that we now notice in the mind is expressed in the mind’s clear, perfect vision of the ever-transcending Beyond. Machine-power is to some extent blind. It takes tremendous joy in destroying the world. Our soul-power is constantly, incessantly, trying to come to the fore and guide our outer consciousness, our outer life. Unfortunately, right now we do not pay any attention to the soul-power; but once we go deep within and become familiar with it, we shall be able to use it most effectively. The soul-power is the power of universal oneness. Arise! Awake! Realise and achieve the Highest with the help of the illumining, guiding and fulfilling Masters. Tavistock Institute. Part 73

The infinite power that we now notice in the mind is expressed in the mind’s clear, perfect vision of the ever-transcending Beyond. Machine-power is to …

The Power of Oneness: Live the Life You Choose. Your Infinite Potential. If We Cannot Perceive Energy with Our Five Senses, How Do We Know That It Exists? What Is The Importance of Recognizing We Are Energy? We’ve always been aware that our bodies are part of the material, physical world. While this is true, when we perceive ourselves exclusively as matter, we are only acknowledging the body/mind aspects of ourselves. This perspective completely ignores the non-material world where the infinite potential of our spirit exists. When we remember that we exist in both the material and non-material dimensions we are acknowledging our whole self. Tavistock Institute. Part 72

The Power of Oneness: Live the Life You Choose. Your Infinite Potential. If We Cannot Perceive Energy with Our Five Senses, How Do We Know …

Toward a Superconsciousness. The Light of Superconsciousness – How to Benefit from Emerging Spiritual Trends” explains the emerging techniques and attitudes that will help ease the transition to a more spiritually nurturing society and teach us to awaken the seeds of intuition, freedom, and joy that lie dormant within each of us. Tavistock Institute. Part 71

Toward a Superconsciousness. The Light of Superconsciousness – How to Benefit from Emerging Spiritual Trends” explains the emerging techniques and attitudes that will help ease …

The pineal gland and the pituitary gland. Neuroscience. The portal to the truth is the human mind, when we connect the heart with the pineal gland — the center of our spiritual senses. There are many ways to reach this center, namely, through different forms of meditation. All our institutional systems, our government, our schools, and our universities reflect a first chakra energy. The moment we begin to challenge the belief systems which are held in the first chakra, we begin the awakening or remembering process. There is no easy path to enlightenment, no pattern of chakra opening that is any easier than another. Tavistock Institute. Part 70

The pineal gland and the pituitary gland. Neuroscience. The portal to the truth is the human mind, when we connect the heart with the pineal …

The third eye can see beyond the physical as is looks out through the chakrasystem when we meditate or look for answers from higher frequencies. The pineal gland contains a complete map of the visual field of the eyes and it plays several significant roles in human functioning. When activated, the pineal gland becomes the line of communication with the higher planes. The crown chakra reaches down until its vortex touches the pineal gland. How to learn to activate the pineal gland.Tavistock Institute. Part 69

The third eye can see beyond the physical as is looks out through the chakrasystem when we meditate or look for answers from higher frequencies. …

A Simple Account of the True Art of Alchemy. The Pineal is a powerful “Spiritual Telegraph”. The source of consciousness lies beyond the grasp of consciousness. For the more subtle is also the more powerful,—one might say, the more truly concrete; it is less bound than the gross, it has a greater permanence in its being along with a greater potentiality, plasticity and range in its becoming. Each plateau of the hill of being gives to our widening experience a higher plane of our consciousness and a richer world for our existence. Tavistock Institute. Part 68

A Simple Account of the True Art of Alchemy. The Pineal is a powerful “Spiritual Telegraph”. The source of consciousness lies beyond the grasp of …

When the doors of perception are cleansed, man will see things as they truly are, infinite. The Plutocrats: The Rise of the New Global SuperRich and the Fall of Everyone Else. The trouble with the plutocracy is that it looks at our whole industrial world as a hunting-ground One World Order). Plutocracy is the rule of money, or of the moneyed. A plutocratic society could take a number of forms, including dictatorship and technocracy, but not democracy. Tavistock Institute. Part 67

When the doors of perception are cleansed, man will see things as they truly are, infinite. The Plutocrats: The Rise of the New Global SuperRich …

The Self is born in the soul for its supreme illumination, and for the welfare of humanity, i.e. the enlightenment of the incarnate Self. This is the supreme moment in spiritual involution when potential perfection is consummated (last birth), and now and hence forward proceeds the fulfilment of the Divine nature, which through the Self is brought to realise Itself. So did the Self of forceful mien, conqueror of the quaternary, foresee his Divine mission. Tavistock Institute. Part 66

“The Self is born in the soul for its supreme illumination, and for the welfare of humanity, i.e. the enlightenment of the incarnate Self. This …

The goal is the spontaneous arising of spiritual freedom. In the context of Evolutionary Enlightenment, this essentially means that the fundamental obstacles to one’s own capacity to participate whole-heartedly in the life process have been transcended. As a result, one is free to fly on the wings of the Authentic Self, becoming a powerful expression of the evolutionary impulse in human form. The path is the means by which, through noble effort, one reaches that goal. But always remember, the path and the goal are one. Tavistock Institute. Part 65

The goal is the spontaneous arising of spiritual freedom. In the context of Evolutionary Enlightenment, this essentially means that the fundamental obstacles to one’s own …

The path and the goal are one means that the experience of freedom and the practice of freedom are one and the same. The desire to be free that inspires us to practice is never separate from the goal of liberation that we are reaching for. By acting, here and now, on that profound aspiration, we manifest the immediacy of our own potential for liberation. Tavistock Institute. Part 64

The path and the goal are one means that the experience of freedom and the practice of freedom are one and the same. The desire …

IN EVOLUTIONARY ENLIGHTENMENT, there are two ways that one can awaken to a dimension of self that is absolute. ANYONE wuo is SERIOUS ABOUT embarking on the path of spiritual evolution must make the effort to acquaint themselves with the territoryThe territory of Evolutionary Enlightenment is the interior of the cosmos. What is the interior of the cosmos? It is your very own experience of consciousness and cognition, right now. SPIRITUAL AWAKENING IS and always has been about self-discovery. Spiritual practice, to a large degree, is about learning to master the challenging art of differentiating between the many dimensions of your own self. Tavistock Institute. Part 63

IN EVOLUTIONARY ENLIGHTENMENT, there are two ways that one can awaken to a dimension of self that is absolute. ANYONE wuo is SERIOUS ABOUT embarking …

Soul Evolution The purpose of life on the earth plane is soul evolution. The end goal of soul evolution is eventually merging with the consciousness of the Ultimate Being. When it is and the wisdom is gained, you will be able to raise your vibration naturally, and higher consciousness can be supported once again. The Higher Self is the pan of you that is becoming enlightened, but the Lower Self does not want to give up control. Infinite wisdom is obtained when a person reaches total consciousness. Tavistock Institute. Part 62

Soul Evolution The purpose of life on the earth plane is soul evolution. The end goal of soul evolution is eventually merging with the consciousness …

One of the most important things to learn is how to raise your vibrations to a Higher Level of Consciousness. By first reaching into your right cerebrum to [re]discover your inner self and then by raising the vibratory essence of your core to a Level that knows for certain that you possess the power to influence the future, you will have raised yourself to a transcendent stage which becomes your new level of enlightened self. It is from this platform that you are empowered to will your future. Tavistock Institute. Part 61

One of the most important things to learn is how to raise your vibrations to a Higher Level of Consciousness. By first reaching into your …

To understand alchemy and the pursuit of The Stone, you must view it from two perspectives. The first view relates to the world without, while the second, to the world within. The first is the well-known material alchemy. Their quest was to create elemental gold out of base metals, such as lead. The promise of great riches to the alchemist who accomplished this feat lured many into field. The alchemical symbol of turning lead into gold , for example, has no significance if it does not somehow help the practising student of alchemy to transform his own leaden states of consciousness into golden, pure and radiant states of mind. Tavistock Institute. Part 60

To understand alchemy and the pursuit of The Stone, you must view it from two perspectives. The first view relates to the world without, while …

When you expand your heart charka, in many of the cases, Rudra granthi automatically breaks, paving the way for kundalini to ascend easily. Rudra granthi is the toughest of the three blocks. If this block is removed, your gateway to liberation is opened. Time is a mass consciousness creation, time is not a foundation of reality that was here before humanity existed. The mass consciousness of humanity created it.Tavistock Institute. Part 59

When you expand your heart charka, in many of the cases, Rudra granthi automatically breaks, paving the way for kundalini to ascend easily. Rudra granthi …

TRANSMUTING FEAR INTO VICTORY.Fear is the frequency of separation, and generates dualism. Duality is a culturally indoctrinated lens of perception. The purpose of duality isn’t about choosing sides; it’s about transcending the illusion of sides altogether, and learning to embrace the whole. Darkness is light distorted through consciousness. Distorted, fragmented, and seemingly separate though it is, darkness is still light. Our purpose here on Earth is to bring these fragmented aspects of duality—our fragmented aspects of duality—back into wholeness. Tavistock Institute. Part 58

TRANSMUTING FEAR INTO VICTORY.Fear is the frequency of separation, and generates dualism. Duality is a culturally indoctrinated lens of perception. The purpose of duality isn’t …

The ego must be transcended to reach the supreme consciousness. We must move beyond fear and realize that any kind of possession is an illusion. Letting go of primal fear, we access the Primal, which is the Divine. To reach to this union or come by this contact it is necessary to enter or at least open into a greater consciousness than that of the human mental being who is shut up in the limitations of an individualised living body. Tavistock Institute. Part 57

The ego must be transcended to reach the supreme consciousness. We must move beyond fear and realize that any kind of possession is an illusion. …

The mastery of Polarization is the mastery of the fundamental principles of Mental Transmutation or Mental Alchemy. Spiritual seekers is not just interested in mere temporal existence. Empirical life belongs to time, but transcendental life belongs to timeless Reality. Therefore don’t try to change the world, change your mind. The Western World wants to change the environment, change the object. But the world will remain the same world. Tavistock Institute. Part 56

The mastery of Polarization is the mastery of the fundamental principles of Mental Transmutation or Mental Alchemy. Spiritual seekers is not just interested in mere …

Due to the curse of ego, there is just no way in this world for us to see (that is, for us to perceive) directly our human sojourn as it really is. Our vision is contaminated. We simply cannot see past this contamination. This cloud is a product of the curse we are under, a curse that impacts on all of us equally just as water impacts upon all fish equally. Because of this blindness, because we cannot ever see clearly, a shepherd is needed. We cannot save ourselves from the anguish of life without a guide who is beyond the influence of ego’s contamination. Tavistock Institute. Part 55

Due to the curse of ego, there is just no way in this world for us to see (that is, for us to perceive) directly …

The journey from bondage to freedom is a timeless one. We have traveled this road throughout all of recorded history and we travel it again and again in our own lives. In every generation, and in every event in our own lives, there are forces within us and around us that try to enslave us, and our freedom is a never-ending promise of Divine grace. Ultimately what prevents liberty of soul is ego enslavement. Tavistock Institute. Part 54

The journey from bondage to freedom is a timeless one. We have traveled this road throughout all of recorded history and we travel it again …

Unless we come out of the cloud cast by our ego we will not be able to experience the impact of Universal – Self . It is our individual obligation to break the barriers of Individual – Self and liberate ourselves. No one can do it on our behalf. Unless we rise above these narrow walls and break these barriers of our own make , and recognise ourselves as the Human self or Universal self , there is no guarantee to lasting peace and progress. To be released from the bondage of your ego, you must first recognize that you are actually being held. Tavistock Institute. Part 53

Unless we come out of the cloud cast by our ego we will not be able to experience the impact of Universal – Self . …

“Your vision will become clear only when you look into your heart. Who looks outside, dreams. Who looks inside, awakens.” Our conditioned fears, our false self, drive us to resist change. Unable to free ourselves of these emotional blockages, we succumb to them and chose to remain as we are. By surrendering to this conditioning from the past, this echo of the ego, we fail to discover our true being and what our authentic purpose in life is. We fail to “Awaken the Universe Within”. Tavistock Institute. Part 52

“Your vision will become clear only when you look into your heart. Who looks outside, dreams. Who looks inside, awakens.” Our conditioned fears, our false …

If someone want´s to change their inner frequency they also must become a “Barrier-Breaker”, from one level to another, or from one dimension to a higher. Our function is to break the seven barriers; the seven seals to self-realization. The Barrier-Breaker don’t focus on how big the barrier or problem is but rather how big God is and His promise to help us overcome. A Spiritual Barrier-Breaker must be fearless. The Divine Energy is the active component for all spiritual progress and transformation. The ego is the passive component that prevents all spiritual progress. Tavistock Institute. Part 51

If someone want´s to change their inner frequency they also must become a “Barrier-Breaker”, from one level to another, or from one dimension to a …

Breaking the bonds of your own thought, is the release into Divinity, accepted, realized and enjoyed, here and now. Our function is to break the seven barriers; the seven seals to the realization, that we are the Life that He revealed us to be. As far as we can tell, only about 5 to 10 percent of our genes are actually working; what the rest are doing remains unknown. In other words, it seems the majority of our genes are inactive. Divine Self realization. Tavistock Institute. Part 50

Breaking the bonds of your own thought, is the release into Divinity, accepted, realized and enjoyed, here and now. Our function is to break the …

We can attract at the Lower Self level and at a deeper Subconscious Self level. The surface of the soul consists of lower frequencies; the energies of the souls which are deeper within consist of higher freauencies. Setting aside time to tune into their presence will help you to fine tune your divine intuition and deepen your conscious connection with the divine higher realm. Faith is a visionary force that allows us to open our hearts as we awaken to our souls. Light is not stuff, light is vibration. The key Is to go through your authentic self. where you can become at one with your divine essence. Your authentic self is the doorway to your divine essence. Tavistock Institute. Part 49

We can attract at the Lower Self level and at a deeper Subconscious Self level. The surface of the soul consists of lower frequencies; the …